2016E-RAM 15 25 35-UG-2nd R1 PDF

Download a FREE electronic copy of the Owner’s Manual
and Warranty Booklet by visiting:
WWW.RAMTRUCKS.COM/EN/OWNERS/MANUALS OR
WWW.RAMTRUCKS.COM/EN/WARRANTY (U.S.);
WWW.OWNERS.MOPAR.CA/EN (CANADA).
© 2015 FCA US LLC. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED. RAM IS A REGISTERED TRADEMARK OF FCA US LLC.
16D241-926-AA
RAM TRUCKS 1500/2500/3500
SECOND EDITION Rev. 1
USER GUIDE
2185884_16b_RAM_1500_2500_3500_UG_Rev1_091615.indd 1 9/16/15 8:48 AM

If you are the first registered retail owner of your vehicle, you This guide has been prepared to help you get quickly
may obtain a complimentary printed copy of the Owner’s acquainted with your new Ram brand vehicle and to
Manual, Navigation/Uconnect Manuals or Warranty Booklet by provide a convenient reference source for common
calling 1-866-726-4636 (U.S.) or 1-800-387-1143 (Canada) or by questions. However, it is not a substitute for your
contacting your dealer. Owner’s Manual.
For complete operational instructions, maintenance

IMPORTANT procedures and important safety messages, please consult
This User Guide is intended to familiarize you with the your Owner’s Manual, Navigation/Uconnect Manuals and
important features of your vehicle. The DVD enclosed contains other Warning Labels in your vehicle.
your Owner’s Manual, Navigation/Uconnect Manuals,
Not all features shown in this guide may apply to your
Warranty Booklets, Tire Warranty and Roadside Assistance
vehicle. For additional information on accessories to help
(new vehicles purchased in the U.S.) or Roadside Assistance
personalize your vehicle, visit www.mopar.com (U.S.),
(new vehicles purchased in Canada) in electronic format. We
www.mopar.ca (Canada) or your local Ram brand dealer.
hope you find it useful. U.S. residents can purchase
replacement DVD kits by visiting www.techauthority.com and
Canadian residents can purchase replacement DVD kits by Driving and Alcohol
calling 1-800-387-1143. Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes
of collisions. Your driving ability can be seriously
The driver’s primary responsibility is the safe operation of the vehicle. Driving
impaired with blood alcohol levels far below the legal
while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control, resulting in a collision and
minimum. If you are drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a
personal injury. FCA US LLC strongly recommends that the driver use extreme
caution when using any device or feature that may take their attention designated non-drinking driver, call a cab, a friend, or
off the road. Use of any electrical devices, such as cellular telephones, use public transportation.
computers, portable radios, vehicle navigation or other devices, by the driver
while the vehicle is moving is dangerous and could lead to a serious collision.
WARNING
Texting while driving is also dangerous and should never be done while the
Driving after drinking can lead to a collision. Your
vehicle is moving. If you find yourself unable to devote your full attention to
vehicle operation, pull off the road to a safe location and stop your vehicle.
perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are slower, and
Some states or provinces prohibit the use of cellular telephones or texting while your judgment is impaired when you have been drinking.
driving. It is always the driver’s responsibility to comply with all local laws. Never drink and then drive.

TABLE OF CONTENTS
INTRODUCTION/WELCOME ELECTRONICS
WELCOME FROM FCA US LLC . . . . . . . 3 YOUR VEHICLE'S SOUND SYSTEM . . . 72
CYBERSECURITY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
CONTROLS AT A GLANCE IDENTIFYING YOUR RADIO . . . . . . . . 75
DRIVER COCKPIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 UCONNECT ACCESS . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER . . . . . . . . . . . 8 RADIO 3.0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
UCONNECT 3.0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
GETTING STARTED UCONNECT 3.0 VOICE RECOGNITION
KEY FOB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 QUICK TIPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
KEYLESS ENTER-N-GO . . . . . . . . . . 13 UCONNECT 5.0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
REMOTE START . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 UCONNECT 5.0 VOICE RECOGNITION
VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM . . . . . . . 15 QUICK TIPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
UCONNECT 8.4A/8.4AN . . . . . . . . . 111
SEAT BELT SYSTEMS . . . . . . . . . . . 16
UCONNECT 8.4A/8.4AN VOICE
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM RECOGNITION QUICK TIPS . . . . . . . 125
(SRS) — AIR BAGS . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 UCONNECT PHONE . . . . . . . . . . . 144
CHILD RESTRAINTS . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 STEERING WHEEL AUDIO
HEAD RESTRAINTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 CONTROLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
FRONT SEATS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION
HEATED/VENTILATED SEATS . . . . . . . 37 CENTER (EVIC) OR DRIVER INFORMATION
HEATED STEERING WHEEL . . . . . . . . 39 DISPLAY (DID) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
TILT STEERING COLUMN . . . . . . . . . 40 PROGRAMMABLE FEATURES . . . . . . 156
POWER FOLDING OUTSIDE MIRRORS UNIVERSAL GARAGE DOOR OPENER
FOR STANDARD AND TRAILER TOW . . 42 (HomeLink) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
POWER INVERTER . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE POWER OUTLETS . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
ENGINE BREAK-IN AUXILIARY SWITCHES — IF
EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
RECOMMENDATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
TURN SIGNALS/WIPER/WASHER/HIGH OFF-ROAD CAPABILITIES
BEAMS LEVER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 ELECTRONICALLY SHIFTED FOUR
HEADLIGHT SWITCH . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION . . . . . . . 166
ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL . . . . . 46
EIGHT-SPEED AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION UTILITY
— IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 TONNEAU COVER . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
ELECTRONIC RANGE SELECT (ERS) EASY-OFF TAILGATE . . . . . . . . . . . 169
OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 PICKUP BOX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
1500 AIR SUSPENSION SYSTEM . . . . 51 RAMBOX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
REBEL AIR SUSPENSION SYSTEM . . . 54 TOWING & PAYLOAD . . . . . . . . . . . 176
2500-3500 AIR SUSPENSION TOW/HAUL MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 INTEGRATED TRAILER BRAKE
STOP/START SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED . 58 MODULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
MANUAL CLIMATE CONTROLS WITHOUT RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND
TOUCHSCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 MOTORHOME, ETC.) . . . . . . . . . . . 179
MANUAL CLIMATE CONTROLS WITH 1500 3.0L DIESEL
TOUCHSCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 DIESEL ENGINE BREAK-IN
AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROLS WITH RECOMMENDATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . 185
TOUCHSCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 DIESEL ENGINE STARTING
PARKSENSE FRONT AND REAR PARK PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
ASSIST — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . 66 DIESEL FUEL FILTER/WATER
PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA — SEPARATOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 EXHAUST REGENERATION . . . . . . . 188
POWER SLIDING REAR WINDOW . . . . 69 COOL-DOWN IDLE CHART . . . . . . . . 189
POWER SUNROOF . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 ADDING FUEL — DIESEL ENGINE
WIND BUFFETING . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 ONLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
DIESEL EXHAUST FLUID . . . . . . . . 191
TABLE OF CONTENTS
6.7L CUMMINS DIESEL DIESEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
DIESEL ENGINE BREAK-IN ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 6.7L DIESEL
RECOMMENDATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . 195 WITH 68RFE TRANSMISSION . . . . . 250
DIESEL ENGINE STARTING ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 6.7L DIESEL
PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195 WITH AS69RC TRANSMISSION . . . . 252
DIESEL EXHAUST BRAKE (ENGINE FLUID CAPACITIES — GAS ENGINE . . 254
BRAKING) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197 FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS, AND GENUINE
IDLE-UP FEATURE (AUTOMATIC PARTS — GAS ENGINE . . . . . . . . . . 255
TRANSMISSION ONLY) . . . . . . . . . 198 FLUID CAPACITIES —
ENGINE MOUNTED FUEL FILTER/WATER 1500 3.0L DIESEL . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
SEPARATOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199 FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS, AND GENUINE
UNDERBODY MOUNTED FUEL PARTS — 1500 3.0L DIESEL . . . . . 257
FILTER/WATER SEPARATOR . . . . . . . 200 FLUID CAPACITIES — 6.7L CUMMINS
EXHAUST REGENERATION . . . . . . . 201 DIESEL ENGINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
COOL-DOWN IDLE CHART . . . . . . . . 203 FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS, AND GENUINE
ADDING FUEL — DIESEL ENGINE PARTS — 6.7L CUMMINS DIESEL
ONLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203 ENGINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
DIESEL EXHAUST FLUID . . . . . . . . 204 MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES . . . . . 262
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE — GASOLINE
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES ENGINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE . . . . . . . . . 209 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE —
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER WARNING 1500 3.0L DIESEL ENGINE . . . . . . . 267
LIGHTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE — 6.7L
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER INDICATOR CUMMINS DIESEL ENGINE . . . . . . . 273
LIGHTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215 FUSES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS . . . . . 216 TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION . . 285
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING . . . . 217 REPLACEMENT BULBS . . . . . . . . . 288
JUMP-STARTING PROCEDURES . . . . 230
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
EMERGENCY TOW HOOKS . . . . . . . . 233
SHIFT LEVER OVERRIDE — 6-SPEED FCA US LLC CUSTOMER CENTER . . . 289
TRANSMISSION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234 FCA CANADA INC. CUSTOMER
MANUAL PARK RELEASE — 8 SPEED CENTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
TRANSMISSION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236 ASSISTANCE FOR THE HEARING
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE . . . . 238 IMPAIRED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE . . . . . . 238 PUBLICATIONS ORDERING . . . . . . . 289
ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE SYSTEM REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS IN THE
(EARS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240 UNITED STATES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR) . . . . . 240 MOPAR® ACCESSORIES
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE AUTHENTIC ACCESSORIES BY
TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD . . . 241 MOPAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 3.6L . . . 242 FAQ’s
ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 5.7L . . . 244 FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS . . . 292
ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 6.4L . . . 246
ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 3.0L INDEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
2
INTRODUCTION/WELCOME
WELCOME FROM FCA US LLC

Congratulations on selecting your new FCA US LLC (“FCA US”) vehicle. Be assured
that it represents precision workmanship, distinctive styling, and high quality - all
essentials that are traditional to our vehicles.
Your new FCA US vehicle has characteristics to enhance the driver's control under
some driving conditions. These are to assist the driver and are never a substitute for
attentive driving. They can never take the driver's place. Always drive carefully.
Your new vehicle has many features for the comfort and convenience of you and your
passengers. Some of these should not be used when driving because they take your
eyes from the road or your attention from driving. Never text while driving or take your
eyes more than momentarily off the road.
This guide illustrates and describes the operation of features and equipment that are
either standard or optional on this vehicle. This guide may also include a description
of features and equipment that are no longer available or were not ordered on this
vehicle. Please disregard any features and equipment described in this guide that are
not available on this vehicle. FCA US reserves the right to make changes in design
and specifications and/or make additions to or improvements to its products without
imposing any obligation upon itself to install them on products previously manufac-
tured.
This User Guide has been prepared to help you quickly become acquainted with the
important features of your vehicle. It contains most things you will need to operate
and maintain the vehicle, including emergency information.
The DVD includes a computer application containing detailed Owner's information
which can be viewed on a personal computer or MAC computer. The multimedia DVD
also includes videos which can be played on any standard DVD player (including the
Uconnect Touchscreen Radios if equipped with DVD player capabilities). Additional
DVD operational information is located on the back of the DVD sleeve.
For complete owner information, refer to your Owner's Manual on the DVD in the owner’s
kit provided at the time of new vehicle purchase. For your convenience, the information
contained on the DVD may also be printed and saved for future reference.
FCA US is committed to protecting our environment and natural resources. By
converting from paper to electronic delivery for the majority of the user information
for your vehicle, together we greatly reduce the demand for tree-based products and
lessen the stress on our environment.
3
VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA

With respect to any vehicles sold in Canada, the name FCA US LLC shall be deemed
to be deleted and the name FCA Canada Inc. used in substitution (excluding legal
lines).
WARNING!
• Pedals that cannot move freely can cause loss of vehicle control and increase
the risk of serious personal injury.
• Always make sure that objects cannot fall into the driver foot well while the
vehicle is moving. Objects can become trapped under the brake pedal and
accelerator pedal causing a loss of vehicle control.
• Failure to properly follow floor mat installation or mounting can cause inter-
ference with the brake pedal and accelerator pedal operation causing loss of
control of the vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle.
Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should
be warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the transmission gear
selector.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location accessible to
children. A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the
vehicle.
• Never use the ‘PARK’ position as a substitute for the parking brake. Always
apply the parking brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle movement
and possible injury or damage.
• Refer to your Owner's Manual on the DVD for further details.
4
USE OF AFTERMARKET PRODUCTS (ELECTRONICS)

The use of aftermarket devices including cell phones, MP3 players, GPS systems, or
chargers may affect the performance of on-board wireless features including Keyless
Enter-N-Go and Remote Start range. If you are experiencing difficulties with any of
your wireless features, try disconnecting your aftermarket devices to see if the
situation improves. If your symptoms persist, please see an authorized dealer.
When it comes to service, remember that your authorized dealer knows your vehicle
best, has factory-trained technicians and genuine MOPAR® parts, and cares about
your satisfaction.
5
CONTROLS AT A GLANCE
DRIVER COCKPIT
1. Headlight Switch pg. 45

2. Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) Controls Or Driver Information
Display (DID) Controls pg. 155
3. Turn Signal/Wiper/Washer/High Beams Lever pg. 44
4. Instrument Cluster pg. 8
5. Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) or Driver Information Display (DID)
pg. 155
6. Electronic Speed Control pg. 46
7. Engine Starting/Stopping pg. 14
8. Four Wheel Drive Operation pg. 166
9. Uconnect Radio pg. 75
10. Climate Controls pg. 61
6
11. Switch Panel

12. Power Inverter Outlet pg. 162
13. Glove Compartment
14. Power Outlet
15. Shift Lever
16. Hood Release (below steering wheel at base of instrument panel) pg. 241
17. Parking Brake Release
18. Power Windows
19. Power Door Locks
20. Power Mirrors
7
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
1. Temperature Gauge
2. Tachometer
3. Voltmeter
(See page 209 for Instrument Cluster Warning Lights.)
8
4. Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) Or Driver Information Display (DID)

5. Oil Pressure Gauge
6. Speedometer
7. Fuel Gauge
(See page 215 for Instrument Cluster Indicator Lights.)
9
GETTING STARTED
KEY FOB
This feature allows the driver to operate
the ignition switch with the push of a
button, as long as the Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) transmitter is in the passen-
ger compartment.
The Keyless Push Button Ignition has
four operating positions, three of which
are labeled and will illuminate when in
position. The three positions are OFF,
ACC, and ON/RUN. The fourth position is
START, during start RUN will illuminate.
Key Fob
1 — Air Suspension
2 — Unlock
3 — Lock
4 — Remote Start
5 — Panic
10
GETTING STARTED
NOTE:
In case the ignition switch does not change with the push of a button, the RKE
transmitter (Key Fob) may have a low or dead battery. In this situation a back up
method can be used to operate the ignition switch. Put the nose side (side opposite
of the emergency key) of the Key Fob against the ENGINE START/STOP button and
push to operate the ignition switch.
The Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) oper-
ates similar to an ignition switch. It has
four operating positions, three with de-
tents and one that is spring-loaded. The
detent positions are OFF, ACC, and ON/
RUN. The START position is a spring-
loaded momentary contact position.
When released from the START position,
the switch automatically returns to the
ON/RUN position.
Locking And Unlocking The

Doors
Key Fob
Push and release the UNLOCK button on 1 — Lock
the RKE transmitter once to unlock the 2 — Unlock
driver’s door. Push and release the UN- 3 — Remote Start
LOCK button twice within five seconds to 4 — Emergency Key Release
unlock all doors and the tailgate and the 5 — Emergency Key
RamBox (if equipped). The turn signal
lights will flash to acknowledge the un-
lock signal. The illuminated entry system will also turn on.
All doors can be programmed to unlock on the first push of the UNLOCK button.
Refer to “Uconnect Customer Programmable Features” in “Electronics” for further
information.
Panic Alarm
1. Push the PANIC button once to turn the Panic Alarm on.
2. Wait approximately three seconds and push the button a second time to turn the
Panic Alarm off.
11
GETTING STARTED
RKE Air Suspension (Remote Lowering Of Vehicle) — If

Equipped
x2
• This vehicle is equipped with a feature that can lower the vehicle to a height which
will improve ease of passenger entry/exit and cargo loading/unloading. The feature
is accessed by pushing the air suspension lowering button twice on the Key Fob.
• When remote Key Fob lowering is requested the vehicle will send a series of chirps
and flashes to alert the customer that the operation has begun and will continue
these alerts until it successfully lowers.
• If the feature is unable to lower the vehicle due to certain conditions not being
met, the horn will chirp twice and the vehicle will not lower.
Emergency Key
Should the battery in the vehicle or the Key Fob transmitter go dead, there is an
emergency key located in the Key Fob that can be used for locking and unlocking the
doors.
• To remove the emergency key, slide the button on the Key Fob with your thumb
and then pull the key out with your other hand.
WARNING!
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle.
Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be severely injured or killed. Children should
be warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal, or the transmission gear
selector. Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location
accessible to children, and do not leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with
Keyless Enter-N-Go in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could start the
vehicle, operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior
heat build-up may cause them to be severely injured or killed.
12
GETTING STARTED
KEYLESS ENTER-N-GO
The Keyless Enter-N-Go system is an enhancement to the vehicle's Key Fob. This feature
allows you to lock and unlock the vehicle's door(s) without having to push Key Fob lock or
unlock buttons, as well as starting and stopping the vehicle with the push of a button.
To Unlock From The Driver Or Passenger Side:

With a valid Keyless Enter-N-Go Key Fob
located outside the vehicle and within
5 ft (1.5m) of the driver or passenger side
door handle, grab either front door
handle to unlock the door automatically.
Grab The Door Handle To Unlock

To Lock The Vehicle’s Doors:
With a valid Keyless Enter-N-Go Key Fob transmitter within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the driver
or passenger front door handles, push door handle LOCK button to lock all doors.
Do NOT grab the door handle, when pushing the door handle lock button. This could
unlock the door(s).
Push The Button To Lock Do NOT Grab The Handle When Locking
NOTE:
• After pushing the door handle LOCK button, you must wait two seconds before you
can lock or unlock the doors, using either Passive Entry door handle. This is done
to allow you to check if the vehicle is locked by pulling the door handle without the
vehicle reacting and unlocking.
• The Passive Entry system will not operate if the RKE transmitter battery is dead.
The vehicle doors can also be locked by using the RKE transmitter lock button or the
lock button located on the vehicles interior door panel.
13
GETTING STARTED
Engine Starting/Stopping
Starting
With a valid Keyless Enter-N-Go Key Fob
inside the vehicle:
1. Shift the transmission into PARK.
2. While pushing the brake pedal, push
the ENGINE START/STOP button once.
If the engine fails to start, the starter
will disengage automatically after 10
seconds.
3. To stop the cranking of the engine Start/Stop Button
prior to the engine starting, push the
button again.
NOTE:
In case the ignition switch does not change with the push of a button, the RKE
transmitter (Key Fob) may have a low or dead battery. In this situation, a back up
method can be used to operate the ignition switch. Put the nose side of the Key Fob
(side opposite of the Emergency Key) against the ENGINE START/STOP button and
push to operate the ignition switch.
Stopping
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop.
2. Shift the transmission to PARK (P).
3. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button once. The ignition switch will return to the
OFF position.
NOTE:
If the transmission is not in PARK and the vehicle is in motion, the ENGINE
START/STOP button must be held for two seconds with the vehicle speed above 5
mph (8 km/h) before the engine will shut off.
14
GETTING STARTED
REMOTE START
• Push REMOTE START button on the Key Fob twice within five seconds.
Pushing the REMOTE START button a third time shuts the engine off.
• To drive the vehicle, push and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter
to unlock the doors and disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm System (if equipped).
Then cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
With Remote Start, the engine will only run for 15 minutes (timeout) unless the
ignition is cycled to the ON/RUN position.
The vehicle must be started with the Key Fob after two consecutive timeouts.
WARNING!
• Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage or confined area. Exhaust gas
contains Carbon Monoxide (CO) which is odorless and colorless. Carbon
Monoxide is poisonous and can cause you or others to be severely injured or
killed when inhaled.
• Keep Key Fob transmitters away from children. Operation of the Remote Start
System, windows, door locks or other controls could cause you and others to be
severely injured or killed.
VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM

The Vehicle Security Alarm monitors the vehicle doors for unauthorized entry and the
ignition for unauthorized operation. While the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed,
interior switches for door locks and decklid release are disabled. If something triggers
the alarm, the Vehicle Security Alarm will provide the following audible and visible
signals: the horn will pulse, the park lamps and/or turn signals will flash, and the
Vehicle Security Light in the instrument cluster will flash.
To Arm The System:

Lock the door using either the power door lock switch (one door must be open) or the
LOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter (doors can be open or
closed), and close all doors.
The Vehicle Security Light in the instrument cluster will flash for 16 seconds. This
shows that the Vehicle Security Alarm is arming. During this period, if a door is
opened, the ignition is cycled to ON/RUN, or the power door locks are unlocked in any
manner, the Vehicle Security Alarm will automatically disarm.
NOTE:
• The Vehicle Security Alarm will not arm if you lock the doors with the manual door
lock plungers.
• Once armed, the Vehicle Security Alarm disables the unlock switch on the driver
door trim panel and passenger door trim panel.
15
GETTING STARTED
To Disarm The System:

Push the Key Fob UNLOCK button or cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
The Vehicle Security Alarm is designed to protect your vehicle. However, you can
create conditions where the Vehicle Security Alarm will give you a false alarm. If one
of the previously described arming sequences has occurred, the Vehicle Security
Alarm will arm regardless of whether you are in the vehicle or not. If you remain in the
vehicle and open a door, the alarm will sound. If this occurs, disarm the Vehicle
Security Alarm.
If the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed and the battery becomes disconnected, the
Vehicle Security Alarm will remain armed when the battery is reconnected. The
exterior lights will flash, and the horn will sound. If this occurs, disarm the Vehicle
Security Alarm.
SEAT BELT SYSTEMS

Lap/Shoulder Belts
• All seating positions except the Quad Cab, Mega Cab and Crew Cab front center
seating position have combination lap/shoulder belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly.
• Position the lap belt so that it is snug and lies low across your hips, below your
abdomen. To remove slack in the lap belt portion, pull up on the shoulder belt. To
loosen the lap belt if it is too tight, tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap belt. A
snug seat belt reduces the risk of sliding under the seat belt in a collision.
• Position the shoulder belt across the shoulder and chest with minimal, if any slack
so that it is comfortable and not resting on your neck. The retractor will withdraw
any slack in the shoulder belt.
First Row Center Lap Belt Operating Instructions — If Equipped

The center seating position for the Quad Cab, Mega Cab and Crew Cab front seat has
a lap belt only. To buckle the lap belt, slide the latch plate into the buckle until you
hear a "click." To lengthen the lap belt, tilt the latch plate and pull. To remove slack,
pull the loose end of the webbing. Wear the lap belt snug against the hips. Sit back
and upright in the seat, then adjust the seat belt as tightly as is comfortable.
Seat Belt Pretensioner

• The front seat belt system is equipped with pretensioning devices that are
designed to remove slack from the seat belt in the event of a collision.
• A deployed pretensioner or a deployed air bag must be replaced immediately.
16
GETTING STARTED
WARNING!
• In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer much greater injuries if you
are not properly buckled up. You can strike the interior of your vehicle or other
passengers, or you can be thrown out of the vehicle. Always be sure you and
others in your vehicle are buckled up properly.
• A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect you from injury during a
collision. You are more likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not wear
your shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt are meant to be used together.
• A seat belt that is too loose will not protect you properly. In a sudden stop, you
could move too far forward, increasing the possibility of injury. Wear your seat
belt snugly.
• A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart in a collision and leave you with no
protection. Inspect the seat belt system periodically, checking for cuts, frays,
or loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do not disas-
semble or modify the system. Seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a
collision.
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) — AIR BAGS

Air Bag System Components
Your vehicle may be equipped with the following air bag system components:
• Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
• Air Bag Warning Light
• Steering Wheel and Column
• Instrument Panel
• Knee Impact Bolsters
• Advanced Front Air Bags
• Supplemental Side Air Bags
• Front and Side Impact Sensors (if equipped)
• Seat Belt Pretensioners
• Seat Belt Buckle Switch
17
GETTING STARTED
Advanced Front Air Bags

• This vehicle has Advanced Front Air Bags for both the driver and front passenger
as a supplement to the seat belt restraint systems. The Advanced Front Air Bags
will not deploy in every type of collision.
• Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to provide additional protection by
supplementing the seat belts. Advanced Front Air Bags are not expected to reduce
the risk of injury in rear, side, or rollover collisions.
• The Advanced Front Air Bags will not deploy in all frontal collisions, including
some that may produce substantial vehicle damage — for example, some pole
collisions, truck underrides, and angle offset collisions.
• On the other hand, depending on the type and location of impact, Advanced Front
Air Bags may deploy in crashes with little vehicle front-end damage but that
produce a severe initial deceleration.
• Because air bag sensors measure vehicle deceleration over time, vehicle speed
and damage by themselves are not good indicators of whether or not an air bag
should have deployed.
• Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all collisions, and also are needed
to help keep you in position, away from an inflating air bag.
• After any collision, the vehicle should be taken to an authorized dealer immedi-
ately.
• Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have deployed. If you are involved in
another collision, the air bags will not be in place to protect you.
• If it is necessary to modify the air bag system for persons with disabilities, contact
your authorized dealer.
• Refer to the Owner's Manual on the DVD for further details regarding the
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS).
WARNING!
• Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more severe injuries in a collision.
The air bags work with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In some
collisions, the air bags won't deploy at all. Always wear your seat belts even
though you have air bags.
• Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument panel during Advanced
Front Air Bag deployment could cause serious injury, including death. Air bags
need room to inflate. Sit back, comfortably extending your arms to reach the
steering wheel or instrument panel.
• No objects should be placed over or near the air bag on the instrument panel
or steering wheel because any such objects could cause harm if the vehicle is
in a collision severe enough to cause the air bag to inflate.
18
GETTING STARTED
Supplemental Side Air Bags

• This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs)
located in the outboard side of the front seats. The SABs are marked with a SRS
AIRBAG or AIRBAG label sewn into the outboard side of the seats.
• This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains
(SABICs) located above the side windows. The trim covering the SABICs is labeled
SRS AIRBAG or AIRBAG. The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial or
complete ejection of vehicle occupants through side windows in certain rollover or
side impact events.
• The SABICs and SABs (“Side Air Bags”) are designed to activate in certain side
impacts and certain rollover events. The Occupant Restraint Controller (“ORC”)
determines whether the deployment of the Side Air Bags in a particular side
impact or rollover event is appropriate, based on the severity and type of collision.
Vehicle damage by itself is not a good indicator of whether or not Side Air Bags
should have deployed.
WARNING!
• Side Air Bags need room to inflate. Do not lean against the door or window. Sit
upright in the center of the seat.
• Being too close to the Side Air Bags during deployment could cause you to be
severely injured or killed.
• Relying on the Side Air Bags alone could lead to more severe injuries in a
collision. The Side Air Bags work with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In
some collisions, Side Air Bags won’t deploy at all. Always wear your seat belt
even though you have Side Air Bags.
• This vehicle is equipped with left and right Supplemental Side Air Bag
Inflatable Curtains (SABICs). Do not stack luggage or other cargo up high
enough to block the deployment of the SABICs. The trim covering above the
side windows where the SABIC and its deployment path are located should
remain free from any obstructions.
• This vehicle is equipped with SABICs. In order for the SABICs to work as
intended, do not install any accessory items in your vehicle which could alter
the roof. Do not add an aftermarket sunroof to your vehicle. Do not add roof
racks that require permanent attachments (bolts or screws) for installation on
the vehicle roof. Do not drill into the roof of the vehicle for any reason.
• Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects between you and the Side Air
Bags; the performance could be adversely affected and/or objects could be
pushed into you, causing serious injury.
19
GETTING STARTED
Enhanced Accident Response System

In the event of an impact, if the communication network remains intact, and the
power remains intact, depending on the nature of the event, the ORC will determine
whether to have the Enhanced Accident Response System perform the following
functions:
• Cut off fuel to the engine.
• Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power or until the hazard light button
is pushed. The hazard lights can be deactivated by pushing the hazard light button.
• Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as long as the battery has power.
• Unlock the power door locks.
Enhanced Accident Response System Reset Procedure

In order to reset the Enhanced Accident Response System functions after an event,
the ignition switch must be changed from ignition START or ON/RUN to ignition OFF.
Carefully check the vehicle for fuel leaks in the engine compartment and on the
ground near the engine compartment and fuel tank before resetting the system and
starting the engine.
Air Bag Warning Light

• The air bags must be ready to inflate for your protection in a collision. The
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) monitors the internal circuits and intercon-
necting wiring associated with air bag system electrical components.
• The ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of the air bag system
whenever the ignition switch is in the START or ON/RUN position. If the ignition
switch is in the OFF position or in the ACC position, the air bag system is not on
and the air bags will not inflate.
• The ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning Light in the instrument panel for
approximately four to eight seconds for a self-check when the ignition switch is
first turned to the ON/RUN position. After the self-check, the Air Bag Warning
Light will turn off. If the ORC detects a malfunction in any part of the system, it
turns on the Air Bag Warning Light, either momentarily or continuously. A single
chime will sound to alert you if the light comes on again after initial startup.
• If the Air Bag Warning Light in the instrument panel is not on during the four to
eight seconds when the ignition switch is first turned to the ON/RUN position,
stays on, or turns on while driving, have the vehicle serviced by an authorized
service center immediately.
NOTE:
If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine related gauges are not working, the
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) may also be disabled. In this condition the air
bags may not be ready to inflate for your protection. Have an authorized dealer
service the air bag system immediately.
20
GETTING STARTED
Event Data Recorder (EDR)

This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an
EDR is to record, in certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air bag
deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in understanding how a
vehicle’s systems performed. The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle
dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds or less.
The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as:
• How various systems in your vehicle were operating;
• Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were buckled/fastened;
• How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the accelerator and/or brake pedal;
and,
• How fast the vehicle was traveling.
These data can help provide a better understanding of the circumstances in which
crashes and injuries occur.
NOTE:
EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a non-trivial crash situation occurs; no
data are recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no personal data
(e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location) are recorded. However, other parties,
such as law enforcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of personally
identifying data routinely acquired during a crash investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is required, and access to the
vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties,
such as law enforcement, that have the special equipment, can read the information
if they have access to the vehicle or the EDR.
CHILD RESTRAINTS
Children 12 years or younger should ride properly buckled up in a rear seat, if
available. According to crash statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in
the rear seats rather than in the front.
Every state in the United States and all Canadian provinces require that small
children ride in proper restraint systems. This is the law, and you can be prosecuted
for ignoring it.
NOTE:
• For additional information, refer to www.Seatcheck.org or call:
1-866-732-8243
• Canadian residents should refer to Transport Canada’s website for additional
information:
http://www.tc.gc.ca/eng/motorvehiclesafety/safedrivers-childsafety-index-53.htm
21
GETTING STARTED
LATCH — Lower Anchors And Tethers For CHildren

(Crew/Quad Cab Full Bench)
• Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint anchorage system called LATCH,
which stands for Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren.
• The rear outboard seating positions have lower anchors and top tether anchors.
The rear center seating position has a top tether anchor only.
LATCH – Lower Anchors And Tethers For CHildren

(Crew/Mega/Quad Cab Split Bench)
• Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint anchorage system called LATCH,
which stands for Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren.
• All rear seating positions have lower anchors and top tether anchors.
LATCH System Weight Limit

You may use the LATCH anchorage system until the combined weight of the child and
the child restraint is 65 lbs (29.5 kg). Use the seat belt and tether anchor instead of
the LATCH system once the combined weight is more than 65 lbs (29.5 kg).
Locating LATCH Anchorages

The lower anchorages are round bars that are found at the rear of the seat cushion
where it meets the seatback. They are just visible when you lean into the rear seat to
install the child restraint. You will easily feel them if you run your finger along the gap
between the seatback and seat cushion.
Lower Anchors
22
GETTING STARTED
Locating Tether Anchorages

In addition, Regular Cab models have tether strap anchorages behind the front
center and right seats. Quad Cab, Mega Cab and Crew Cab models have tether strap
anchorages located behind each of the rear seats.
Center Seat LATCH (Regular/Quad/Crew Cab Full And Standard

Bench)
Do not install a child restraint in the center position using the LATCH system. Use the
seat belt and tether anchor to install a child seat in the center seating position.
Center Seat LATCH (Mega/Quad/Crew Cab Split Bench)

If a child restraint installed in the center position blocks the seat belt webbing or
buckle for the outboard position, do not use that outboard position. If a child seat in
the center position blocks the outboard LATCH anchors or seat belt, do not install a
child seat in that outboard position.
Installing The Child Restraint Using The LATCH Lower Anchors

NOTE:
Never “share” a LATCH anchorage with two or more child restraints.
1. Loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and on the tether strap of the child seat
so that you can more easily attach the hooks or connectors to the vehicle
anchorages.
2. Attach the lower hooks or connectors of the child restraint to the lower anchorages
in the selected seating position.
3. If the child restraint has a tether strap, connect it to the top tether anchorage. See
below for directions to attach a tether anchor.
4. Tighten all of the straps as you push the child restraint rearward and downward
into the seat. Remove slack in the straps according to the child restraint
manufacturer’s instructions.
5. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by pulling back and forth on the
child seat at the belt path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) in any
direction.
Installing The Child Restraint Using The Vehicle Seat Belts

(Regular Cab)
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are equipped with a Switchable
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) that is designed to keep the lap portion of the
seat belt tight around the child restraint. Any seat belt system will loosen with time,
so check the belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary.
23
GETTING STARTED
Installing The Child Restraint Using The Vehicle Seat Belts

(Mega/Quad/Crew Cab Full And Split Bench)
The seat belts in the outboard passenger seating positions are equipped with a
Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR). The center seating positions are
equipped with a cinching latch plate. Both types of seat belts are designed to keep
the lap portion of the seat belt tight around the child restraint. Any seat belt system
will loosen with time, so check the belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary.
Tether Anchorage Weight Limit

Always use the tether anchor when using the seat belt to install a forward facing child
restraint, up to the recommended weight limit of the child restraint.
To Install A Child Seat Using An ALR:

1. Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the retractor to pass it through the belt
path of the child restraint. Do not twist the belt webbing in the belt path.
2. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”
3. Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion tight against the child seat.
4. To lock the seat belt, pull down on the shoulder part of the belt until you have
pulled all the seat belt webbing out of the retractor. Then, allow the webbing to
retract back into the retractor. As the webbing retracts, you will hear a clicking
sound. This means the seat belt is now in the Automatic Locking mode.
5. Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor. If it is locked, you should not be able
to pull out any webbing. If the retractor is not locked, repeat the last step.
6. Finally, pull up on any extra webbing to tighten the lap portion around the child
restraint while you push the child restraint rearward and downward into the
vehicle seat.
7. If the child restraint has a top tether strap and the seating position has a top tether
anchorage, connect the tether strap to the anchorage and tighten the tether strap.
See below for directions to attach a tether anchor.
8. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by pulling back and forth on the
child seat at the belt path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) in any
direction.
To Install A Child Seat Using A Cinching Latch Plate:

1. Place the child seat in the center of the seating position.
2. Next, pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the retractor to pass it through the
belt path of the child restraint. Do not twist the belt webbing in the belt path.
3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”
24
GETTING STARTED
4. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to tighten the lap portion around the child
restraint while you push the child restraint rearward and downward into the
vehicle seat.
5. If the child restraint has a top tether strap and the seating position has a top tether
anchorage, connect the tether strap to the anchorage and tighten the tether strap.
See below for directions to attach a tether anchor.
6. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by pulling back and forth on the child seat
at the belt path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) in any direction.
Installing The Top Tether Strap (With Either Lower Anchors Or

Vehicle Seat Belt):
When installing a forward-facing child restraint, always secure the top tether strap,
up to the tether anchor weight limit, whether the child restraint is installed with the
lower anchors or the vehicle seat belt.
Tether Strap Installation

Regular Cab Trucks:
In the regular cab truck, the top tether anchorages are located behind the center and
right passenger seats. There is a plastic cover over each anchorage. To attach the
tether strap of the child restraint:
Mega Cab Trucks:
In the regular cab truck, the top tether
anchorages are located behind the center
and right passenger seats. In the mega
cab truck, the top tether anchorages are
located behind each rear seating posi-
tion. There is a plastic cover over each
anchorage. To attach the tether strap of
the child restraint:
1. Place the child restraint on the seat
and adjust the tether strap so that it
will reach over the seat back, under
the head restraint and to the tether
anchor directly behind the seat. Regular Cab Tether Anchorages
2. Route the tether strap to provide the
most direct path between the anchorage and the child seat. The tether strap
should go between the head restraint posts underneath the head restraint. You
may need to adjust the head restraint to the upward position to pass the tether
strap underneath the head restraint and between its posts.
3. Lift the cover (if equipped) and attach the hook to the square opening in the sheet metal.
Tighten the tether strap according to the child seat manufacturer’s instructions.
25
GETTING STARTED
Quad/Crew Cab Trucks:
The top tether anchorages in this vehicle are tether strap loops located between the
rear glass and the back of the rear seat. There is a tether strap loop located behind
each seating position. Follow the steps below to attach the tether strap of the child
restraint.
Right or Left Outboard Seats:
1. Raise the head restraint and reach between the rear seat and rear glass to access
the tether strap loop.
Head Restraint In Raised Position Tether Strap Loop With Center Head
Restraint In Raised Position
2. Place a child restraint on the seat and adjust the tether strap so that it will reach
over the seat back, under the head restraint, through the tether strap loop behind
the seat and over to the tether strap loop behind the center seat.
3. Pass the tether strap hook under the head restraint behind the child seat, through
the tether strap loop behind the seat and over to the center tether strap loop.
Tether Strap Through Outboard Tether Strap

Loop
26
GETTING STARTED
4. Attach the hook to the center tether strap loop (see diagram). Tighten the tether
strap according to the child seat manufacturer’s instructions.
NOTE:
If there are child seats in both of the
outboard (left and right) seating posi-
tions, the tether strap hooks of both child
seats should be connected to the center
tether strap loop. This is the correct way
to tether two outboard child seats.
Tether Strap Through Outboard Tether Strap

Loop And Attached To Center Tether Strap
Loop
Center Seat:
1. Raise the head restraint and reach between the rear seat and rear glass to access
the tether strap loop.
2. Place a child restraint on the seat and
adjust the tether strap so that it will
reach over the seat back, under the
head restraint, through the tether
strap loop behind the seat and over to
the tether strap loop behind either the
right or left outboard seat.
Tether Strap Loop With Head Restraint In

Raised Position
27
GETTING STARTED
3. Pass the tether strap hook under the head restraint behind the child seat, through
the tether strap loop behind the seat and over to the right or left outboard tether
strap loop.
4. Attach the hook to the outboard tether
strap loop (see diagram). Tighten the
tether strap according to the child
seat manufacturer’s instructions.
Tether Strap Through Center Tether Strap

Loop
Tether Strap Through Center Tether Strap

Loop And Attached To Outboard Tether Strap
Loop
Installing Three Child Restraints:

1. Place a child restraint on each out-
board rear seat. Route the tether
straps following the directions for
right and left seating positions, above.
2. Attach both hooks to the center tether
strap loop, but do not tighten the
straps yet.
3. Place a child restraint on the center
rear seat. Route the tether strap fol-
lowing the directions for the center
seating position, above. Left Outboard And Center Seating Position
Shown
28
GETTING STARTED
4. Attach the hook to the outboard tether strap loop.
5. Tighten the tether straps according to the child seat manufacturer’s instructions,
tightening the right and left tether straps before the center tether strap.
WARNING!
• In a collision, an unrestrained child, even a tiny baby, can become a projectile
inside the vehicle. The force required to hold even an infant on your lap could
become so great that you could not hold the child, no matter how strong you
are. The child and others could be severely injured or killed. Any child riding in
your vehicle should be in a proper restraint for the child's size.
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an air bag. A deploying
Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child
12 years or younger, including a child in a rear-facing child restraint.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle with a rear seat.
• Improper installation of a child restraint to the LATCH anchorages can lead to
failure of an infant or child restraint. The child could be severely injured or
killed. Follow the manufacturer’s directions exactly when installing an infant or
child restraint.
• An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to increased head motion and
possible injury to the child. Use only the anchor positions directly behind the
child seat to secure a child restraint top tether strap.
• If your vehicle is equipped with a split rear seat, make sure the tether strap
does not slip into the opening between the seatbacks as you remove slack in
the strap.
HEAD RESTRAINTS
Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk of injury by restricting head
movement in the event of a rear impact. Head restraints should be adjusted so that
the top of the head restraint is located above the top of your ear.
WARNING!
The head restraints for all occupants must be properly installed and adjusted prior
to operating the vehicle or occupying a seat. Head restraints should never be
adjusted while the vehicle is in motion. Driving a vehicle with the head restraints
improperly adjusted or removed could cause serious injury or death in the event of
a collision.
29
GETTING STARTED
Front Head Restraints

To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head restraint. To lower the head
restraint, push the adjustment button located on the base of the head restraint and
push downward on the head restraint.
To remove the head restraint, raise it up as far as it can go then push the adjustment
button and the release button at the base of each post while pulling the head restraint
up. To reinstall the head restraint, put the head restraint posts into the holes then
adjust it to the appropriate height.
WARNING!
• A loose head restraint thrown forward in a collision or hard stop could cause
serious injury or death to occupants of the vehicle. Always securely stow
removed head restraints in a location outside the occupant compartment.
• ALL the head restraints MUST be reinstalled in the vehicle to properly protect
the occupants. Follow the re-installation instructions above prior to operating
the vehicle or occupying a seat.
NOTE:
Do not reposition the head restraint 180 degrees to the incorrect position in an
attempt to gain additional clearance to the back of the head.
Rear Head Restraints

The rear seats are equipped with adjustable and removable head restraints. To raise
the head restraint, pull upward on the head restraint. To lower the head restraint,
push the adjustment button located on the base of the head restraint and push
downward on the head restraint.
To remove the head restraint, push the adjustment button and the release button
while pulling upward on the whole assembly. To reinstall the head restraint, put the
head restraint posts into the holes and adjust it to the appropriate height.
NOTE:
To remove outboard restraints, the rear seat bottom must be folded up.
WARNING!
A loose head restraint thrown forward in a collision or hard stop could cause
serious injury or death to occupants of the vehicle. Always securely stow removed
head restraints in a location outside the occupant compartment.
30
GETTING STARTED
NOTE:
• The rear center head restraint (Crew Cab and Quad Cab) has only one adjustment
position that is used to aid in the routing of a tether. Refer to “Occupant
Restraints” in “Things to Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” in the Owner's
Manual on the DVD.
• Do not reposition the head restraint 180 degrees to the incorrect position in an
attempt to gain additional clearance to the back of the head.
WARNING!
ALL the head restraints MUST be reinstalled in the vehicle to properly protect the
occupants. Follow the re-installation instructions above prior to operating the
vehicle or occupying a seat.
FRONT SEATS
Driver's Power Seat — If Equipped
Some models may be equipped with an eight-way power driver's seat. The power seat
switches are located on the outboard side of the driver's seat cushion. There are two
power seat switches that are used to control the movement of the seat cushion and
the seatback.
Adjusting The Seat Forward Or Rearward

The seat can be adjusted both forward
and rearward. Push the seat switch for-
ward or rearward. The seat will move in
the direction of the switch. Release the
switch when the desired position has
been reached.
Adjusting The Seat Up Or Down
The height of the seats can be adjusted
up or down. Pull upward or push down-
ward on the seat switch. The seat will
move in the direction of the switch. Re-
lease the switch when the desired posi-
Power Seat Switches
tion is reached.
1 — Power Seat Switch
Tilting The Seat Up Or Down 2 — Recline Switch
The angle of the seat cushion can be 3 — Power Lumbar Switch
adjusted in four directions. Pull upward
or push downward on the front or rear of
the seat switch, the front or rear of the seat cushion will move in the direction of the
switch. Release the switch when the desired position is reached.
31
GETTING STARTED
Reclining The Seatback
The angle of the seatback can be adjusted forward or rearward. Push the seatback
switch forward or rearward, the seat will move in the direction of the switch. Release
the switch when the desired position is reached.
WARNING!
• Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous. Moving a seat while driving
could result in loss of control which could cause a collision and serious injury
or death.
• Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat belts and while the vehicle
is parked. Serious injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted seat belt.
• Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the shoulder belt is no longer
resting against your chest. In a collision you could slide under the seat belt,
which could result in serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
Do not place any article under a power seat or impede its ability to move as it may
cause damage to the seat controls. Seat travel may become limited if movement
is stopped by an obstruction in the seat’s path.
Passenger’s Power Seat — If Equipped

Some models are equipped with a six-way power passenger seat. The power seat
switch is located on the outboard side of the seat. The switch is used to control the
movement of the seat and seat cushion.
Power Lumbar — If Equipped

Vehicles equipped with power driver or passenger seats may be also be equipped with
power lumbar. The power lumbar switch is located on the outboard side of the power
seat. Push the switch forward to increase the lumbar support. Push the switch
rearward to decrease the lumbar support.
32
GETTING STARTED
Driver Memory Seat — If Equipped

This feature allows the driver to store up to two different memory profiles for easy
recall through a memory switch. Each memory profile contains desired position
settings for the driver seat, side mirrors, adjustable pedals (if equipped) and a set of
desired radio station presets. Your Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter can also
be programmed to recall the same positions when the UNLOCK button is pushed.
NOTE:
Your vehicle is equipped with two RKE transmitters, one RKE transmitter can be
linked to memory position 1 and the other transmitter can be linked to memory
position 2.
The memory seat buttons are located on the outboard side of the drivers seat cushion.
Programming The Memory Feature
To create a new memory profile, perform
the following:
1. Cycle the vehicles ignition to the ON/
RUN position (do not start the en-
gine).
2. Adjust all memory profile settings to
desired preferences (seat, side mir-
rors, adjustable pedals and radio sta-
tion presets).
3. Push and release the S (Set) button
on the memory switch.
4. Within five seconds, push and release Memory Seat Button Location
either of the memory buttons (1) or
(2). The Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) or Driver Information
Display (DID) will display which memory position has been set.
NOTE:
• Memory profiles can be set without the vehicle in PARK, but the vehicle must be
in PARK to recall a memory profile.
• To set a memory profile to your RKE transmitter, refer to “Linking And Unlinking
The Remote Keyless Entry Transmitter To Memory” in this section.
33
GETTING STARTED
Linking And Unlinking The Remote Keyless Entry Transmitter To Memory
Your RKE transmitters can be programmed to recall one of two pre-programmed
memory profiles by pushing the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter.
NOTE:
Before programming your RKE transmitters to memory the feature has to be selected.
• If your vehicle is equipped with a touchscreen, you must select the “Memory To
FOB” feature through the Uconnect system. Refer to “Uconnect Settings ” in
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” in the Owner’s Manual on the DVD for
further information.
• If your vehicle is not equipped with a touchscreen, you must select the “Key Fob
Linked To Memory” feature through the Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC) or Driver Information Display (DID). Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Informa-
tion Center (EVIC)” or “Driver Information Display (DID)” in “Understanding Your
Instrument Panel” in the Owner’s Manual on the DVD for further information.
To program your RKE transmitters, perform the following:
1. Cycle the vehicles ignition to the Off position.
2. Select desired memory profile (1) or (2).
NOTE:
If a memory profile has not already been set, refer to "Programming The Memory
Feature" for instructions on how to set a memory profile.
3. Once the profile has been recalled, push and release the SET (S) button on the
memory switch, then push and release button (1) or (2) accordingly. “Memory
Profile Set” (1 or 2) will display in the instrument cluster on vehicles equipped
with the EVIC/DID.
4. Push and release the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter within 10 seconds.
NOTE:
Your RKE transmitters can be unlinked to your memory settings by pushing the SET
(S) button, and within 10 seconds, followed by pushing the UNLOCK button on the
RKE transmitter.
Memory Position Recall
NOTE:
• For vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission, the vehicle must be in
PARK to recall memory positions. If a recall is attempted when the vehicle is not
in PARK, a message will be displayed in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC) or Driver Information Display (DID).
• For vehicles equipped with a manual transmission, the vehicle speed must be at
0 mph (0 km/h) to recall memory positions. If a recall is attempted with the vehicle
speed above 0 mph (0 km/h), a message will display in the EVIC/DID.
34
GETTING STARTED
Driver One Memory Position Recall
• To recall the memory settings for driver one using the memory switch, push
MEMORY button number 1 on the memory switch.
• To recall the memory settings for driver one using the RKE transmitter, push the
UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter linked to memory position 1.
Driver Two Memory Position Recall
• To recall the memory setting for driver two using the memory switch, push
MEMORY button number 2 on the memory switch.
• To recall the memory settings for driver two using the RKE transmitter, push the
UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter linked to memory position 2.
A recall can be cancelled by pushing any of the MEMORY buttons during a recall (S, 1, or
2). When a recall is cancelled, the driver's seat, and the power pedals (if equipped) stop
moving. A delay of one second will occur before another recall can be selected.
Easy Entry/Exit Seat
This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to enhance driver mobility
when entering and exiting the vehicle.
The distance the driver seat moves depends on where you have the driver seat
positioned when you remove the Key Fob from the ignition (or change the ignition to
OFF, for vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go).
• When you remove the Key Fob from the ignition (or change the ignition to OFF, for
vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go), the driver seat will move about
2.4 inches (60 mm) rearward if the driver seat position is greater than or equal to
2.7 inches (67.7 mm) forward of the rear stop. The seat will return to its previously
set position when you place the ignition into the ACC or RUN position.
• When you remove the Key Fob from the ignition (or change the ignition to OFF, for
vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go), the driver seat will move to a position 0.3
inches (7.7 mm) forward of the rear stop if the driver seat position is between 0.9 inches
and 2.7 inches (22.7 mm and 67.7 mm) forward of the rear stop. The seat will return
to its previously set position when you place the ignition to the ACC or RUN position.
• The Easy Entry/Easy Exit feature is disabled when the driver seat position is less
than 0.9 inches (22.7 mm) forward of the rear stop. At this position, there is no
benefit to the driver by moving the seat for Easy Exit or Easy Entry.
Each stored memory setting will have an associated Easy Entry and Easy Exit
position.
NOTE:
The Easy Entry/Exit feature is not enabled when the vehicle is delivered from the
factory. The Easy Entry/Exit feature is enabled (or later disabled) through the
programmable features in the Uconnect system. Refer to “Uconnect Settings/
Customer Programmable Features” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” in the
Owner’s Manual on the DVD for further information.
35
GETTING STARTED
Manual Seat Adjuster — If Equipped

Both front seats are adjustable forward or rearward. The manual seat adjustment
handle is located under the seat cushion at the front edge of each seat.
While sitting in the seat, pull up on the
handle and slide the seat forward or
backward. Release the bar once you have
reached the desired position. Then, using
body pressure, move forward and rear-
ward on the seat to be sure that the seat
adjusters have latched.
Manual Seat Adjusting Bar/Recline Lever

1 — Recline Lever
2 — Adjusting Bar
WARNING!
• Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous. Moving a seat while driving
could result in loss of control which could cause a collision and serious injury
or death.
• Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat belts and while the vehicle
is parked. Serious injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted seat belt.
Dump Feature (Manual Recline Seat Only) — Standard Cab

Actuating the recliner handle will allow the seatback to swing (dump) forward on
manual recliner seats. This “dump” feature allows access to the storage bin behind
the seat.
WARNING!
• Do not stand or lean in front of the seat while actuating the handle. The
seatback may swing forward and hit you causing injury.
• To avoid injury, place your hand on the seatback and actuate the handle, then
position the seatback in the desired position.
36
GETTING STARTED
HEATED/VENTILATED SEATS
Front Heated Seats
The front heated seats control buttons are located on the center instrument panel
below the climate controls.
If your vehicle is equipped with a touchscreen, the front heated seats control buttons
are also located within the climate or controls screen of the touchscreen.
• Press the heated seat button once to turn the HI setting On.
• Press the heated seat button a second time to turn the LO setting On.
• Press the heated seat button a third time to turn the heating elements OFF.
When the HI-level setting is selected, the heater will provide a boosted heat level
during the first four minutes of operation. Then, the heat output will drop to the
normal HI-level. If the HI-level setting is selected, the system will automatically
switch to LO-level after approximately 60 minutes of continuous operation. At that
time, the display will change from HI to LO, indicating the change. The LO-level
setting will turn OFF automatically after approximately 45 minutes.
NOTE:
The engine must be running for the heated seats to operate.
Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
On models that are equipped with Remote Start, the drivers seat can be programmed
to come on during a remote start.
If your vehicle is equipped with a touchscreen, this feature can be programmed
through the Uconnect system. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your
If your vehicle is not equipped with a touchscreen, this feature can be programmed
through the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) or Driver Information
Display (DID). Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” or “Driver
Information Display (DID)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” in the Owner’s
Manual on the DVD for further information.
37
GETTING STARTED
Rear Heated Seats

The rear heated seat switches are located on the rear of the center console.
• Push the heated seat button once to turn the HI setting On.
• Push the heated seat button a second time to turn the LO setting On.
• Push the heated seat button a third time to turn the heating elements OFF.
When the HI-level setting is selected, the heater will provide a boosted heat level during
the first four minutes of operation. Then, the heat output will drop to the normal
HI-level. If the HI-level setting is selected, the system will automatically switch to
LO-level after a maximum of 60 minutes of continuous operation. At that time, the
number of illuminated LEDs changes from two to one, indicating the change. The
LO-level setting will turn OFF automatically after a maximum of 45 minutes.
WARNING!
• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin because of advanced age,
chronic illness, diabetes, spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaus-
tion or other physical conditions must exercise care when using the seat heater.
It may cause burns even at low temperatures, especially if used for long periods
of time.
• Do not place anything on the seat that insulates against heat, such as a blanket
or cushion. This may cause the seat heater to overheat. Sitting in a seat that
has been overheated could cause serious burns due to the increased surface
temperature of the seat.
Ventilated Seats — If Equipped

Located in the seat cushion are small fans that draw the air from the passenger
compartment and move air through fine perforations in the seat cover to help keep
the driver and front passenger cooler in higher ambient temperatures. The fans
operate at two speeds, HI and LO.
The front ventilated seats control buttons are located on the center instrument panel
below the climate controls.
If your vehicle is equipped with a touchscreen, the front ventilated seats control
buttons are also located within the climate or controls screen of the touchscreen.
• Press the ventilated seat button once to choose HI.
• Press the ventilated seat button a second time to choose LO.
• Press the ventilated seat button a third time to turn the ventilated seat OFF.
NOTE:
The engine must be running for the ventilated seats to operate.
38
GETTING STARTED
On models that are equipped with remote start, the ventilated seats can be
programmed to come on during a remote start.
HEATED STEERING WHEEL

The steering wheel contains a heating element that helps warm your hands in cold
weather. The heated steering wheel has only one temperature setting. Once the
heated steering wheel has been turned on it will operate for approximately 30 to 80
minutes before automatically shutting off. The heated steering wheel can shut off
early or may not turn on when the steering wheel is already warm.
The heated steering wheel control button is located on the center of the instrument
panel below the climate controls.
If your vehicle is equipped with a touchscreen, the heated steering wheel control
button is located within the climate or controls screen of the touchscreen.
• Press the heated steering wheel button once to turn the heating element On.
• Press the heated steering wheel button a second time to turn the heating
element Off.
NOTE:
The engine must be running for the heated steering wheel to operate.
On models that are equipped with remote start, the heated steering wheel can be
programmed to come on during a remote start.
39
GETTING STARTED
WARNING!
• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin because of advanced age,
chronic illness, diabetes, spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaus-
tion, or other physical conditions must exercise care when using the steering
wheel heater. It may cause burns even at low temperatures, especially if used
for long periods.
• Do not place anything on the steering wheel that insulates against heat, such
as a blanket or steering wheel covers of any type and material. This may cause
the steering wheel heater to overheat.
TILT STEERING COLUMN

This feature allows you to tilt the steering column upward or downward. The tilt lever
is located on the steering column, below the multifunction lever.
Pull the lever toward the steering wheel to unlock the steering column. With one hand
firmly on the steering wheel, move the steering column up or down, as desired.
Release the lever to lock the steering column firmly in place.
Tilt Lever Location

1 — Adjustable Pedal Switch
2 — Tilt Lever
WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering column while driving. Adjusting the steering column
while driving or driving with the steering column unlocked, could cause the driver
to lose control of the vehicle. Failure to follow this warning may result in serious
injury or death.
40
GETTING STARTED
DRIVER ADJUSTABLE PEDALS — IF EQUIPPED

The adjustable pedals system is designed to allow a greater range of driver comfort
for steering wheel tilt and seat position. This feature allows the brake, accelerator,
and clutch pedals (if equipped) to move toward or away from the driver to provide
improved position with the steering wheel.
The adjustable pedal switch is located to the left side of the steering column.
• The pedals can be adjusted with the ignition OFF.
• The pedals cannot be adjusted when the vehicle is in REVERSE or when the
Electronic Speed Control System is on. The following messages will be displayed
on vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information System (EVIC) or
Driver Information Display (DID) if the pedals are attempted to be adjusted when
the system is locked out (“Adjustable Pedal Disabled — Cruise Control Engaged”
or “Adjustable Pedal Disabled — Vehicle In Reverse”).
NOTE:
• Always adjust the pedals to a position that allows full pedal travel.
• Further small adjustments may be necessary to find the best possible seat/pedal
position.
• For vehicles equipped with Driver Memory Seat, you can use your Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) transmitter or the memory switch on the driver’s door trim panel to
return the adjustable pedals to pre-programmed positions. Refer to “Front Seats”
in “Getting Started” for further information.
CAUTION!
Do not place any article under the adjustable pedals or impede its ability to move
as it may cause damage to the pedal controls. Pedal travel may become limited if
movement is stopped by an obstruction in the adjustable pedal's path.
WARNING!
Do not adjust the pedals while the vehicle is moving. You could lose control and
have an accident. Always adjust the pedals while the vehicle is parked.
41
GETTING STARTED
POWER FOLDING OUTSIDE MIRRORS FOR STANDARD AND TRAILER TOW

If equipped with power folding mirrors, they can be electrically folded rearward and
unfolded into the drive position.
The switch for the power folding mirrors is located between the power mirror switches
L (left) and R (right). Push the switch once and the mirrors will fold in, push the
switch a second time and the mirrors will return to the normal driving position.
If the mirror is manually folded after electrically cycled, a potential extra button push
is required to get the mirrors back to the home position. If the mirror does not
electrically fold check for ice or dirt build up at the pivot area which can cause
excessive drag.
Resetting the Power Folding Outside
Mirrors
You may need to reset the power folding
mirrors if the following occurs:
• The mirrors are accidentally blocked
while folding.
• The mirrors are accidentally manually
folded/unfolded.
• The mirrors come out of the unfolded
position.
• The mirrors shake and vibrate at nor-
mal driving speeds.
To reset the power folding mirrors: Fold Power Folding Mirror Switch
and unfold them by pushing the button
(this may require multiple button pushes). This resets them to their normal position.
NOTE:
• The power fold mirrors are designed to operate while the vehicle is stationary or
traveling at moderate speeds. If you attempt to power fold the mirrors at high
speeds they may not fully open or close. You should slow down to a moderate speed
and complete the operation.
• When pushing the power fold button 10 or more times in one minute the system
shuts down for one minute to protect the motors from over heating.
42
OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS

A long break-in period is not required for the engine and drivetrain (transmission and
axle) in your vehicle.
Drive moderately during the first 300 miles (500 km). After the initial 60 miles
(100 km), speeds up to 50 or 55 mph (80 or 90 km/h) are desirable.
While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration within the limits of local traffic laws
contributes to a good break-in. Wide-open throttle acceleration in low gear can be
detrimental and should be avoided.
The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a high-quality energy
conserving type lubricant. Oil changes should be consistent with anticipated climate
conditions under which vehicle operations will occur. Refer to “Maintaining Your
Vehicle,” for the recommended viscosity and quality grades.
NOTE:
A new engine may consume some oil during its first few thousand miles (kilometers)
of operation. This should be considered a normal part of the break-in and not
interpreted as an indication of an engine problem or malfunction.
CAUTION!
Never use Non-Detergent Oil or Straight Mineral Oil in the engine or damage may
result.
Diesel Engine Break-In Recommendations

• For 3.0L diesel engine break-in recommendations, refer to Diesel Engine Break-In
Recommendations on pg. 185
• For 6.7L Cummins diesel engine break-in recommendations, refer to Diesel
Engine Break-In Recommendations on pg. 195
43
TURN SIGNALS/WIPER/WASHER/HIGH BEAMS LEVER
Turn Signal/Wiper/Washer/High Beam Lever
Turn Signals/Lane Change Assist

Tap the lever up or down once and the turn signal (right or left) will flash three times
and automatically turn off.
Wipers
Intermittent, Low And High Operation
• Rotate the end of the lever to the first detent position for one of five intermittent
settings, the second detent for low wiper operation and the third detent for high
wiper operation.
Washer Operation
• Push the end of the lever inward to the second detent and hold for as long as spray
is desired.
Mist Feature
• When a single wipe to clear off road mist or spray from a passing vehicle is needed,
push the washer knob, located on the end of the multifunction lever, inward to the
first detent and release. The wipers will cycle one time and automatically shut off.
High Beams
• Push the lever away from you to activate the high beams.
A high beam symbol will illuminate in the cluster to indicate the high beams are on.
NOTE:
For safe driving, turn off the high beams when oncoming traffic is present to prevent
headlight glare and as a courtesy to other motorists.
44
HEADLIGHT SWITCH
NOTE:
If your vehicle is equipped with illumi-
nated approach lights under the outside
mirrors, they can be turned off through
the instrument cluster or the Uconnect
radio. For further information, refer to the
Owner’s Manual on the DVD.
Automatic Headlights/Parking
Lights/Headlights
• Rotate the headlight switch, located
on the instrument panel to the left of
the steering wheel, to the first detent
for parking lights and to the second
detent for headlights . Headlight Switch
• With the parking lights or low beam 1 — Auto
headlights on, push the headlight 2 — Rotate Headlight Switch
switch once for fog lights. 3 — Push Cargo Light
• Rotate the headlight switch to AUTO 4 — Rotate Dimmer
for Automatic headlights. 5 — Push Fog Light
• When set to AUTO, the system auto-
matically turns the headlights on or off
based on ambient light levels.
Automatic High Beams

The Automatic High Beams system provides increased forward lighting at night by
automating high beam control through the use of a digital camera mounted above the
inside rearview mirror. This camera detects vehicle specific light and automatically
switches from high beams to low beams until the approaching vehicle is out of view.
This feature is programmable through the Uconnect system. Refer to “Uconnect
Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” in the Owner's Manual on the
DVD for further details.
Instrument Panel Dimmer

• Rotate the dimmer control to the extreme left position to fully dim the instrument
panel lights and prevent the interior lights from illuminating when a door is
opened.
• Rotate the dimmer control right to increase the brightness of the instrument panel
when the parking lights or headlights are on.
• Rotate the dimmer control right to the next detent position to fully brighten the
odometer and radio when the parking lights or headlights are on.
45
• Rotate the dimmer control right to the last detent position to turn on the interior
lighting.
• If your vehicle is equipped with a touchscreen, the dimming is programmable
through the Uconnect system. Refer to “Uconnect Settings ” in “Understanding
Your Instrument Panel” in the Owner's Manual on the DVD for further details.
Cargo Light With Bed Lights — If Equipped

The cargo light and bed lights (if equipped) are turned on by pushing on the cargo
lights button.
The cargo light and bed lights (if equipped) will also turn on for approximately 60
seconds when a RKE transmitter UNLOCK button is pushed, as part of the
Illuminated Entry feature.
ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL

When engaged, the Electronic Speed Control takes over accelerator operations at
speeds greater than 25 mph (40 km/h).
The Electronic Speed Control buttons are located on the right side of the steering
wheel.
NOTE:
In order to ensure proper operation, the
Electronic Speed Control System has
been designed to shut down if multiple
Speed Control functions are operated at
the same time. If this occurs, the Elec-
tronic Speed Control System can be re-
activated by pushing the Electronic
Speed Control ON/OFF button and reset-
ting the desired vehicle set speed.
To Activate
Push the ON/OFF button. The Cruise In-
dicator Light in the instrument cluster
Electronic Speed Control Buttons
will illuminate. To turn the system off,
push the ON/OFF button a second time. 1 — Push Cancel
The Cruise Indicator Light will turn off. 2 — Push On/Off
The system should be turned off when 3 — Push Resume/Accel
not in use. 4 — Push Set/Decel
46
WARNING!
Leaving the Electronic Speed Control system on when not in use is dangerous. You
could accidentally set the system or cause it to go faster than you want. You could
lose control and have an accident. Always leave the system OFF when you are not
using it.
To Set A Desired Speed

Turn the Electronic Speed Control ON. When the vehicle has reached the desired
speed, push the SET (-) button and release. Release the accelerator and the vehicle
will operate at the selected speed.
NOTE:
The vehicle should be traveling at a steady speed and on level ground before pushing
the SET (-) button.
To Deactivate
A soft tap on the brake pedal, pushing the CANCEL button, or normal brake pressure
while slowing the vehicle will deactivate the Electronic Speed Control without erasing
the set speed from memory.
Pushing the ON/OFF button or turning the ignition switch OFF erases the set speed
from memory.
To Resume Speed
To resume a previously set speed, push the RES (+) button and release. Resume can
be used at any speed above 20 mph (32 km/h).
To Vary The Speed Setting

To Increase Speed
When the Electronic Speed Control is set, you can increase speed by pushing the
RES (+) button.
The drivers preferred units can be selected through the instrument panel settings if
equipped. Refer to “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” in the Owner’s Manual
on the DVD for more information. The speed increment shown is dependant on the
chosen speed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):
U.S. Speed (mph)
• Pushing the RES (+) button once will result in a 1 mph increase in set speed. Each
subsequent tap of the button results in an increase of 1 mph.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will continue to increase until
the button is released, then the new set speed will be established.
47
Metric Speed (km/h)
• Pushing the RES (+) button once will result in a 1 km/h increase in set speed.
Each subsequent tap of the button results in an increase of 1 km/h.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will continue to increase until
To Decrease Speed
When the Electronic Speed Control is set, you can decrease speed by pushing the
SET (-) button.
The drivers preferred units can be selected through the instrument panel settings if
equipped. Refer to “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” in the Owner’s Manual
on the DVD for more information. The speed increment shown is dependant on the
chosen speed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):
U.S. Speed (mph)
• Pushing the SET (-) button once will result in a 1 mph decrease in set speed. Each
subsequent tap of the button results in a decrease of 1 mph.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will continue to decrease until
Metric Speed (km/h)
• Pushing the SET (-) button once will result in a 1 km/h decrease in set speed. Each
subsequent tap of the button results in a decrease of 1 km/h.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will continue to decrease until
To Accelerate For Passing

Press the accelerator as you would normally. When the pedal is released, the vehicle
will return to the set speed.
Using Electronic Speed Control On Hills

The transmission may downshift on hills to maintain the vehicle set speed.
NOTE:
The Electronic Speed Control system maintains speed up and down hills. A slight
speed change on moderate hills is normal.
On steep hills, a greater speed loss or gain may occur so it may be preferable to drive
without Electronic Speed Control.
48
WARNING!
Electronic Speed Control can be dangerous where the system cannot maintain a
constant speed. Your vehicle could go too fast for the conditions, and you could
lose control and have an accident. Do not use Electronic Speed Control in heavy
traffic or on roads that are winding, icy, snow-covered or slippery.
EIGHT-SPEED AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION — IF EQUIPPED

Your vehicle may be equipped with a fuel efficient eight-speed transmission. The
electronic transmission gear selector is located on the instrument panel. The
transmission gear (PRND) is displayed both above the shifter control and in the
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Driver Information Display (DID).
• To select a gear range, simply rotate
the gear selector.
NOTE:
You must press the brake pedal to shift
the transmission out of PARK or from
NEUTRAL into DRIVE or REVERSE.
• To shift past multiple gear ranges at
once (such as PARK to DRIVE), simply
rotate the switch to the appropriate
detent.
• Select the DRIVE range for normal
driving.
Rotary Gear Selector
49
ELECTRONIC RANGE SELECT (ERS) OPERATION

Electronic Range Select (ERS) allows you to limit the highest available transmission
gear, and can be activated during any driving condition. When towing a trailer or
operating the vehicle in off-road conditions, using ERS shift control will help you
maximize both performance and engine braking.
• Toggle the switch on the column shift lever down (-) or up (+) to select the desired
top gear.
• For maximum deceleration (engine braking) toggle the switch on the column shift
lever down (-) and hold. Your vehicle will automatically select the lowest safe gear
for optimal engine braking.
• To disable ERS, push and hold the column shift lever switch up (+) until “D” is
displayed in the odometer.
ERS Control On The Shift Lever
Switching between ERS and DRIVE mode can be done at any vehicle speed.
Refer to your Owner's Manual on the DVD for further details.
50
Electronic Range Select (ERS) Operation — Eight-Speed

Transmission
The Electronic Range Select (ERS) shift control allows the driver to limit the highest
available gear when the transmission shifter switch is in the DRIVE position
You can switch between DRIVE and ERS mode at any vehicle speed.
• Tapping the ERS (-) switch (on the
steering wheel) will activate ERS mode.
• Once in ERS mode, tapping the ERS
(-) or (+) switch will change the top
available gear.
• To exit ERS mode, simply push and
hold the ERS (+) switch until “D” is
once again displayed in the transmis-
sion gear position indicator in the in-
strument cluster.
ERS Control
1500 AIR SUSPENSION SYSTEM

The air suspension system provides full time load leveling capability along with the
benefit of being able to adjust vehicle height by the push of a button.
Automatic height changes will occur
based on vehicle speed and the current
vehicle height. The indicator lamps and
EVIC/DID messages will operate the
same for automatic changes and user
requested changes.
Description
Normal Ride Height (NRH) - This is the
standard position of the suspension and 1500 Air Suspension Controls
is meant for normal driving.
1 — Off-Road 1 Indicator
Off-Road 1 (OR1) (Raises the vehicle ap- 2 — Off-Road 2 Indicator
proximately 1 in (26 mm) - This position 3 — Up Button
should be the primary position for all 4 — Down Button
off-road driving until Off Road 2 (OR2) is 5 — Entry/Exit Mode Indicator
needed. A smoother and more comfort- 6 — Normal Ride Height Indicator
able ride will result. To enter OR1, push
the “Up” button once from the NRH
51
position while the vehicle speed is below 35 mph (56 km/h). When in the OR1
position, if the vehicle speed remains between 40 mph (64 km/h) and 50 mph
(80 km/h) for greater than 20 seconds or if the vehicle speed exceeds 50 mph
(80 km/h), the vehicle will be automatically lowered to NRH. Off-Road 1 may not be
available due to vehicle payload, an EVIC/DID message will be displayed when this
occurs. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Driver Information
Display (DID)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” in the Owner’s Manual on
the DVD for further information.
Off-Road 2 (OR2) (Raises the vehicle approximately 2 in (51 mm) - This position is
intended for off-roading use only where maximum ground clearance is required. To
enter OR2, push the “Up” button twice from the NRH position or once from the OR1
position while vehicle speed is below 20 mph (32 km/h). While in OR2, if the vehicle
speed exceeds 25 mph (40 km/h) the vehicle height will be automatically lowered to
OR1. Off-Road 2 may not be available due to vehicle payload, an EVIC/DID message
will be displayed when this occurs. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC)/Driver Information Display (DID)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel”
in the Owner’s Manual on the DVD for further information.
Aero Mode (Lowers the vehicle approximately .6 in (15 mm) – 1500 Models Only - This
position provides improved aerodynamics by lowering the vehicle. The vehicle will
automatically enter Aero Mode when the vehicle speed remains between 62 mph
(100 km/h) and 66 mph (106 km/h) for greater than 20 seconds or if the vehicle
speed exceeds 66 mph (106 km/h). The vehicle will return to NRH from Aero Mode
if the vehicle speed remains between 30 mph (48 km/h) and 35 mph (56 km/h) for
greater than 20 seconds or if the vehicle speed falls below 30 mph (48 km/h).
NOTE:
Automatic Aero Mode may be disabled through vehicle settings in the Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Driver Information Display (DID) when equipped
with Uconnect 3.0, or your Uconnect Radio when equipped with UConnect 5.0,
8.4A, or 8.4AN.
Entry/Exit Mode (Lowers the vehicle approximately 2 in (51 mm) - This position lowers
the vehicle for easier passenger entry and exit as well as lowering the rear of the
vehicle for easier loading and unloading of cargo. To enter Entry/Exit Mode, push the
“Down” button once from the NHR while the vehicle speed is below 33 mph
(53 km/h). Once the vehicle speed goes below 15 mph (24 km/h) the vehicle height
will begin to lower. If the vehicle speed remains between 15 mph (24 km/h) and
25 mph (40 km/h) for greater than 60 seconds, or the vehicle speed exceeds 25 mph
(40 km/h) the Entry/Exit change will be cancelled. To return to Normal Height Mode,
push the “Up” button once while in Entry/Exit or drive the vehicle over 15 mph
(24 km/h). Entry/Exit mode may not be available due to vehicle payload, an EVIC/DID
message will be displayed when this occurs. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC)/Driver Information Display (DID)” in “Understanding Your Instrument
Panel” in the Owner’s Manual on the DVD for further information.
52
Air Suspension Modes

The Air Suspension system has multiple modes to protect the system in unique
situations:
Tire Jack Mode
To assist with changing a spare tire, the air suspension system has a feature which
allows the automatic leveling to be disabled. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information
NOTE:
This mode is intended to be enabled with engine running.
Transport Mode
To assist with flat bed towing, the air suspension system has a feature which will put
the vehicle into Entry/Exit height and disable the automatic load leveling system.
Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Driver Information Display
(DID)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” in the Owner’s Manual on the DVD
for further information.
NOTE:
Wheel Alignment Mode
Before performing a wheel alignment, this mode must be enabled. Refer to “Elec-
tronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Driver Information Display (DID)” in “Un-
derstanding Your Instrument Panel” in the Owner’s Manual on the DVD for further
information.
NOTE:
Protection Mode
In order to “protect” the air suspension system, the vehicle will enter Protection
Mode when the payload has been exceeded or load leveling cannot be achieved.
NOTE:
53
REBEL AIR SUSPENSION SYSTEM

The air suspension system provides full time load leveling capability along with the
benefit of being able to adjust vehicle height by the push of a button.
Automatic height changes will occur based on vehicle speed and the current vehicle
height. The indicator lamps and EVIC/DID messages will operate the same for
automatic changes and user requested changes.
Description
Normal Ride Height (NRH) – This is the
standard position of the suspension and
Off-Road (OR) (Raises the vehicle approxi-
mately 1 in [26 mm]) – This position is
intended for off-roading use only where
maximum ground clearance is required.
To enter OR, push the “Up” button once Rebel Air Suspension Controls
from the NRH position while vehicle
speed is below 20 mph (32 km/h). While 1 — Normal Ride Height Indicator
in OR, if the vehicle speed exceeds Lamp (Customer selectable)
25 mph (40 km/h) the vehicle height will 2 — Off-Road Indicator Lamp
(Customer selectable)
be automatically lowered to NRH. Off-
3 — Up Button
Road may not be available due to vehicle
4 — Down Button
payload, an EVIC/DID message will be
5 — Entry/Exit Mode Indicator Lamp
displayed when this occurs. Refer to (Customer selectable)
“Electronic Vehicle Information Center 6 — Aero Mode Indicator Lamp
(EVIC) or Driver Information Display (Customer selectable)
(DID)” in “Understanding Your Instru-
ment Panel” in your Owner’s Manual on
the DVD for further information.
Aero Mode (Lowers the vehicle approximately .6 in [15 mm]) – This position provides
improved aerodynamics by lowering the vehicle. The vehicle will automatically enter
Aero Mode when the vehicle speed remains between 62 mph (100 km/h) and
66 mph (106 km/h) for greater than 20 seconds or if the vehicle speed exceeds
66 mph (106 km/h). The vehicle will return to NRH from Aero Mode if the vehicle
speed remains between 30 mph (48 km/h) and 35 mph (56 km/h) for greater than
20 seconds or if the vehicle speed falls below 30 mph (48 km/h).
NOTE:
Automatic Aero Mode may be disabled through vehicle settings on your Uconnect
Radio when equipped with UConnect 5.0, 8.4A, or 8.4AN. Refer to “Uconnect
Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” in your Owner’s Manual on the
DVD for further information.
54
Entry/Exit Mode (Lowers the vehicle approximately 3 in [73 mm]) – This position lowers
the vehicle for easier passenger entry and exit as well as lowering the rear of the
vehicle for easier loading and unloading of cargo. To enter Entry/Exit Mode, push the
“Down” button twice from the NRH while the vehicle speed is below 33 mph
(53 km/h). Once the vehicle speed goes below 15 mph (24 km/h) the vehicle height
will begin to lower. If the vehicle speed remains between 15 mph (24 km/h) and
25 mph (40 km/h) for greater than 60 seconds, or the vehicle speed exceeds 25 mph
(40 km/h) the Entry/Exit change will be cancelled. To return to Normal Height Mode,
push the “Up” button twice while in Entry/Exit or drive the vehicle over 15 mph
(24 km/h). Entry/Exit mode may not be available due to vehicle payload, an EVIC/DID
message will be displayed when this occurs. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC) or Driver Information Display (DID)” in “Understanding Your Instru-
ment Panel” in your Owner’s Manual on the DVD for further information.

situations:
Tire/Jack Mode
Center (EVIC) or Driver Information Display (DID)” in “Understanding Your Instru-
ment Panel” in your Owner’s Manual on the DVD for further information.
NOTE:
Transport Mode
Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) or Driver Information Display
(DID)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” in your Owner’s Manual on the
NOTE:
This mode is intended to be enabled with engine running and all doors closed.
Before performing a wheel alignment this mode must be enabled. Refer to “Elec-
tronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) or Driver Information Display (DID)” in
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” in your Owner’s Manual on the DVD for
NOTE:
This mode is intended to be enabled with engine running and all doors closed.
55
Protection Mode
Mode when load leveling cannot be achieved. Some driving may be required to clear
the protection mode telltale in the EVIC/DID. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Informa-
tion Center (EVIC) or Driver Information Display (DID)” in “Understanding Your
Instrument Panel” in your Owner’s Manual on the DVD for further information.
NOTE:
If equipped with a touch screen radio all enabling/disabling of air suspension
features must be done through the radio. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Under-
standing Your Instrument Panel” in your Owner’s Manual on the DVD for further
information.
2500-3500 AIR SUSPENSION SYSTEM

The air suspension system provides full time rear load leveling capability for all
loading conditions including towing.
Description
Normal Ride Height (NRH) - This is the
standard position of the suspension and
Trailer Mode (Lowers the vehicle approxi-
mately 1 in (25 mm) - This position will
lower the rear suspension and provide
load leveling for all loading conditions
including towing a trailer. After the “ALT Alt Trailer Height Button
TRAILER HEIGHT” button has been
pushed, it will blink continuously until the trailer height has been achieved. The
system requires that the ignition be in the ON/RUN position or the engine running
with zero vehicle speed for all user requested changes. After the engine is turned off,
it may be noticed that the air suspension system operates briefly, this is normal. The
system is correcting the position of the vehicle to ensure a proper appearance.
Trailer Decoupling/Unloading - The air suspension system will load level (lower/
exhaust only) for up to 10 minutes after the vehicle is turned off. This allows for easy
removal of a trailer and/or load from the back of the truck by maintaining the ride
height. After 10 minutes you will need to turn the ignition to the run position for the
air suspension to maintain ride height. If the air suspension system is disabled using
the settings menu (Tire Jack Mode, Transport Mode or Alignment Mode) the system
will remain disabled when the vehicle is turned off. Reactivating the air suspension
can be accomplished via the settings menu or driving the vehicle above 5 mph
(8 km/h) for Tire Jack Mode or Alignment Mode and 16 mph (26 km/h) for Transport
Mode.
56
NOTE:
While loading, engine must be running for air suspension to maintain the ride height.
Refer to your Owner’s Manual on the DVD for further details.

situations:
Tire Jack Mode
NOTE:
Transport Mode
NOTE:
Before performing a wheel alignment, this mode must be enabled. Refer to “Elec-
tronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Driver Information Display (DID)” in “Un-
derstanding Your Instrument Panel” in the Owner’s Manual on the DVD for further
information.
NOTE:
Protection Mode
Mode when the payload has been exceeded or load leveling cannot be achieved.
NOTE:
57
STOP/START SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED

The Stop/Start function is developed to save fuel and reduce emissions. The system
will stop the engine automatically during a vehicle stop if the required conditions are
met. Releasing the brake pedal will automatically re-start the vehicle.
Automatic Mode
The Stop/Start feature is enabled after every normal customer engine start. It will
remain in STOP/START NOT READY until you drive forward with a vehicle speed
greater than 5 mph (8 km/h). At that time, the system will go into STOP/START
READY and if all other conditions are met, can go into an STOP/START AUTO STOP
ACTIVE “Autostop” mode.
To Activate The Autostop Mode, The Following Must Occur:
1. The system must be in STOP/START READY state. A STOP/START READY
message will be displayed in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/
Driver Information Display (DID) within the Stop/Start section. Refer to “Elec-
tronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) or Driver Information Display (DID)” in
“Electronics” for further information.
2. The vehicle must be completely stopped.
3. The transmission Gear Selector must be in DRIVE and the brake pedal depressed.
The engine will shut down, the tachometer will move to the zero position and the
stop/start telltale will illuminate indicating you are in an Autostop. While in an
Autostop, the Climate Controls system may automatically adjust airflow to maintain
cabin comfort. Customer settings will be maintained upon return to an engine
running condition.
Possible Reasons The Engine Does Not Autostop

Prior to engine shut down, the system will check many safety and comfort conditions
to see if they are fulfilled. In following situations, the engine will not stop:
• Driver’s seat belt is not buckled.
• Driver’s door is not closed.
• Outside temperature is less than 1°F (–17°C) or greater than 104°F (40°C).
• Battery temperature too warm or cold.
• The vehicle is on a steep grade.
• Cabin heating or cooling is in process and an acceptable cabin temperature has
not been achieved.
• HVAC is set to full defrost mode at a high blower speed.
• Engine has not reached normal operating temperature.
• Battery discharged.
• The transmission is not in DRIVE.
58
• Hood is open.
• Vehicle is in 4LO transfer case mode.
Other factors which can inhibit AutoStop include: fuel level, accelerator pedal input,
engine temp too high and steering angle.
It may be possible for the vehicle to be driven several times without the STOP/START
system going into a STOP/START READY state under more extreme conditions of the
items listed above.
To Start The Engine While In Autostop Mode

While in DRIVE, the engine will start when the brake pedal is released or the throttle
pedal is depressed. The transmission will automatically reengage upon engine
restart. During this transition, the brakes will hold the vehicle to avoid undesired
vehicle movement.
Conditions That Will Cause The Engine To Start Automatically While In Autostop Mode
The engine will start automatically when:
• The transmission selector is moved from DRIVE to REVERSE or NEUTRAL
• To maintain cabin temperature near the HVAC settings
• HVAC is set to full defrost mode
• Autostop time exceeds 5 minutes
• Battery voltage drops too low
• Low brake vacuum (e.g. after several brake pedal applications)
• STOP/START OFF switch is pushed
• 4WD system is put into 4LO mode
• The emissions system requires it
• A STOP/START system error occurs
Conditions That Force An Automatic Shift To Park While In Autostop Mode
The engine will not start automatically and the transmission will be placed in PARK if:
• The driver door is open and brake pedal released
• The driver door is open and the driver seat belt is unbuckled
• The engine hood has been opened
• A STOP/START system error occurs
The engine may then be restarted by moving the transmission shift selector out of
PARK (e.g. to DRIVE) or, in some cases, only by a KEY START. The Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC)/Driver Information Display (DID) will display a SHIFT OUT
OF PARK message, or a STOP/START KEY START REQUIRED message, to indicate
which action is required.
59
Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) or Driver Information Display
(DID)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” in your Owner’s Manual on the
To Manually Turn Off The Stop Start System

1. Push the STOP/START Off switch (located on the switch bank). The light on the
switch will illuminate.
2. The STOP/START OFF message will
appear in Electronic Vehicle Informa-
tion Center (EVIC)/Driver Information
Display (DID). Refer to “Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) or
Driver Information Display (DID)” in
“Electronics” for further information.
3. At the next vehicle stop (after turning
off the STOP/START system) the en-
gine will not be stopped. STOP/START OFF Switch
4. If the STOP/START system is manu-
ally turned off, the engine can only be started and stopped by cycling the ignition
switch.
5. The STOP/START system will reset itself back to an ON condition every time the
key is turned off and back on.
To Manually Turn On The Stop Start System

1. Push the STOP/START Off switch (located on the switch bank).
2. The light on the switch will turn off.
System Malfunction
If there is a malfunction in the STOP/START system, the system will not shut down
the engine. A “SERVICE STOP/START SYSTEM” message will appear in the Elec-
tronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Driver Information Display (DID). Refer to
“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” or “Driver Information Display (DID)”
in “Electronics” for further information.
The system will need to be checked by your authorized dealer.
60
MANUAL CLIMATE CONTROLS WITHOUT TOUCHSCREEN
Manual Climate Controls

1 — Rotate Blower Control 4 — Push A/C Button
2 — Push Air Recirculation Button 5 — Rotate Mode Control
3 — Rotate Temperature Control 6 — Push Defroster Button
Air Recirculation /Max A/C

• Use Recirculation for maximum A/C operation.
• For window defogging, turn the Recirculation button off.
• Recirculation is not allowed in defrost.
• Recirculation is allowed in floor mode and defrost/floor (mix modes) for approxi-
mately five minutes.
Heated Mirrors
The mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice. This feature is activated whenever you turn
on the defroster.
61
MANUAL CLIMATE CONTROLS WITH TOUCHSCREEN
Uconnect 8.4 Manual Climate Controls

1 — Max A/C Button 6 — Blower Speed Up Button
2 — A/C Button 7 — Mode Control Buttons
3 — Air Recirculation Button 8 — Blower Speed Down Button
4 — Front Defroster Button 9 — OFF Button
5 — Defroster Button 10 — Temperature Control Buttons
62
Climate Control Knobs

1 — A/C Button 5 — Rotate Blower Control
2 — Temperature Control Buttons 6 — OFF Button
3 — Front Defroster Button 7 — Air Recirculation Button
4 — Defroster Button
Air Recirculation
Heated Mirrors
on the defroster.
63
AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROLS WITH TOUCHSCREEN
Uconnect 8.4 Automatic Climate Controls

1 — MAX A/C Button 8 — Passenger Temperature Down
2 — A/C Button 9 — SYNC Button
3 — Air Recirculation Button 10 — Blower Control Buttons
4 — AUTO Button 11 — Mode Control Buttons
5 — Front Defroster Button 12 — OFF Button
6 — Defroster Button 13 — Driver Temperature Down
7 — Passenger Temperature Up 14 — Driver Temperature Up
64
Climate Control Knobs

1 — A/C Button 7 — Defroster Button
2 — Driver Temperature Up 8 — Passenger Temperature Down
3 — OFF Button 9 — AUTO Button
4 — Blower Control Knob 10 — Driver Temperature Down
5 — Passenger Temperature Up 11 — Recirculation Button
6 — Front Defroster Button
Air Conditioning (A/C)

• If the air conditioning button is pressed while in AUTO mode, the system will exit
AUTO mode and stay in A/C. The mode and blower will be set at the closest mode
and blower position that the system was operating in AUTO.
SYNC Temperature Button
• Press the “SYNC” button on the touchscreen to control the driver and passenger
temperatures simultaneously. Press the “SYNC” button on the touchscreen a
second time to control the temperatures individually.
65
Air Recirculation
• If the Recirculation button is pushed while in the AUTO mode, the indicator light
may flash three times to indicate the cabin air is being controlled automatically.
Heated Mirrors
on the defroster.
PARKSENSE FRONT AND REAR PARK ASSIST — IF EQUIPPED

The ParkSense Park Assist system provides visual and audible indications of the
distance between the rear and/or front fascia and a detected obstacle when backing
up or moving forward, e.g. during a parking maneuver. Refer to ParkSense System
Usage Precautions for limitations of this system and recommendations.
ParkSense will retain the last system state (enabled or disabled) from the last ignition
cycle when the ignition is changed to the ON/RUN position.
ParkSense can be active only when the shift lever is in REVERSE or DRIVE. If
ParkSense is enabled at one of these shift lever positions, the system will remain
active until the vehicle speed is increased to approximately 7 mph (11 km/h) or
above. A display warning will appear in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC) or Driver Information Display (DID) indicating the vehicle is above ParkSense
operating speed. The system will become active again if the vehicle speed is
decreased to speeds less than approximately 6 mph (9 km/h).
Cleaning The ParkSense Sensors

If “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS" or "PARKSENSE UNAVAIL-
ABLE WIPE FRONT SENSORS” appears in the “Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC) or Driver Information Display (DID),” clean the ParkSense sensors with
water, car wash soap and a soft cloth. Do not use rough or hard cloths. Do not scratch
or poke the sensors. Otherwise, you could damage the sensors.
66
PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA — IF EQUIPPED

Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView Rear Back Up Camera that allows
you to see a image of the rear surroundings of your vehicle whenever the shift lever
is put into REVERSE or whenever it is initiated through "Backup Camera" button in
the "Controls" menu. Whenever the shift lever is put into REVERSE, the image will be
displayed in the rearview mirror display (if equipped) or Uconnect screen (if
equipped) along with a caution note to “check entire surroundings” across the top of
the screen. After five seconds this note will disappear.
The ParkView camera is located to the left of the tailgate handle.
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with camera delay turned OFF), the rear
camera mode is exited and the navigation or audio screen appears again.
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with camera delay turned ON), The rear
camera image will be displayed for up to 10 seconds after shifting out of "REVERSE"
unless the forward vehicle speed exceeds 8 mph (13 km/h), the transmission is
shifted into "PARK" or the ignition is switched to the OFF position.
Whenever the Rear View Camera image is activated through "Backup Camera" button
in the "Controls" menu, a display timer for the image is initiated. The image will
continue to be displayed until the display timer exceeds 10 seconds and the vehicle
speed is above 8 mph (13 km/h) or the touchscreen button "X" to disable display of
the Rear View camera image is pressed.
NOTE:
If the vehicle speed remains below 8 mph (13 km/h), the Rear View camera image
will be displayed continuously until deactivated via. the touchscreen button "X".
If equipped with a Cargo Camera, a touchscreen button to indicate the current
active Camera image being displayed is made available whenever the Rear View
camera image is displayed.
If equipped with a Cargo Camera, a touchscreen button to switch the display
to Cargo camera image is made available whenever the Rear View Camera image is
displayed.
A touchscreen button "X" to disable display of the camera image is made available
when the vehicle is not in REVERSE gear.
67
When enabled, active guide lines are overlaid on the image to illustrate the width of
the vehicle and its projected backup path based on the steering wheel position. The
active guide lines will show separate zones that will help indicate the distance to the
rear of the vehicle.
NOTE:
For further information about how to access and change the programmable features
of the ParkView Rear Backup Camera, refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Understand-
ing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
CAUTION!
• To avoid vehicle damage, ParkView should only be used as a parking aid. The
ParkView camera is unable to view every obstacle or object in your drive path.
• To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must be driven slowly when using ParkView
to be able to stop in time when an obstacle is seen. It is recommended that the
driver look frequently over his/her shoulder when using ParkView.
WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when backing up even when using the ParkView Rear Back Up
Camera. Always check carefully behind your vehicle, and be sure to check for
pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions, or blind spots before backing up.
You are responsible for the safety of your surroundings and must continue to pay
attention while backing up. Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death.
NOTE:
If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance builds up on the camera lens, clean the
lens, rinse with water, and dry with a soft cloth. Do not cover the lens.
Turning Rear View Camera image On:
1. Press the "Controls" button located on the bottom of the Uconnect display.
2. Press the "Backup Camera" button to turn the Rear View Camera system
ON.
NOTE:
Once initiated by the "Backup Camera" button, the Rear View Camera image may be
deactivated by pressing the "X" soft button. On deactivation, the previous selected
screen will appear.
68
POWER SLIDING REAR WINDOW

The switch for the power sliding rear window is located on the overhead console.
• Push the switch right to open the glass
and pull the switch left to close the
glass.
Power Sliding Rear Window Switch
POWER SUNROOF
• The power sunroof switch is located on
the overhead console.
Opening Sunroof
Express Open
Push the switch rearward and release it
within one-half second. The sunroof will
fully open and stop automatically.
Manual Open
Push and hold the switch rearward to
open the sunroof. Any release of the
switch will stop the movement, and the
sunroof will remain in a partially open
position until the switch is pushed again. Power Sunroof Switch
1 — Opening Sunroof
2 — Venting Sunroof
3 — Closing Sunroof
69
Venting Sunroof
Push and release the button and the sunroof will open to the vent position.
This is called “Express Vent” and will occur regardless of sunroof position. During
Express Vent operation, any movement of the switch will stop the sunroof.
Closing Sunroof
Express Closing
Push the switch forward and release it within one-half second. The sunroof will fully
close automatically from any position.
Manual Closing
Push and hold the switch forward to close the sunroof. Any release of the switch will
stop the movement, and the sunroof will remain in a partially closed position until the
switch is pushed again.
Pinch Protection Feature

This feature will detect an obstruction in the opening of the sunroof during Express
Close operation. If an obstruction in the path of the sunroof is detected, the sunroof
will automatically retract. Remove the obstruction if this occurs. Next, push the
switch forward and release to Express Close.
NOTE:
If three consecutive sunroof close attempts result in Pinch Protect reversals, the
fourth close attempt will be a Manual Close movement with Pinch Protect disabled.
70
WARNING!
• Do not let children play with the sunroof. Never leave children unattended in a
vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Do not leave the Key Fob in or
near the vehicle, and do not leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with
Keyless Enter-N-Go in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. Occupants, particularly
unattended children, can become entrapped by the power sunroof while
operating the power sunroof switch. Such entrapment may result in serious
injury or death.
• In a collision, there is a greater risk of being thrown from a vehicle with an open
sunroof. You could also be severely injured or killed. Always fasten your seat
belt properly and make sure all passengers are properly secured.
• Do not allow small children to operate the sunroof. Never allow your fingers,
other body parts, or any object to project through the sunroof opening. Injury
may result.
WIND BUFFETING
Wind buffeting can be described as a helicopter-type percussion sound. If buffeting
occurs with the rear windows open, adjust the front and rear windows together.
If buffeting occurs with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening, or adjust any
window. This will minimize buffeting.
71
ELECTRONICS
YOUR VEHICLE'S SOUND SYSTEM
1. Uconnect Voice Command Button pg. 126

2. Uconnect Phone Button pg. 126
3. Steering Wheel Audio Controls (Left — Behind Steering Wheel) pg. 155
4. Steering Wheel Audio Controls (Right — Behind Steering Wheel) pg. 155
5. Volume Knob/Audio Mute Button
6. Screen Off Button
72
ELECTRONICS
7. Back Button
8. Tune/Scroll Knob — Browse/Enter Button
9. Uconnect 8.4 Radio pg. 114
10. Power Inverter (If Equipped) pg. 162
11. USB Port pg. 103
12. SD Card pg. 103
13. Aux Jack pg. 103
14. USB Charge Only Port pg. 163
73
ELECTRONICS
CYBERSECURITY
Your vehicle may be a connected vehicle and may be equipped with both wired and
wireless networks. These networks allow your vehicle to send and receive informa-
tion. This information allows systems and features in your vehicle to function
properly.
Your vehicle may be equipped with certain security features to reduce the risk of
unauthorized and unlawful access to vehicle systems and wireless communications.
Vehicle software technology continues to evolve over time and FCA US LLC, working
with its suppliers, evaluates and takes appropriate steps as needed. Similar to a
computer or other devices, your vehicle may require software updates to improve the
usability and performance of your systems or to reduce the potential risk of
unauthorized and unlawful access to your vehicle systems.
The risk of unauthorized and unlawful access to your vehicle systems may still exist,
even if the most recent version of vehicle software (such as Uconnect software) is
installed.
WARNING!
• It is not possible to know or to predict all of the possible outcomes if your
vehicle’s systems are breached. It may be possible that vehicle systems,
including safety related systems, could be impaired or a loss of vehicle control
could occur that may result in an accident involving serious injury or death.
• ONLY insert media (e.g., USB, SD card, or CD) into your vehicle if it came from
a trusted source. Media of unknown origin could possibly contain malicious
software, and if installed in your vehicle, it may increase the possibility for
vehicle systems to be breached.
• As always, if you experience unusual vehicle behavior, take your vehicle to your
nearest authorized dealer immediately.
NOTE:
• FCA or your dealer may contact you directly regarding software updates.
• To help further improve vehicle security and minimize the potential risk of a
security breach, vehicle owners should:
• Routinely check www.driveuconnect.com/software-update to learn about avail-
able Uconnect software updates.
• Only connect and use trusted media devices (e.g. personal mobile phones,
USBs, CDs).
Privacy of any wireless and wired communications cannot be assured. Third parties
may unlawfully intercept information and private communications without your
consent. For further information, refer to “Privacy Practices – If Equipped with
Uconnect 8.4 radio” in “All About Uconnect Access” in your Owner’s Manual Radio
Supplement and “Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II) Cybersecurity” in “Maintain-
ing Your Vehicle” in your Owner’s Manual on the DVD.
74
ELECTRONICS
IDENTIFYING YOUR RADIO

Radio 3.0
• Two buttons on the faceplate on either
side of the display
Radio 3.0
Uconnect 3.0
• Two buttons on the faceplate on either
side of the display
• Phone pick up button on the faceplate
Uconnect 3.0
Uconnect 5.0
• 5” Touchscreen
• Three buttons on the faceplate on ei-
ther side of the display
Uconnect 5.0
75
ELECTRONICS
Uconnect 8.4A
• 8.4” Touchscreen
• HD Button will NOT be visible on right
side of screen when viewing AM or FM
• SiriusXM Travel Link feature NOT
listed within Apps
Uconnect 8.4A
Uconnect 8.4AN
• 8.4” Touchscreen
• HD Button will be visible on right side
of screen when viewing AM or FM
• SiriusXM Travel Link feature listed
within Apps
Uconnect 8.4AN
76
ELECTRONICS
UCONNECT ACCESS
Uconnect Access — If Equipped (Available On
Uconnect 8.4A/8.4AN — U.S. Residents Only)
WARNING!
• ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the road. Some Uconnect
Access services, including 9-1-1 and Assist, will NOT work without an operable
1X (voice/data) or 3G (data) network connection.
• ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the steering wheel. You have full
responsibility and assume all risks related to the use of the Uconnect features
and applications in this vehicle. Only use Uconnect when it is safe to do so.
Failure to do so may result in an accident involving serious injury or death.
NOTE:
Your vehicle may be transmitting data as authorized by the subscriber.
Uconnect Access enhances your ownership and driving experience by connecting
your vehicle to an operable 1X (voice/data) or 3G (data) network. When connected to
an operable 1X (voice/data) or 3G (data) network, you can:
• Place a call to a local 9-1-1 Operator for emergency assistance.
• Remotely lock/unlock your doors and start your vehicle from virtually anywhere,
using the Uconnect Access App from your device. You can also do so by logging
into Mopar Owner Connect, or by calling Uconnect Care when your vehicle has an
operable 1X (voice/data) or 3G (data) network connection. Services can only be
used where coverage is available; see coverage map for details.
• Turn your vehicle into a WiFi Hotspot and connect your devices to the internet.
• Receive text or email notifications if your vehicle's theft alarm goes off.
• Receive stolen vehicle assistance, using GPS technology to help authorities locate
your vehicle if it is stolen.
• Listen to your text messages or send free-form text messages with your voice while
keeping your hands on the wheel, using the Voice Texting feature. Requires a
device that supports Bluetooth Message Access Profile (MAP).
• Search for places to eat, shop, relax and play with Yelp, using your voice or
on-screen menu. Then navigate to them (navigation standard on Uconnect 8.4AN,
optional on Uconnect 8.4A).
• Get operator assistance using the ASSIST button on your interior rearview mirror.
77
ELECTRONICS
Before you drive, familiarize yourself with the easy-to-use Uconnect Access.
1. The ASSIST and 9-1-1 buttons are located on your rearview mirror. The ASSIST
button is used for contacting Roadside Assistance, Vehicle Care and Uconnect
Care. The 9-1-1 button connects you to emergency services.
NOTE:
Vehicles sold in Canada and Mexico DO NOT have 9-1-1 call system capabilities.
9-1-1 or other emergency line operators in Canada and Mexico may not answer or
respond to 9-1-1 system calls.
2. The Uconnect “Apps ” button in the center of the menu bar of the radio
touchscreen. This is where you can begin your registration process, manage your
Apps and purchase WiFi on demand.
3. The Uconnect Voice Command and Uconnect Phone buttons are located on the
left side of your steering wheel. These buttons let you use your voice to give
commands, make phone calls, send and receive text messages hands-free, enter
navigation destinations, and control your radio and media devices.
Included Trial Period For New Vehicles
Your new vehicle may come with an included trial period for use of the Uconnect
Access Services starting at the date of vehicle purchase (date based on vehicle sales
notification from your dealer). To activate the trial, you must first register with Uconnect
Access. After the trial period, if you wish to continue your Uconnect Access Services
you can choose to purchase a subscription.
Features And Packages
• After the trial period, you can subscribe to continue your service by visiting
the Uconnect Store located within the Mopar Owner Connect website
moparownerconnect.com. If you need assistance, U.S. residents can call
Uconnect Care at 1-855-792-4241 .
• For the latest information on packages and pricing information: U.S. residents
visit DriveUconnect.com.
78
ELECTRONICS
Uconnect Access Registration (Uconnect 8.4A/8.4AN,

U.S. 48 Contiguous States, Alaska And Hawaii)
To unlock the full potential of Uconnect Access in your vehicle, you first need to
register with Uconnect Access.
1. Push the ASSIST button on your rearview mirror.
2. Press the “Uconnect Care” button on
the touchscreen.
3. A helpful Uconnect Care Agent will
register your vehicle and handle all of
the details.
Signing up is easy! Simply follow the steps
above. Or, press the “Apps ” button
on the touchscreen, then select the
Uconnect registration app to “Register
By Web” and complete the process using
ASSIST Button
your device or computer.
Why sign up for Uconnect Access? Here are just a few examples of things you’ll be able
to do:
• Know that help, if you need it, is only a button press away.
• Lock and unlock your vehicle doors from hundreds of miles away.
• Discover great, new places around you using Yelp.
• Dictate and send text messages by speaking out loud (all while keeping both
hands on the wheel!)
• Enjoy the best in music and entertainment from around the world with apps like
Pandora.
For further information please visit DriveUconnect.com.
79
ELECTRONICS
Download The Uconnect Access App

You’re only a few steps away from using remote commands and playing your favorite
music in your vehicle.
To link your internet radio accounts:
Mobile App
1. Download the Uconnect Access App on
your device.
2. Press the Via Mobile icon on the navi-
gation bar at the bottom of the app.
3. Press the app you’d like to connect to
your vehicle.
4. Enter your login information for the
selected app and press Link.
5. Next time you’re in your vehicle, en-
able Bluetooth, pair your device and
select the Via Mobile app you want to
play from the Uconnect touchscreen
to stream your personalized music.
NOTE:
• You can also complete this process on the web. Simply visit moparownerconnect.com
log in and click Set Up Via Mobile Profile (under Quick Links).
• Once you download the app to your compatible device, you will also be able to start
your vehicle and lock/unlock its doors from virtually anywhere.
80
ELECTRONICS
Via Mobile Apps — If Equipped

• Aha by HARMAN — Aha by HARMAN makes it easy to instantly access your favorite
Web content on the go. Choose from over 40,000+ stations spanning internet
radio, personalized music, news, entertainment, hotels, weather, audiobooks,
Facebook, Twitter, and more.
• iHeartRadio — iHeartRadio provides instant access to more than 1,500 live radio
stations from across the country and allows listeners to create custom music
stations inspired by their favorite artists or songs.
• Pandora — Pandora gives people the music and comedy they love anytime,
anywhere. Personalized stations launch instantly, with the input of a favorite artist,
track, comedian, or genre.
• Slacker Radio — Enjoy millions of songs and hundreds of handcrafted stations.
NOTE:
For detailed information on how to use Via Via Mobile
Mobile apps visit the Mopar Owner Connect
website moparownerconnect.com and log
in using the username and password you
set up when registering for Uconnect
Access.
Renewing Subscriptions And Purchasing WiFi Hotspot

(Uconnect 8.4A/8.4AN, U.S. 48 Contiguous States, Alaska And
Hawaii)
Subscriptions, and WiFi Hotspot, can be purchased from the Uconnect Store within your
vehicle, and online at Mopar Owner Connect. If you need help push the ASSIST button
on the rearview mirror, then select Uconnect Care (or dial 1-855-792-4241 ).
NOTE:
You must set up a Uconnect Access Payment Account online (log in to
moparownerconnect.com, go to Edit Profile, then Uconnect Payment Account, to set
up and manage your Payment Account).
81
ELECTRONICS
Getting Started With Apps

Applications (Apps for short) in your Uconnect Access system are designed to deliver
the features and services that you want. There are two basic categories:
1. Built-In Features — use the 1X (voice/data) or 3G (data) network on your Uconnect
8.4A or 8.4AN radio.
2. Uconnect Access Via Mobile — use the Uconnect Access App and your device's
data plan to access your personal Pandora, iHeartRadio, Aha and Slacker
accounts from the vehicle and control them using the touchscreen. Customer's
data plan charges will apply. Available on Uconnect 8.4A and 8.4AN Radios
(if equipped).
Apps Main Menu
Press the “Apps ” button on the touchscreen to open the Apps main menu, in this
screen you will be able to access all of your available Apps. To access an App directly,
press the corresponding button on the touchscreen and you will be directed to that
App. To view the rest our your Apps, press the page forward or page back button.
Uconnect Apps
1 — Apps Button 2 — Page Forward Button
82
ELECTRONICS
App Manager
Press the “App Manager” button to access the following categories:
Favorite Apps — This is the default screen when you first press the “App Manager”
button on the touchscreen, and is a good place to put the apps you use most
frequently. To make an App a “favorite”, press the “Settings” button on the
touchscreen to the right of the App.
All Apps — All of your available Apps will reside in the “All Apps” folder.
Running Apps — Press this tab to see which apps are currently running.
Maintaining Your Uconnect Access Account

Selling Your Vehicle
When you sell your vehicle, we recommend that you remove your Uconnect Access
Account information from the vehicle. You can do this on the Mopar Owner Connect
website moparownerconnect.com. Removing your account information cancels your
subscription and makes your vehicle factory-ready for a new owner/subscriber.
For additional information on Uconnect:
• U.S. residents - visit DriveUconnect.com or call 1-877-855-8400 .
• Canadian Residents - visit DriveUconnect.ca or call, 1-800-465-2001 (English)
or 1-800-387-9983 (French).
83
ELECTRONICS
Built-In Features
WARNING!
• ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the road. Some Uconnect
Access services, including 9-1-1 and Assist, will NOT work without an operable
1X (voice/data) or 3G (data) network connection.
• ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the steering wheel. You have full
responsibility and assume all risks related to the use of the Uconnect features
and applications in this vehicle. Only use Uconnect when it is safe to do so.
• Ignoring the rearview mirror light could mean you may not have 9-1-1 Call
service if needed. If the rearview mirror light is illuminated, have an authorized
dealer service the 9-1-1 Call system immediately.
• The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) turns on the Air Bag Warning Light on
the instrument panel if a malfunction is detected in any part of the airbag
system. If the Air Bag Warning Light is illuminated, the air bag system may not
be working properly and the 9-1-1 system may not send a signal to a 9-1-1
operator if an air bag is deployed. If the Air Bag Warning Light is illuminated,
have an authorized dealer service your vehicle immediately.
• If anyone in the vehicle could be in danger (e.g., fire or smoke is visible,
dangerous road conditions or location), do not wait for voice contact from a
9-1-1 operator. All occupants should exit the vehicle immediately and move to
a safe location.
• The 9-1-1 Call system is embedded into the vehicle’s electrical system. Do not
add aftermarket electrical equipment to the vehicle’s electrical system. This
may prevent your vehicle from sending a signal to initiate an emergency call. To
avoid interference that can cause the 9-1-1 Call system to fail, never add
aftermarket equipment (e.g., two-way mobile radio, CB radio, data recorder,
etc.) to your vehicle’s electrical system or modify the antennas on your vehicle.
• IF YOUR VEHICLE LOSES BATTERY POWER FOR ANY REASON (INCLUDING
DURING OR AFTER AN ACCIDENT), the Uconnect features, apps and ser-
vices, among others, will not operate.
84
ELECTRONICS
NOTE:
1. Assist Call (8.4AN) — The rearview mirror contains an ASSIST push button which
automatically connects the vehicle occupants to one of these predefined desti-
nations for immediate support:
• Roadside Assistance Call — If you
get a flat tire, or need a tow, you’ll
be connected to someone who can
help anytime. Additional fees may
apply. Additional information in
this section.
• Uconnect Access Care — In vehicle
support for Uconnect Access Sys-
tem, Apps and Features.
• Vehicle Care — Total support for
ASSIST And 9-1-1 Buttons
your FCA US LLC vehicle.
1 — ASSIST Button
2. Emergency 9-1-1 Call (If Equipped) —
2 — 9-1-1 Button
The rearview mirror contains a 9-1-1
button that, when pressed, may place
a call from your vehicle to a local
9-1-1 operator to request help from local police, fire or ambulance personnel. If
this button is accidentally pressed, you will have 7 seconds to stop the call. To
cancel, press the 9-1-1 Call button again or press the “Cancel” button shown on
the touchscreen. After 7 seconds has passed, the 9-1-1 call will be placed and
only the 9-1-1 operator can cancel it. The LED light on the rearview mirror will
turn green once a connection to a 9-1-1 operator has been made. The green LED
light will turn off once the 9-1-1 call is terminated. Have an authorized dealer
service the vehicle if the rearview mirror light is continuously red. On equipped
vehicles, this feature requires a functioning electrical system and an operable 1X
(voice/data) or 3G (data) network connection to function properly. If a connection
is made between a 9-1-1 operator and your vehicle, you understand and agree that
9-1-1 operators may, like any other 9-1-1 call, record conversations and sounds in
and near your vehicle upon connection.
3. Roadside Assistance (If Equipped) — If your vehicle is equipped with this feature
and has an operable 1X (voice/data) or 3G (data) network connection, you may be
able to connect with Roadside Assistance by pushing the "ASSIST" button on the
rearview mirror. You will be presented with Assist Care options. Make a selection
by pressing the prompts displayed on the radio. If Roadside Assistance is
provided to your vehicle, you agree to be responsible for any additional roadside
assistance service costs that you may incur. In order to provide Uconnect Services
to you, we may record and monitor your conversations with Roadside Assistance,
Uconnect Care or Vehicle Care, whether such conversations are initiated through
the Uconnect Services in your vehicle, your device or via a landline device, and
85
ELECTRONICS
may share information obtained through such recording and monitoring in
accordance with regulatory requirements. You acknowledge, agree and consent to
any recording, monitoring or sharing of information obtained through any such
call recordings.
4. Yelp — Customers have the ability to search for nearby destinations or a Point Of
Interest (POI) either by category or custom search by using keywords (for example,
“Italian restaurant”). Searching can be done by either voice or by using the touch-
screen keypad. Using the touchscreen, launch Yelp by selecting the “Apps ” icon,
then press “Yelp.” To use voice recognition, push the VR button on the steering wheel
and say “launch Yelp,” then follow the instructions on the Teleprompter.
5. Security Alarm Notification — The Security Alarm Notification feature notifies you
via email or text (SMS) message when the vehicle’s factory-installed security
alarm system has been set-off. There are a number of reasons why your alarm may
have been triggered, one of which could be that your vehicle was stolen. If so,
please see the details of the Stolen Vehicle Assistance service below. When you
register, Security Alarm Notification is automatically set to send you an email at
the mail address you provide should the alarm go off. You may also opt to have a
text message sent to your device.
6. Stolen Vehicle Assistance — If your vehicle is stolen, contact local law enforce-
ment immediately to file a stolen vehicle report. Once this report has been filed,
Uconnect care can help locate your vehicle. The Uconnect Care agent will ask for
the stolen vehicle report number issued by local law enforcement. As long as your
vehicle has an operable 1X (voice/data) or 3G (data) network connection, the
Uconnect Care Agent may be able to locate the stolen vehicle and work with law
enforcement to help recover it. Your vehicle must have an operable 1X (voice/
data) or 3G (data) network connection and must be registered with Uconnect
Access with an active subscription that includes the applicable feature.
7. WiFi Hotspot — WiFi Hotspot is an in-vehicle feature that connects your device to
an operable 1X (voice/data) or 3G (data) network using Uconnect Access and is
ready to go where ever you are. Once your vehicle is registered for Uconnect
Access, you can purchase a Wifi Hotspot subscription at the Uconnect Store.
After you've made your purchase, turn on your signal and connect your passengers
devices. It's never been easier to bring your home or office with you.
WARNING!
NEVER use the WiFi Hotspot when you are driving the vehicle. As the driver, you
should only use the WiFi Hotspot when the vehicle is parked in a safe location.
NOTE:
Your vehicle must have a working electrical system for any of the in vehicle Uconnect
features to operate.
86
ELECTRONICS
Uconnect Access Remote Features

If you own a compatible iPhone or Android powered device, the Uconnect Access App
allows you to remotely lock or unlock your doors, start your engine or activate your
horn and lights from virtually anywhere. Your vehicle must be equipped with remote
start and your vehicle must have an operable 1X (voice/data) or 3G (data) network
connection). Services can only be used where coverage is available; see coverage
map for details. You can download the App from Mopar Owner Connect or from the
App Store (iPhone) or Google Play store. Visit UconnectPhone.com to determine if
your device is compatible. For Uconnect Phone customer support and to determine
if your device is compatible.
U.S. residents - visit UconnectPhone.com or call 1-877-855-8400.
Remote Start (If Equipped) — This feature provides the ability to start the engine on
your vehicle, without the keys and from virtually any distance. You can send a request
to your vehicle in one of two ways:
1. Using the Uconnect Access App from a compatible device.
2. From the Mopar Owner Connect website.
• After 15 minutes if you have not entered your vehicle with the key, the engine
will shut off automatically.
• You can also send a command to turn-off an engine that has been remote
started.
• This remote function requires your vehicle to be equipped with a factory-
installed Remote Start system. To utilize this feature after the Uconnect Access
App is downloaded, login with your user name and password.
NOTE:
Your four digit Uconnect Security PIN is required to confirm the request.
• You can set-up notifications for your account to receive an email or text (SMS)
message every time a command is sent. Login to Mopar Owner Connect
moparownerconnect.com and click on Edit Profile to manage Uconnect
Notifications.
Remote Door Lock/Unlock — This feature provides the ability to lock or unlock the door
on your vehicle, without the keys and from virtually any distance. You can send a
request to your vehicle in one of three ways:
3. By contacting the Uconnect Care on the phone.
To use this feature after the Uconnect Access App is downloaded, login using your
user name and password. You will need your four digit Uconnect Security PIN to
confirm the request. Press the “closed lock” icon on your Uconnect Access App to
lock the doors, and press the “open Lock” icon to unlock the driver’s door.
87
ELECTRONICS
You can set-up notifications for your account to receive an email or text (SMS)
message every time a command is sent. Login to Mopar Owner Connect
moparownerconnect.com and click on Edit Profile to manage Uconnect Notifica-
tions.
Remote Horn And Lights — It’s easy to locate a vehicle in a dark, crowded or noisy
parking area by activating the horn and lights. It may also help if you need to draw
attention to your vehicle for any reason. You can send a request to your vehicle in one
of three ways:
3. By contacting the Uconnect Care on the phone.
To use this feature after the Uconnect Access App is downloaded, login using your
user name and password. You will need your four digit Uconnect Security PIN to
confirm the request. You can set-up notifications for your account to receive an email
or text (SMS) message every time a command is sent. Login to Mopar Owner Connect
moparownerconnect.com and click on Edit Profile to manage Uconnect Notifica-
tions.
Voice Texting — Want to dictate a personal message? Register with Uconnect Access
to take advantage of a new, cloudbased Voice Texting service, an enhancement to
Voice Text Reply.
Voice Texting allows you to compose a new text or reply to an incoming text message.
Before you attempt to use the Voice Texting feature, check to ensure you have the
following:
1. A paired, Bluetooth enabled device with the Message Access Profile (MAP). Not
all Bluetooth enabled devices support MAP, including all iPhones (Apple iOS).
Visit UconnectPhone.com for system and device compatibility information.
2. An active Uconnect Access trial or paid subscription.
3. Accept the “Allow MAP” profile request on your device. (Please refer to device
manufacturer instructions for details).
88
ELECTRONICS
To Send A Text Message:
1. Push the Uconnect Phone Button on the steering wheel.
2. Wait for the beep.
3. Say “Text.”
4. Uconnect will prompt you “Say the phone number, or full name and phone type
of the contact you want to send a message to.”
5. Wait for the beep and say a contact that is in your phonebook, or a mobile phone
number that you would like to send the message to.
6. Uconnect will prompt you “Please say the message that you would like to send.”
(If you do not hear this prompt, you may not have an active subscription with
Uconnect Access).
7. Wait for the beep, and then dictate any message up to 140 characters. If you
exceed 140 characters, you will hear the following prompt: “Message was too
long; your message will be truncated.”
8. Uconnect will then repeat the message back to you.
9. Uconnect will prompt you: “To add to your message, say “Continue”; To delete the
current message and start over, say “Start Over”; to send the current message, say
“Send”; to hear the message again, say “Repeat”.
10. If you are happy with your message and would like to send it, wait for the beep
and say “Send”.
11. Uconnect will then say “Sending your message.”
Sample Commands For Voice Text Reply And Voice Texting
Example Command Action
Send a message to specific contact in
“Text John Smith”
address book
Send 123 456 7890 a message from
“Text 123 456 7890”
your phonebook
See recent text messages listed by
“Show messages”
number on Uconnect screen
“Listen to/view (message number four, for Hear messages or read it on Uconnect
example)” screen
Send a voice text reply to a current
“Reply”
message
Forward current text to specific contact in
“Forward text/message to “John Smith”
address book
“Forward text/message to Forward current text to specific phone
“123 456 7890” number
89
ELECTRONICS
RADIO 3.0
Radio 3.0
1 — RADIO Button 8 — Play/Pause — Mute Button
2 — INFO Button 9 — MENU Button
3 — A-B-C Button 10 — SEEK Down Button
4 — Preset Buttons 11 — AUDIO Button
5 — BROWSE/ENTER Button — 12 — ON/OFF Button — Volume
TUNE/SCROLL Knob Knob
6 — SEEK Up Button 13 — MEDIA Button
7 — BACK Button
Clock Setting
1. Push the Menu button at the bottom of the radio, and push the Enter/Browse
button for System Settings. Next, select the Time and Format setting and then
select Set Time by pushing the Enter/Browse button.
2. Adjust the hours or minutes by turning the Tune/Scroll knob, then pushing the
Enter/Browse button to move to the next entry. You can also select 12hr or 24hr
format by turning the Tune/Scroll knob, then pushing the Enter/Browse button on
the desired selection.
3. Once the time is set press the “Back” button to exit the time screen.
90
ELECTRONICS
Audio Setting
• Push the MENU button on the radio faceplate.
• The Audio Menu shows the following options for you to customize your audio
settings.
Treble, Mid, Bass, Fade, Balance, Speed Adjusted Volume, Loudness and AUX Offset
• Select the desired setting to adjust, then push the ENTER/BROWSE button. Turn the
TUNE/SCROLL knob to adjust the setting + or - . Push the “Back” button when done.
Radio Operation
Seek Up/Down Buttons
• Push the up or down button to seek through radio stations in AM, FM or SXM bands.
• Hold either button to bypass stations without stopping.
Store Radio Presets Manually
The Presets are available for all Radio Modes, and are activated by pushing any of the
six Preset buttons. The Radio stores up to 18 presets in each of the Radio modes.
Push the A-B-C button on the faceplate to select the A, B or C preset list.
To store a radio preset manually, follow the steps below:
1. Tune to the desired station.
2. Push and hold the desired numbered button for more than two seconds, or until
you hear a confirmation beep.
Disc Operation (If Equipped)

Your vehicle may have a remote CD player located in the lower center console storage
bin, or in the lower center bench seat bin.
• CD/Disc Mode is entered by either inserting a CD/Disc or by pushing the MEDIA
button located on the side of the display. Once in Media Mode, select “Disc.”
Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD label facing as indicated on the
illustration located on the Disc player.
• Push to seek through CD tracks.
• Hold either button to bypass tracks without stopping.
USB/Audio Jack (AUX) Manual Operation

To select a specific audio source, push the MEDIA button on the faceplate and select
from the following modes:
USB/iPod
• USB/iPod Mode is entered by either inserting a USB Jump Drive or iPod cable into
the USB port or by pushing the MEDIA button located left of the display.
91
ELECTRONICS
Audio Jack (AUX)
• The AUX allows a device such as an MP3 player or an iPod to be plugged into the
radio and utilize the vehicle’s audio system, using a 3.5 mm audio cable, to
amplify the source and play through the vehicle’s speakers.
• The functions of the device are controlled using the device buttons, not the
buttons on the radio. The volume may be controlled using the radio or the device.
UCONNECT 3.0
Uconnect 3.0 Radio
1 — RADIO Button 8 — BACK Button

2 — Phone Pick-Up Button 9 — MENU Button
3 — Phone Hang-Up Button 10 — INFO Button
4 — A-B-C Button 11 — SEEK Down Button
5 — BROWSE/ENTER Button — 12 — ON/OFF Button — Volume
TUNE/SCROLL Knob Knob
6 — SEEK Up Button 13 — Preset Buttons
7 — Play/Pause — Mute Button 14 — MEDIA Button
92
ELECTRONICS
Clock Setting
1. Push the Menu button at the bottom of the radio, and push the Enter/Browse
button for System Settings. Next, select the Time and Format setting and then
select Set Time by pushing the Enter/Browse button.
2. Adjust the hours or minutes by turning the Tune/Scroll knob, then pushing the
Enter/Browse button to move to the next entry. You can also select 12hr or 24hr
format by turning the Tune/Scroll knob, then pushing the Enter/Browse button on
the desired selection.
3. Once the time is set press the “Back” button to exit the time screen.
Audio Setting
• Push the MENU button on the radio faceplate.
• The Audio Menu shows the following options for you to customize your audio
settings.
Treble, Mid, Bass, Fade, Balance, Speed Adjusted Volume, Loudness and AUX Offset
• Select the desired setting to adjust, then push the ENTER/BROWSE button. Turn
the TUNE/SCROLL knob to adjust the setting + or - . Push the “Back” button when
done.
Radio Operation
• Push the up or down button to seek through radio stations in AM, FM or SXM
bands.
The Presets are available for all Radio Modes, and are activated by pushing any of the
six Preset buttons. The Radio stores up to 18 presets in each of the Radio modes.
Push the A-B-C button on the faceplate to select the A, B or C preset list.
2. Push and hold the desired numbered button for more than two seconds, or until
you hear a confirmation beep.
93
ELECTRONICS

Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD label facing as indicated on the
illustration located on the Disc player.
• Push to seek through CD tracks.
USB/Audio Jack (AUX) Manual Operation

To select a specific audio source, push the MEDIA button on the faceplate and select
from the following modes:
USB/iPod
• USB/iPod Mode is entered by either inserting a USB Jump Drive or iPod cable into
the USB port or by pushing the MEDIA button located left of the display.
Audio Jack (AUX)
• The AUX allows a device such as an MP3 player or an iPod to be plugged into the
radio and utilize the vehicle’s audio system, using a 3.5 mm audio cable, to
amplify the source and play through the vehicle’s speakers.
buttons on the radio. The volume may be controlled using the radio or the device.
94
ELECTRONICS
UCONNECT 3.0 VOICE RECOGNITION QUICK TIPS

Introducing Uconnect
Start using Uconnect Voice Recognition with these helpful quick tips. It provides the
key Voice Commands and tips you need to know to control your Uconnect 3.0 system.
Uconnect 3.0
95
ELECTRONICS
Get Started
1. U.S. residents can visit UconnectPhone.com to check device and feature compat-
ibility and to find device pairing instructions.
2. Reduce background noise. Wind and passenger conversations are examples of
noise that may impact recognition.
3. Speak clearly at a normal pace and volume while facing straight ahead. The
microphone is positioned on the rearview mirror and aimed at the driver.
4. Each time you give a Voice Command, you must first push either the VR or Phone
button, wait until after the beep, then say your Voice Command.
5. You can interrupt the help message or system prompts by pushing the VR or
Phone button and saying a Voice Command from current category.
All you need to control your Uconnect system with your voice are the buttons on your
steering wheel.
Uconnect VR And Phone Buttons

1 — Push To Begin Radio Or Media Functions
2 — Push To Initiate, Answer, Or End A Phone Call, Send Or Receive A Text
96
ELECTRONICS
Radio
Use your voice to quickly get to the AM, FM or SiriusXM Satellite Radio stations you
would like to hear. (Subscription or included SiriusXM Satellite Radio trial required.)
Push the VR button . After the beep, say:
• Tune to ninety-five-point-five FM
• Tune to Satellite Channel Hits 1
TIP: At any time, if you are not sure of what to say or want to learn a Voice Command,
push the VR button and say “Help.” The system will provide you with a list of
commands.
Media
Uconnect offers connections via USB, SD, Bluetooth and auxiliary ports (If
Equipped). Voice operation is only available for connected USB and iPod devices.
(Remote CD player optional and not available on all vehicles.)
Push the VR button . After the beep, say one of the following commands and
follow the prompts to switch your media source or choose an artist.
• Change source to Bluetooth
• Change source to iPod
• Change source to USB
• Play artist Beethoven; Play album Greatest Hits; Play song Moonlight Sonata; Play
genre Classical
TIP: Press the Browse button on the touchscreen to see all of the music on your iPod
or USB device. Your Voice Command must match exactly how the artist, album, song
and genre information is displayed.
Phone
Making and answering hands-free phone calls is easy with Uconnect. When the
Phonebook button is illuminated on your touchscreen, your system is ready.
U.S. residents can visit UconnectPhone.com to check device and feature compat-
Push the Phone button . After the beep, say one of the following commands…
• Call John Smith
• Dial 123-456-7890 and follow the system prompts
• Redial (call previous outgoing phone number)
• Call back (call previous incoming phone number)
97
ELECTRONICS
TIP: When providing a Voice Command, push the Phone button and say “Call,”
then pronounce the name exactly as it appears in your phone book. When a contact
has multiple phone numbers, you can say “Call John Smith work.”
Voice Text Reply

Uconnect will announce incoming text messages. Push the Phone button and
say Listen. (Must have compatible device paired to Uconnect system.)
1. Once an incoming text message is read to you, push the Phone button . After
the beep, say: Reply.
2. Listen to the Uconnect prompts. After the beep, repeat one of the pre-defined
messages and follow the system prompts.
TIP: Your device must have the full implementation of the Message Access Profile
(MAP) to take advantage of this feature. For details about MAP, visit
UconnectPhone.com for U.S. residents. Apple iPhone iOS6 or later supports reading
incoming text messages only.
PRE-DEFINED VOICE TEXT REPLY RESPONSES
Yes. Stuck in Traffic. See you later.
No. Start without me. I’ll be Late.
Okay. Where are you? I will be <number>
Call me. Are you there yet? minutes late.
I’ll call you later. I need directions. See you in <number> of
I’m on my way. minutes.
Can’t talk right now.
I’m lost. Thanks.
Additional Information
© 2015 FCA US LLC. All rights reserved. Mopar, Mopar Owner Connect and
Uconnect are registered trademarks of FCA US LLC. Android is a trademark of Google
Inc. SiriusXM and all related marks and logos are trademarks of SiriusXM Radio Inc.
Yelp, Yelp logo, Yelp burst and related marks are registered trademarks of Yelp.
Uconnect System Support:
• U.S. residents visit DriveUconnect.com or call: 1-877-855-8400 (24 hours a day
7 days a week)
• Canadian residents visit DriveUconnect.ca or call: 1-800-465-2001 (English) or
1-800-387-9983 (French)
Mon. – Fri., 8:00 am – 8:00 pm, ET
Sat., 9:00 am – 5:00 pm, ET
Sun., Closed
Uconnect Access Services Support. 1-855-792-4241 Please have your Uconnect
Security PIN ready when you call.
98
ELECTRONICS
UCONNECT 5.0
Uconnect 5.0 Radio

1 — RADIO Button 6 — Back Button
2 — COMPASS Button 7 — Screen OFF Button
3 — SETTINGS Button 8 — Mute Button — Volume Control
4 — MORE Button 9 — Uconnect Phone Button
5 — Browse/Enter — Tune/Scroll 10 — MEDIA Button
Knob
CAUTION!
Do NOT attach any object to the touchscreen, doing so can result in damage to the
screen.
99
ELECTRONICS
Clock Setting
To start the clock setting procedure, perform the following:
1. Push the SETTINGS button on the faceplate on the right side of the display, then
press the “Clock & Date” button on the touchscreen.
2. Press the “Set Time & Format” button on the touchscreen.
3. Press the “Up” or “Down” arrows to adjust the hours or minutes, next select the
“AM” or “PM” button on the touchscreen. You can also select 12hr or 24hr format
by pressing the desired button on the touchscreen.
4. Once the time is set press the “Done” button on the touchscreen to exit the time
screen.
NOTE:
In the Clock Setting Menu you can also select Display Clock. Display Clock turns the
clock display in the status bar on or off.
Equalizer, Balance And Fade

1. Push the SETTINGS button on the faceplate on the right side of the unit.
2. Then scroll down and press the “Audio” button on the touchscreen to get to the
Audio menu.
3. The Audio Menu shows the following options for you to customize your audio
settings.
Equalizer
• Press the “Equalizer” button on the touchscreen to adjust the Bass, Mid and
Treble. Use the “+” or “–” button on the touchscreen to adjust the equalizer to your
desired settings. Press the “Done” button on the touchscreen when finished.
Balance/Fade
• Press the “Balance/Fade” button on the touchscreen to adjust the sound from the
speakers. Use the “arrow” button on the touchscreen to adjust the sound level
from the front and rear or right and left side speakers. Press the Center “C” button
on the touchscreen to reset the balance and fade to the factory setting. Press the
“Done” button on the touchscreen when finished.
Speed Adjustable
• Press the “Speed Adjusted Volume” button on the touchscreen to select between
OFF, 1, 2 or 3. This will decrease the radio volume relative to a decrease in vehicle
speed. Press the “Done” button on the touchscreen when finished.
Loudness
• Press the “Loudness” button on the touchscreen to select the Loudness feature.
When this feature is activated it improves sound quality at lower volumes.
100
ELECTRONICS
Radio Operation
Uconnect 5.0 Radio Screen

1 — Radio Station Presets 5 — Station Info
2 — Show All Presets 6 — Direct Tune
3 — Seek Up 7 — Radio Band
4 — Audio Settings 8 — Seek Down

• Press the up or down button to seek through radio stations in AM, FM or SXM
bands.
The Radio stores up to 12 presets in each of the Radio modes. There are four visible
presets at the top of the radio screen. Pressing the “All” button on the touchscreen
on the radio home screen will display all of the preset stations for that mode.
1. Tune to the desired station
2. Press and hold the desired preset button on the touchscreen for more that two
seconds or until you hear a confirmation beep.
101
ELECTRONICS
SiriusXM Premier Over 160 channels

Get every channel available on your satellite radio, and enjoy all you want, all in one
place. Hear commercial-free music plus sports, news, talk and entertainment. Get all
the premium programming, including Howard Stern, every NFL game, Oprah Radio,
every MLB and NHL game, every NASCAR race, Martha Stewart and more. And get
20+ extra channels, including SiriusXM Latino, offering 20 channels of commercial
free music, news, talk, comedy, sports and more dedicated to Spanish language
programming.
To access SiriusXM Satellite Radio, push the RADIO button on the faceplate and then
the SXM button on the touchscreen.
SiriusXM services require subscriptions, sold separately after the 12-month trial
included with the new vehicle purchase. If you decide to continue your service at the
end of your trial subscription, the plan you choose will automatically renew and bill at
then-current rates until you call SiriusXM at 1-866-635-2349 for U.S. residents and
1-888-539-7474 for Canadian residents to cancel. See SiriusXM Customer Agreement
for complete terms at www.siriusxm.com for U.S. residents and www.siriusxm.ca for
Canadian residents. All fees and programming subject to change. Our satellite service
is available only to those at least 18 and older in the 48 contiguous USA and D.C. Our
Sirius satellite service is also available in PR (with coverage limitations). Our Internet
radio service is available throughout our satellite service area and in AK and HI.
© 2015 Sirius XM Radio Inc. Sirius, XM and all related marks and logos are
trademarks of Sirius XM Radio Inc.

• Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD label facing as indicated on
the illustration located on the Disc player.
• Press to seek through Disc tracks.
Browse
• Press the “Browse” button on the touchscreen to scroll through and select a
desired track on the Disc. Press the “Exit” button on the touchscreen if you want
to cancel the browse function.
102
ELECTRONICS
USB/Audio Jack (AUX)/SD CARD — If Equipped

To select a specific audio source, push
the MEDIA button on the faceplate. To
allow music to play from your device
through the vehicle’s speakers, press the
“Source” button then select one of the
following modes:
USB/iPod
• USB/iPod Mode is entered by either
inserting a USB Jump Drive or iPod
cable into the USB port or by pushing
the MEDIA button on the faceplate Uconnect Media Hub
located left of the display.
1 — SD Card Port
Audio Jack (AUX) 2 — Audio/AUX Jack
3 — USB Port
• The AUX allows a device, such as an
MP3 player or an iPod, to be plugged
into the radio and utilize the vehicle’s
audio system, using a 3.5 mm audio cable, to amplify the source and play through
the vehicle speakers.
buttons on the radio. The volume may be controlled using the radio or device.
SD Card
• Play songs stored on an SD card inserted into the SD card slot.
• Song playback can be controlled using the radio or Steering Wheel Audio Controls
to play, skip to the next or previous track, browse, and list the contents.
Bluetooth
• If using a Bluetooth-equipped device, you may also be able to stream music to
your vehicle's sound system.
103
ELECTRONICS
UCONNECT 5.0 VOICE RECOGNITION QUICK TIPS

key Voice Commands and tips you need to know to control your Uconnect 5.0 system.
Key Features:
• 5” touchscreen
• Three buttons on either side of the display
Uconnect 5.0
104
ELECTRONICS
Get Started
3. Speak clearly at a normal pace and volume while facing straight ahead.
The microphone is positioned on the rearview mirror and aimed at the driver.
4. Each time you give a Voice Command, you must first press either the VR or Phone
5. You can interrupt the help message or system prompts by pressing the VR or
steering wheel.
Uconnect VR/Phone Buttons

1 — Push To Begin Radio Or Media Functions
2 — Push To Initiate, Answer, Or End A Phone Call, Send Or Receive A Text
105
ELECTRONICS
Basic Voice Commands

The basic Voice Commands below can be given at any point while using your
Uconnect system.
• Cancel to stop a current voice session
• Help to hear a list of suggested Voice Commands
• Repeat to listen to the system prompts again
Notice the visual cues that inform you of your voice recognition system’s status. Cues
appear on the touchscreen.
Uconnect 5.0 Visual Cues
106
ELECTRONICS
Radio
commands.
Uconnect 5.0 Radio
107
ELECTRONICS
Media
Uconnect offers connections via USB, SD, Bluetooth and auxiliary ports (If
Equipped). Voice operation is only available for connected USB and iPod devices.
(Remote CD player optional and not available on all vehicles.)
genre Classical
Uconnect 5.0 Media
108
ELECTRONICS
Phone
U.S. residents can visit UconnectPhone.com to check device and feature compat-
Push the Phone button . After the beep, say one of the following commands…
• Call John Smith
TIP: When providing a Voice Command, push the Phone button and say “Call,”
then pronounce the name exactly as it appears in your phone book. When a contact
has multiple phone numbers, you can say “Call John Smith work.”
Uconnect 5.0 Phone
109
ELECTRONICS
Voice Text Reply

incoming text messages only.
I’ll call you later. I need directions. See you in <number>
I’m lost. Thanks.
7 days a week)
1-800-387-9983 (French)
Mon. – Fri., 8:00 am – 8:00 pm, ET
Sat., 9:00 am – 5:00 pm, ET
Sun., Closed
Uconnect Access Services Support: 1-855-792-4241. Please have your Uconnect

110
ELECTRONICS
UCONNECT 8.4A/8.4AN
Uconnect 8.4A/8.4AN At A Glance
Uconnect 8.4AN Radio Screen
CAUTION!
Do NOT attach any object to the touchscreen, doing so can result in damage to the
screen.
Setting The Time

• Model 8.4AN synchronizes time automatically via GPS, so it should not require
any time adjustment. If you do need to set the time manually, follow the
instructions below for Model 8.4A.
• For Model 8.4A, turn the unit on, then press the time display at the top of the
screen. Press “Yes.”
• If the time is not displayed at the top of the screen, press the “Settings” button on
the touchscreen. In the Settings screen, press the “Clock” button on the touch-
screen, then check or uncheck this option.
• Press “+” or “–” next to Set Time Hours and Set Time Minutes to adjust the time.
• If these features are not available, uncheck the Sync Time box.
• Press “X” to save your settings and exit out of the Clock Setting screen.
111
ELECTRONICS
Background Themes
• Screen background themes are selectable from a pre-loaded list of themes. If
you’d like to set a theme, follow the instructions below.
• Press the “Settings” button on the touchscreen.
• Press the “Display” button on the touchscreen.
• Then press “Set Theme” button on the touchscreen and select a theme.
Audio Settings
• Press of the “Audio” button on the touchscreen to activate the Audio settings
screen to adjust Balance\Fade, Equalizer, and Speed Adjusted Volume.
• You can return to the Radio screen by pressing the “X” located at the top right.
Balance/Fade
• Press the “Balance/Fade” button on the touchscreen to Balance audio between
the front speakers or fade the audio between the rear and front speakers.
• Pressing the “Front,” “Rear,” “Left,” or “Right” buttons on the touchscreen or
press and drag the Speaker Icon to adjust the Balance/Fade.
Equalizer
• Press the “Equalizer” button on the touchscreen to activate the Equalizer screen.
• Press the “+” or “–” buttons on the touchscreen, or press and drag over the level
bar for each of the equalizer bands. The level value, which spans between plus or
minus 9, is displayed at the bottom of each of the Bands.
Speed Adjusted Volume
• Press the “Speed Adjusted Volume” button on the touchscreen to activate the
Speed Adjusted Volume screen. The Speed Adjusted Volume is adjusted by
pressing the volume level indicator. This alters the automatic adjustment of the
audio volume with variation to vehicle speed.
112
ELECTRONICS
Personalized Menu Bar

The Uconnect features and services in the main menu bar are easily changed for your
convenience. Simply follow these steps:
Uconnect 8.4A/8.4AN Main Menu
1. Press the “Apps ” button to open the App screen.

2. Press and hold, then drag the selected App to replace an existing shortcut in the
main menu bar.
The replaced shortcut will now be an active App/shortcut on the main menu bar.
113
ELECTRONICS
Radio
Uconnect 8.4AN Radio
1 — Radio Station Presets 7 — Audio Settings

2 — Toggle Between Presets 8 — Seek Up
3 — Status Bar 9 — Direct Tune To A Radio Station
4 — View Small Navigation Map 10 — Seek Down
5 — HD Radio 11 — Browse And Manage Presets
6 — Main Category Bar 12 — Radio Bands
• To access the Radio mode, press the “Radio” button on the touchscreen.
Selecting Radio Stations
• Press the desired radio band (AM, FM or SXM) button on the touchscreen.
Seek Up/Seek Down
• Press the Seek up or down arrow buttons on the touchscreen for less than two
seconds to seek through radio stations.
• Press and hold either arrow button on the touchscreen for more than two seconds
to bypass stations without stopping. The radio will stop at the next listenable
station once the arrow button on the touchscreen is released.
114
ELECTRONICS
Direct Tune
• Tune directly to a radio station by pressing the “Tune” button on the screen, and
entering the desired station number.
Your radio can store 36 total preset stations, 12 presets per band (AM, FM and SXM).
They are shown at the top of your radio screen. To see the 12 preset stations per band,
press the arrow button on the touchscreen at the top right of the screen to toggle
between the two sets of six presets.
2. Press and hold the desired numbered button on the touchscreen for more than
two seconds or until you hear a confirmation beep.
HD Radio — If Equipped
• HD Radio (available on Uconnect 8.4AN) operates similar to conventional radio
except it allows broadcasters to transmit a high-quality digital signal.
• With an HD radio receiver, the listener is provided with a clear sound that
enhances the listening experience. HD radio can also transmit data such as song
title or artist.
SiriusXM Premier Over 160 Channels

Get every channel available on your satellite radio, and enjoy all you want, all in one
place. Hear commercial-free music plus sports, news, talk and entertainment. Get all
the premium programming, including Howard Stern, every NFL game, Oprah Radio,
every MLB and NHL game, every NASCAR race, Martha Stewart and more. And get
20+ extra channels, including SiriusXM Latino, offering 20 channels of commercial
free music, news, talk, comedy, sports and more dedicated to Spanish language
programming.
• To access SiriusXM Satellite Radio, press the “SXM” button on the touchscreen on
the main Radio screen.
The following describes features that are available when in SiriusXM Satellite Radio
mode:
Seek Up/Seek Down
• Press the Seek arrow buttons on the touchscreen for less than two seconds to seek
through channels in SXM mode.
• Press and hold either arrow button on the touchscreen for more than two seconds
to bypass channels without stopping. The radio will stop at the next listenable
channel once the arrow button on the touchscreen is released.
115
ELECTRONICS
Direct Tune
• Tune directly to a SXM channel by pressing the “Tune” button on the touchscreen
on the screen, and entering the desired station number.
Jump
• Automatically tells you when Traffic & Weather for a favorite city is available, and
gives you the option to switch to that channel. Press “Jump” to activate the
feature. After listening to Traffic and Weather, press “Jump” again to return to the
previous channel.
Fav
• Activates the favorites menu. You can add up to 50 favorite artists or songs. Just
press “Add Fav Artist” or “Add Fav Song” while the song is playing. You will then
be alerted any time one of these songs, or works by these artists, is playing on other
SiriusXM channels.
Album Art
• When arriving at a station, the Channel Art will be displayed to the left of the
station information. After 5 seconds the Channel Art will be replaced with the
Album Art (if available).
SiriusXM Parental Controls
• You can skip or hide certain channels from view if you do not want access to them.
Press the “Apps” button on the touchscreen, then the “Settings” button on the
touchscreen, next press the “Sirius Setup” button on the touchscreen, then select
Channel Skip. Press the box check-mark next to the channel you want skipped.
They will not show up in normal usage.
• SiriusXM also offers the option to permanently block selected channels. Call
(1-888-601-6297 for U.S. customers, 1-877-438-9677 for Canadian customers)
and request the Family-Friendly Package.
Browse
Lets you browse the SiriusXM channel listing or Genre listing. Favorites, Game Zone,
Weather and Jump settings also provide a way to browse the SiriusXM channel list.
Browse Sub-Menu Description
Sub-Menu
All Shows the channel listing.
Genre Provides a list of all genres, and lets you jump to a channel within the
selected genre.
Presets Lets you scroll the list of Preset satellite channels. Press the channel, or
press Enter on the Tune knob, to go to that channel. Press the trash can
icon to delete a preset. Your presets are also shown at the top of the main
Satellite Radio screen.
116
ELECTRONICS
Browse Sub-Menu Description

Sub-Menu
Favorites Lets you manage artists and songs in the Favorites list and configure Alert
Settings to let you know when favorite songs or artists are playing on other
channels. Also, view a list of channels airing any of your Favorites.
Game Zone Provides alerts when your favorite sports teams are starting a game which
is being aired on other SiriusXM channels, or when their game score is
announced. You can select and manage your Teams list here, and
configure alerts.
Jump Lets you select your favorite cities for Traffic & Weather information,
which is used by the Jump feature on the main satellite radio screen.
Replay
Lets you replay up to 44 minutes of the content of the current SiriusXM channel.
Replay Option Description
Option
Play/Pause Press to Pause content playback. Press Pause/Play again to resume
playback.
Rewind/RW Rewinds the channel content in steps of five seconds. Press and hold to
rewind continuously, then release to begin playing content at that point.
Fast Forwards the content, and works similarly to Rewind/RW. However, Fast
Forward/FW Forward/FW can only be used when content has been previously rewound.
Replay Time Displays the amount of time in the upper center of the screen by which
your content lags the Live channel.
Live Resumes playback of Live content at any time while replaying rewound
content.
• SiriusXM services require subscriptions, sold separately after the 12-month trial
included with the new vehicle purchase. If you decide to continue your service at the
end of your trial subscription, the plan you choose will automatically renew and bill at
then-current rates until you call SiriusXM at 1-866-635-2349 for U.S. residents and
1-888-539-7474 for Canadian residents to cancel. See SiriusXM Customer Agreement
for complete terms at www.siriusxm.com (U.S. residents) or siriusxm.ca (Canadian
residents). All fees and programming subject to change. Our satellite service is
available only to those at least 18 and older in the 48 contiguous USA and D.C.
Our Sirius satellite service is also available in PR (with coverage limitations). Our
Internet radio service is available throughout our satellite service area and in AK
and HI. ©2015 Sirius XM Radio Inc. Sirius, XM and all related marks and logos are
trademarks of Sirius XM Radio Inc.
117
ELECTRONICS

• Your vehicle may have a remote CD player located in the lower center console
storage bin, or in the lower center bench seat bin.
• CD/Disc Mode is entered by either inserting a CD/Disc or by pressing the MEDIA
button. Once in Media Mode, select “Disc.”
• Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD label facing as indicated on
the illustration located on the Disc player.
• Press to seek through Disc tracks.
Browse
• Press the “Browse” button on the touchscreen to scroll through and select a
desired track on the Disc. Press the “Exit” button on the touchscreen if you wish
to cancel the browse function.
MEDIA HUB — USB/Audio Jack (AUX)/SD CARD — If Equipped

There are many ways to play music from
MP3 players, USB devices, or SD Cards
through your vehicle's sound system.
Press your Media button on the touch-
screen to begin.
Audio Jack (AUX)
• The AUX allows a device to be plugged
into the radio and utilize the vehicle’s
sound system, using a 3.5 mm audio
cable, to amplify the source and play
through the vehicle speakers. Uconnect Media Hub
• Pressing the “AUX” button on the 1 — SD Card Port
touchscreen will change the mode to 2 — Audio/AUX Jack
auxiliary device if the audio jack is 3 — USB Port
connected, allowing the music from
your device to be heard through the
vehicle's speakers. To activate the
AUX, plug in the audio jack.
• The functions of the device are controlled using the device buttons. The volume
may be controlled using the radio or device.
• To route the audio cable out of the center console, use the access cut out in the
front of the console.
118
ELECTRONICS
USB Port
• Connect your compatible device using a USB cable into the USB Port. USB
Memory sticks with audio files can also be used. Audio from the device can be
played on the vehicles sound system while providing metadata (artist, track title,
album, etc.) information on the radio display.
• When connected, the compatible USB device can be controlled using the radio or
Steering Wheel Audio Controls to play, skip to the next or previous track, browse,
and list the contents.
• The battery charges when plugged into the USB port (if supported by the specific
device).
• To route the USB cable out of the center console, use the access cut out.
NOTE:
When connecting your device for the first time, the system may take several minutes
to read your music, depending on the number of files. For example, the system will
take approximately five minutes for every 1,000 songs loaded on the device. Also
during the reading process, the Shuffle and Browse functions will be disabled. This
process is needed to ensure the full use of your features and only happens the first
time it is connected. After the first time, the reading process of your device will take
considerably less time unless changes are made or new songs are added to the
playlist.
SD Card
• Play songs stored on an SD card inserted into the SD card slot.
• Song playback can be controlled using the radio or Steering Wheel Audio Controls
to play, skip to the next or previous track, browse, and list the contents.
Bluetooth Streaming Audio
• If equipped with Uconnect Voice Command, your Bluetooth-equipped device may
also be able to stream music to your vehicle's sound system. Your connected
device must be Bluetooth-compatible and paired with your system (see Uconnect
Phone for pairing instructions). You can access the music from your connected
Bluetooth device by pressing the Bluetooth button on the touchscreen while in
Media mode.
119
ELECTRONICS
Media Controls
Media Controls
1 — Repeat Music Track 5 — Show Songs Currently In Cue To
2 — Music Track And Time Be Played
3 — Shuffle Music Tracks 6 — Browse Music By
4 — Music Track Information 7 — Music Source
The controls are accessed by pressing the desired button on the touchscreen and
choosing between Disc, AUX, USB, Bluetooth or SD Card.
NOTE:
Uconnect will automatically switch to the appropriate mode when something is first
connected or inserted into the system.
120
ELECTRONICS
Navigation
• The information in the section below is only applicable if you have the 8.4AN
system or the Navigation has been activated on your 8.4A system.
• If you have a Uconnect 8.4A system your radio is “Navigation-Ready,” and can be
equipped with Navigation at an extra cost. Please see your dealer for details.
Press the “Nav” button on the touchscreen in the menu bar to access the Navigation
system.
Changing The Navigation Voice Prompt Volume
1. Press the “View Map” button on the touchscreen from the Nav Main Menu.
2. With the map displayed, press the “Settings” button on the touchscreen in the
lower right area of the screen.
3. In the Settings menu, press the “Guidance” button on the touchscreen.
4. In the Guidance menu, adjust the Nav Volume by pressing the “+” or “–” buttons
on the touchscreen.
Uconnect 8.4AN Navigation

1 — Find A Destination 5 — Navigation Settings
2 — View Map 6 — Stop A Route
3 — Information 7 — Detour A Route
4 — Emergency 8 — Repeat Route Guidance Prompt
121
ELECTRONICS
Finding Points Of Interest
• From the main Navigation menu, press the “Where To?” button on the touch-
screen, then press the “Points of Interest” button on the touchscreen.
• Select a Category and then a subcategory, if necessary.
• Select your destination and press the “Yes” button on the touchscreen.
Finding A Place By Spelling The Name
• From the Main Navigation Menu press the “Where to?” button on the touchscreen,
press the “Points of Interest” button on the touchscreen, then press the “Spell
Name” button on the touchscreen.
• Enter the name of your destination.
• Press the “List” button on the touchscreen.
• Select your destination and press the “Yes” button on the touchscreen.
One-Step Voice Destination Entry
• Enter a navigation destination without taking your hands off the wheel.
• Just push the Uconnect Voice Command button on the steering wheel, wait for
the beep and say something like, "Find Address 800 Chrysler Drive Auburn Hills MI."
NOTE:
Destination entry is not available while your vehicle is in motion. However, you can
also use Voice Commands to enter an address while moving. Refer to Common
Navigation Voice Commands in the Uconnect Voice Command section.
Setting Your Home Location
• Press the “Nav” button on the touchscreen in the menu bar to access the
Navigation system and the Main Navigation menu.
• Press the “Where To?” button on the touchscreen, then press the “Go Home”
button on the touchscreen.
• You may enter your address directly, use your current location as your home
address, or choose from recently found locations.
• To delete your Home location (or other saved locations) so you can save a new
Home location, press the “Where To?” button on the touchscreen from the Main
Navigation menu, then press the “Go Home” button on the touchscreen, and in the
Yes screen press the “Options” button on the touchscreen. In the Options menu
press the “Clear Home” button on the touchscreen. Set a new Home location by
following the previous instructions.
122
ELECTRONICS
Go Home
• A Home location must be saved in the system. From the Main Navigation menu,
press the “Where To?” button on the touchscreen, then press the “Go Home”
button on the touchscreen.
Uconnect 8.4AN Map

1 — Distance To Next Turn 5 — Your Location On The Map
2 — Next Turn Street 6 — Navigation Main Menu
3 — Estimated Time Of Arrival 7 — Current Street Location
4 — Zoom In And Out 8 — Navigation Routing Options
Your route is marked with a blue line on the map. If you depart from the original route,
your route is recalculated. A speed limit icon could appear as you travel on major
roadways.
Adding A Stop
• To add a stop you must be navigating a route.
• Press the “Menu” button on the touchscreen to return to the Main Navigation
menu.
• Press the “Where To?” button on the touchscreen, then search for the extra stop.
When another location has been selected, you can choose to cancel your previous
route, add as the first destination or add as the last destination.
• Press the desired selection and press the “Yes” button on the touchscreen.
123
ELECTRONICS
Taking A Detour
• To take a detour you must be navigating a route.
• Press the “Detour” button on the touchscreen.
NOTE:
If the route you are currently taking is the only reasonable option, the device may not
calculate a detour. For more information, see your Uconnect User's Manual.
SiriusXM Traffic (8.4AN & US Market Only)

Don't Drive Through Traffic. Drive Around It.
Avoid congestion before you reach it. By enhancing your vehicle's navigation system
with the ability to see detailed traffic information, you can pinpoint traffic incidents,
determine average traffic speed and estimate travel time along your route. Since the
service is integrated with a vehicle's navigation system, SiriusXM Traffic can help
drivers pick the fastest route based on traffic conditions.
• Detailed information on traffic speed, accidents, construction, and road closings.
• Traffic information from multiple sources, including police and emergency ser-
vices, cameras and road sensors.
• Coast-to-coast delivery of traffic information.
• View conditions for points along your route and beyond. Available in over 130
markets.
SiriusXM Travel Link (8.4AN & US Market Only

In addition to delivering over 130 channels of the best sports, entertainment, talk,
and commercial-free music, SiriusXM offers premium data services that work in
conjunction with compatible navigation systems. SiriusXM Travel Link brings a
wealth of useful information into your vehicle and right to your fingertips.
• Fuel Prices — Check local gas and diesel prices in your area and route to the
station of your choice.
• Movie Listings — Check local movie theatres and listings in your area and route to
the theater of your choice.
• Sports Scores — In-game and final scores as well as weekly schedules.
• Weather — Check variety of local and national weather information from radar
maps to current and 5-day forecast.
SiriusXM Travel Link feature is completely integrated into your vehicle. A few minutes
after you start your vehicle, Travel Link information arrives and updates in the
background. You can access the information whenever you like, with no waiting.
To access SiriusXM Travel Link, press “Apps” button on the touchscreen, then press
the “SiriusXM Travel Link” button on the touchscreen.
124
ELECTRONICS
NOTE:
SiriusXM Travel Link requires a subscription, sold separately after the five (5) year
trial subscription included with your vehicle purchase.
SiriusXM Travel Link is only available in the United States.
Fuel Prices Check local gas and diesel prices in your area and route to the station
of your choice.
Movie Listings Check local movie theatres and listings in your area and route to the
theater of your choice.
Sports Scores In-game and final scores as well as weekly schedules.
Weather Check variety of local and national weather information from radar
maps to current and 5-day forecast.
UCONNECT 8.4A/8.4AN VOICE RECOGNITION QUICK TIPS

key Voice Commands and tips you need to know to control your Uconnect 8.4AN
system.
If you see the icon on your touchscreen, you have the Uconnect 8.4AN system.
If not, you have a Uconnect 8.4A system.
Uconnect 8.4AN
125
ELECTRONICS
Get Started
3. Speak clearly at a normal pace and volume while facing straight ahead. The
microphone is positioned on the rearview mirror and aimed at the driver.
4. Each time you give a Voice Command, you must first push either the VR or Phone
5. You can interrupt the help message or system prompts by pushing the VR or
steering wheel.
Uconnect VR And Phone Buttons
1. Uconnect Voice Recognition Button .

a. Short Press: Push and release the VR button to begin Radio, Climate,
Navigation, and other embedded functions. After you hear the single beep, say
a command.
b. Long Press: Push and hold, then release the VR button for Siri functions. After
you hear the familiar Siri "double beep," say a command.
2. Uconnect Phone Button , Push to initiate, answer, or end a phone call, send
or receive a text.
126
ELECTRONICS
Basic Voice Commands

The basic Voice Commands below can be given at any point while using your
Uconnect system.
• Cancel to stop a current voice session
• Help to hear a list of suggested Voice Commands
• Repeat to listen to the system prompts again
Notice the visual cues that inform you of your voice recognition system’s status. Cues
appear on the touchscreen.
Uconnect 8.4A/8.4AN
127
ELECTRONICS
Radio
commands.
Uconnect 8.4A/8.4AN Radio
128
ELECTRONICS
Media
Uconnect offers connections via USB, SD, Bluetooth and auxiliary ports (If Equipped).
Voice operation is only available for connected USB and iPod devices.
genre Classical
Uconnect 8.4A/8.4AN Media
129
ELECTRONICS
Phone
U.S. residents can visit:
• UconnectPhone.com for device compatibility and pairing instructions.
Canadian residents can visit:
• UconnectPhone.com for device compatibility and pairing instructions.
Push the Phone button. After the beep, say one of the following commands…
• Call John Smith
TIP: When providing a Voice Command, push the Phone button and say “Call,” then
pronounce the name exactly as it appears in your phone book. When a contact has
multiple phone numbers, you can say “Call John Smith work.”
Uconnect 8.4A/8.4AN Phone
130
ELECTRONICS
Siri Eyes Free — If Equipped

Siri lets you use your voice to send text messages, select media, place phone calls
and much more. Siri uses your natural language to understand what you mean and
will respond back to confirm your requests. The system is designed to keep your eyes
on the road and your hands on the wheel by letting Siri help you perform useful tasks.
To enable Siri push and hold, then release the Uconnect Voice Recognition (VR)
button on the steering wheel. After you hear a double beep you can ask Siri to play
podcasts and music, get directions, read text messages and many other useful
requests.
Siri Eyes Free Available
131
ELECTRONICS
Getting Started
Ensure Siri is enabled on your iPhone.
Enable Siri
1 — Select Settings on your iPhone 3 — Select Siri
2 — Select General 4 — Enable Siri
1. Pair your Siri enabled device to the vehicles sound system. Refer to “Uconnect
Phone” in “Electronics” for a detailed pairing procedure.
Pair Your iPhone
132
ELECTRONICS
2. Push and Hold, then release the Uconnect Voice
Recognition (VR) button on the steering wheel.
After you hear the familiar Siri "double beep," say a
command.
NOTE:
A push and release of the button will start normal
embedded VR functions. The push and hold, then release of
the button will start Siri functions.
3. After the double beep, begin speaking to Siri.
Examples of Siri commands and questions:
• "Play Rolling Stones"
• "Send text message to John"
• "Read text message from Sarah"
• "Take me to the nearest coffee shop"
NOTE:
• Speak clearly at a normal pace and volume while facing straight ahead to ensure
your command is understood.
• Siri is available on iPhone 4S and later.
Siri Eyes Free
133
ELECTRONICS
Voice Text Reply

I’ll call you later. I need directions. See you in <number>
I’m lost. Thanks.
incoming text messages only. To enable this feature on your Apple iPhone, follow
these 4 simple steps:
1. Select “Settings.”
2. Select “Bluetooth.”
3. Select the (i) for the paired vehicle.
4. Turn on “Show Notifications.”
TIP: Voice Text Reply is not compatible
with iPhone, but if your vehicle is
equipped with Siri Eyes Free, you can use
your voice to send a text message.
iPhone Notification Setting
134
ELECTRONICS
Climate (8.4A/8.4AN)
Too hot? Too cold? Adjust vehicle temperatures hands-free and keep everyone
comfortable while you keep moving ahead. (If vehicle is equipped with climate
control.)
Push the VR button . After the beep, say one of the following commands:
• Set driver temperature to 70 degrees
• Set passenger temperature to 70 degrees
TIP: Voice Command for Climate may only be used to adjust the interior temperature
of your vehicle. Voice Command will not work to adjust the heated seats or steering
wheel (if equipped).
Uconnect 8.4A/8.4AN Climate
135
ELECTRONICS
Navigation (8.4A/8.4AN)
The Uconnect navigation feature helps you save time and become more productive
when you know exactly how to get to where you want to go. (Navigation is optional on
the Uconnect 8.4A system. See your dealer to activate navigation at any time.)
1. To enter a destination, push the VR button . After the beep, say:
• For the 8.4A Uconnect System, say: Enter state.
• For the 8.4AN Uconnect System, say: Find Address 800 Chrysler Drive Auburn
Hills, Michigan.
2. Then follow the system prompts.
TIP: To start a Point Of Interest (POI) search, push the VR button . After the
beep, say “Find nearest coffee shop.”
Uconnect 8.4A/8.4AN Navigation
136
ELECTRONICS
Uconnect Access — If Equipped (8.4A/8.4AN)
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the road. Some Uconnect Access
services, including 9-1-1 and Assist, will NOT work without an operable 1X
(voice/data) or 3G (data) network connection.
NOTE:
An included trial and/or subscription is required to take advantage of the Uconnect
Access services in the next section of this guide. To register with Uconnect Access,
press the “Apps” button on the 8.4-inch touchscreen to get started. Detailed
registration instructions can be found on the next page.
NOTE:
• If your vehicle is not connected to an operable 1X (voice/data)
or 3G (data) network, the signal strength bars on the “Apps”
button on the touchscreen will show a single bar and a prohi-
bition symbol to indicate your vehicle is not connected to an
operable 1X (voice/data) or 3G (data) network.
• Uconnect Access is available only on properly equipped vehicles purchased within

the continental United States, Alaska and Hawaii when connected to an operable
1X (voice/data) or 3G (data) network. Services can only be used where coverage is
available; see coverage map for details.
CALL
9 11
9-1-1 Call Stolen Vehicle Assistance
Remote Door Lock/Unlock Yelp Search

Text
Remote Vehicle Start** Voice Texting
Vehicle Health Reports**

Remote Horn and Lights
Vehicle Health Alert**

Roadside Assistance Call
Theft Alarm Notification Wi-Fi Hotspot***
**If vehicle is properly equipped.

***Extra charges apply.
137
ELECTRONICS
Register (8.4A/8.4AN)
To unlock the full potential of Uconnect Access in your vehicle, you first need to
register with Uconnect Access.
1. Push the ASSIST button on your rearview mirror.
Uconnect 8.4 Registration
2. Press the “Uconnect Care” button on the touchscreen.

3. A helpful Uconnect Care Agent will register your vehicle and handle all of the
details.
Signing up is easy! Simply follow the steps above. Or, press the “Apps ” button on
the touchscreen, then select the Uconnect registration app to “Register By Web” to
complete the process using your device or computer.
For further information please visit www.driveuconnect.com
138
ELECTRONICS
Mobile App (8.4A/8.4AN)

You’re only a few steps away from using remote commands and playing your favorite
music in your vehicle.
To link your internet radio accounts:
1. Download the Uconnect Access App on
your device.
2. Press the Via Mobile icon on the navi-
gation bar at the bottom of the app.
3. Press the app you’d like to connect to
your vehicle.
4. Enter your login information for the
selected app and press Link.
5. Next time you’re in your vehicle, en-
able Bluetooth, pair your device and
select the Via Mobile app you want to
play from the Uconnect touchscreen
to stream your personalized music.
NOTE:
• You can also complete this
process on the web. Simply visit
moparownerconnect.com log in and
click Set Up Via Mobile Profile (under
Quick Links).
• Once you download the app to your Mobile App
compatible device, you will also be
able to start your vehicle and lock/unlock its doors from virtually anywhere.
139
ELECTRONICS
Voice Texting (8.4A/8.4AN)

You must be registered with Uconnect Access and have a compatible MAP – enabled
device to use your voice to send a personalized text message. (Not compatible with
iPhone.)
1. To send a message, push the Phone button . After the beep, say: “Send
message to John Smith.”
2. Listen to the prompt. After the beep, dictate the message you would like to send.
Wait for Uconnect to process your message.
3. The Uconnect system will repeat your message and provide a variety of options to
add to, delete, send or hear the message again. After the beep, tell Uconnect what
you’d like to do. For instance, if you’re happy with your message, after the beep,
say “Send.”
You must be registered with Uconnect Access and have a compatible MAP – enabled
device to use your voice to send a personalized text message. For details about MAP,
visit UconnectPhone.com. Apple iPhone iOS6 or later supports reading incoming
text messages only. To enable this feature on your Apple iPhone, follow these 4
simple steps:
2. Select “Bluetooth.”
3. Select the (i) for the paired vehicle.
4. Turn on “Show Notifications.”
TIP:
• Voice Texting is not compatible with
iPhone, but if your vehicle is equipped
with Siri Eyes Free, you can use your
voice to send a text message.
• Messages are limited to 140 charac-
ters.
• The Messaging button on the touch- iPhone Notification Setting
screen must be illuminated to use the
feature.
140
ELECTRONICS
Yelp (8.4A/8.4AN)
Once registered with Uconnect Access, you can use your voice to search for the most
popular places or things around you.
1. Push the VR button . After the beep, say: Launch YELP.
2. Once the YELP home screen appears on the touchscreen, push the VR button
, then say: YELP search.
3. Listen to the system prompts and after the beep, tell Uconnect the place or
business that you’d like Uconnect to find.
TIP: Once you perform a search, you can reorganize the results by selecting either the
Best Match, Rating or Distance tab on the top of the touchscreen display.
Yelp
141
ELECTRONICS
SiriusXM Travel Link (8.4A/8.4AN — US Market Only)

Need to find a gas station, view local movie listings, check a sports score or the 5 -
day weather forecast? SiriusXM Travel Link is a suite of services that brings a wealth
of information right to your Uconnect 8.4AN system. (Not available for 8.4A system.)
Push the VR button . After the beep, say one of the following commands:
• Show fuel prices
• Show 5 - day weather forecast
• Show extended weather
TIP: Traffic alerts are not accessible with Voice Command.
SiriusXM Travel Link
142
ELECTRONICS
7 days a week)
1-800-387-9983 (French)
Mon. – Fri., 8:00 am – 8:00 pm, ET
Sat., 9:00 am – 5:00 pm, ET
Sun., Closed
Uconnect Access Services Support: 1-855-792-4241. Please have your Uconnect
143
ELECTRONICS
UCONNECT PHONE
Uconnect Phone (Bluetooth Hands Free Calling)
Uconnect 5.0 Phone Menu

1 — Call/Redial/Hold 7 — Uconnect Phone Settings Menu
2 — Mobile Phone Signal Strength 8 — Text Messaging
3 — Currently Paired Mobile Phone 9 — Direct Dial Pad
4 — Mobile Phone Battery Life 10 — Recent Call Log
5 — Mute Microphone 11 — Browse Phone Book
6 — Transfer To/From Uconnect (Contains 911)
System 12 — End Call
144
ELECTRONICS
Uconnect 8.4A/8.4AN Phone Menu

1 — Favorite Contacts 12 — Browse Phone Book Entries
2 — Mobile Phone Battery Life (Contains 9-1-1)
3 — Currently Paired Mobile Phone 13 — End Call
4 — Mobile Phone Signal Strength 14 — Call/Redial/Hold
5 — Mute Microphone 15 — Do Not Disturb
6 — Transfer To/From Uconnect 16 — Reply with Text Message
System * — Conference call feature only
7 — Conference Call* available on GSM mobile devices
8 — Manage Paired Mobile Phones ** — Text messaging feature not
9 — Text Messaging** available on all mobile phones
10 — Direct Dial Pad (requires Bluetooth MAP profile)
11 — Recent Call Log
The Uconnect Phone feature enables you to place and receive hands-free mobile
phone calls. Drivers can also place mobile phone calls using their voice or by using
the buttons on the touchscreen (see Voice Command section).
The hands-free calling feature is made possible through Bluetooth technology — the
global standard that enables different electronic devices to connect to each other
wirelessly.
If the Uconnect Phone Button exists on your steering wheel, you then have the
Uconnect Phone features.
145
ELECTRONICS
Refer to the “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” section of your vehicle's
Owner's Manual on the DVD for further details.
NOTE:
• The Uconnect Phone requires a mobile phone equipped with the Bluetooth
Hands-Free Profile, Version 1.0 or higher.
• Most mobile phones/devices are compatible with the Uconnect system, however
some mobile phones/devices may not be equipped with all of the required features
to utilize all of the Uconnect system features.
• For Uconnect Customer Care:
• U.S. residents visit UconnectPhone.com or call 1-877-855-8400.
• Canadian Residents visit UconnectPhone.com or call, 1-800-465-2001
(English) or 1-800-387-9983 (French).
Pairing (Wirelessly Connecting) Your Mobile Phone To The

Uconnect System
Mobile phone pairing is the process of establishing a wireless connection between a
cellular phone and the Uconnect system.
NOTE:
• To use the Uconnect Phone feature, you first must determine if your mobile
phone and software are compatible with the Uconnect system. Please visit
UconnectPhone.com for complete mobile phone compatibility information.
• Mobile phone pairing is not available while the vehicle is in motion.
• A maximum of 10 mobile phones can be paired to the Uconnect system.
Start Pairing Procedure On The Radio
Uconnect 5.0:
1. Place the ignition in the ACC or ON
position.
2. Press the “Phone” button.
4. Select “Paired Phones.”
5. Select “Add device.”
• Uconnect Phone will display an “In
progress” screen while the system
is connecting.
Uconnect 5.0
146
ELECTRONICS
Uconnect 8.4A, 8.4AN:
1. Place the ignition in the ACC or ON
position.
2. Press the “Phone” button in the Menu
Bar on the touchscreen.
4. Select “Paired Phones.”
5. Select “Add device.”
• Uconnect Phone will display an “In
progress” screen while the system
Uconnect 8.4A & 8.4AN
is connecting.
Pair Your iPhone:
To search for available devices on your
Bluetooth enabled iPhone:
1. Press the Settings button.
2. Select Bluetooth.
• Ensure the Bluetooth feature is en-
abled. Once enabled, the mobile
phone will begin to search for
Bluetooth connections.
3. When your mobile phone finds the
Uconnect system, select “Uconnect”.
Bluetooth On/Uconnect Device
Complete The iPhone Pairing Procedure:

1. When prompted on the mobile phone,
accept the connection request from
Uconnect Phone.
NOTE:
Some mobile phones will require you to
enter the PIN number.
Pairing Request
147
ELECTRONICS
Select The iPhone's Priority Level
When the pairing process has successfully completed, the system will prompt you to
choose whether or not this is your favorite mobile phone. Selecting “Yes” will make
this mobile phone the highest priority. This mobile phone will take precedence over
other paired mobile phones within range and will connect to the Uconnect system
automatically when entering the vehicle. Only one mobile phone and/or one
Bluetooth audio device can be connected to the Uconnect system at a time. If “No”
is selected, simply select “Uconnect” from the mobile phone/audio device Bluetooth
screen, and the Uconnect system will reconnect to the Bluetooth device.
Pair Your Android Device:
To search for available devices on your
Bluetooth enabled Android Device:
1. Push the Menu button.
2. Select Settings.
3. Select Connections.
4. Turn Bluetooth setting to “On.”
• Ensure the Bluetooth feature is en-
abled. Once enabled, the mobile
phone will begin to search for Uconnect Device
Bluetooth connections.
5. Once your mobile phone finds the Uconnect system, select “Uconnect”.
• You may be prompted by your mobile phone to download the phonebook, check
“Do Not Ask Again” to automatically download the phonebook. This is so you
can make calls by saying the name of your contact.
Complete The Android Pairing Procedure:
1. Confirm the passkey shown on the
mobile phone matches the passkey
shown on the Uconnect system then
accept the Bluetooth pairing request.
NOTE:
Some mobile phones require the PIN to
be entered manually, enter the PIN num-
ber shown on the Uconnect screen.
Pairing Request
148
ELECTRONICS
Select The Android Mobile Phone's Priority Level
When the pairing process has successfully completed, the system will prompt you to
choose whether or not this is your favorite mobile phone. Selecting “Yes” will make
this mobile phone the highest priority. This mobile phone will take precedence over
other paired mobile phones within range and will connect to the Uconnect system
automatically when entering the vehicle. Only one mobile phone and/or one
Bluetooth audio device can be connected to the Uconnect system at a time. If “No”
is selected, simply select “Uconnect” from the mobile phone/audio device Bluetooth
screen, and the Uconnect system will reconnect to the Bluetooth device.
You are now ready to make hands-free calls. Press the Uconnect “Phone” button on
your steering wheel to begin.
NOTE:
Refer to UconnectPhone.com website for additional information on mobile phone
pairing and for a list of compatible phones.
Common Phone Commands (Examples)

• “Call John Smith”
• “Call John Smith mobile”
• “Dial 1 248 555 1212”
• “Redial”
Mute (Or Unmute) Microphone During Call

• During a call, press the “Mute” button on the Phone main screen to mute and
unmute the call.
Transfer Ongoing Call Between Handset And Vehicle

• During an on-going call, press the “Transfer” button on the Phone main screen to
transfer an on-going call between handset and vehicle.
Phonebook
The Uconnect system will automatically sync your phonebook from your paired
phone, if this feature is supported by your phone. Phonebook contacts are updated
each time that the phone is connected. If your phone book entries do not appear,
check the settings on your phone. Some phones require you to enable this feature
manually.
• Your phonebook can be browsed on the Uconnect system touchscreen, but editing
can only be done on your phone. To browse, press the “Phone” button on the
touchscreen, then the “Phonebook” button on the touchscreen.
Favorite phonebook entries can be saved as Favorites for quicker access. Favorites
are shown at the top of the main phone screen.
149
ELECTRONICS
Voice Command Tips

• Speaking complete names (i.e; Call John Doe vs. Call John) will result in greater
system accuracy.
• You can “link” commands together for faster results. Say “Call John Doe, mobile,”
for example.
• If you are listening to available voice command options, you do not have to listen
to the entire list. When you hear the command that you need, push the
button on the steering wheel, wait for the beep and say your command.
Changing The Volume

• Start a dialogue by pushing the Phone button , then say a command for
example - "Help".
• Use the radio VOLUME/MUTE rotary knob to adjust the volume to a comfortable
level while the Uconnect system is speaking. Please note the volume setting for
Uconnect is different than the audio system.
NOTE:
To access help, push the Uconnect Phone button on the steering wheel and say
"help." Push the Uconnect Phone Pickup button or the VR button and say
"cancel" to cancel the help session.
Using Do Not Disturb

With Do Not Disturb, you can disable notifications from incoming calls and texts,
allowing you to keep your eyes on the road and hands on the wheel. For your
convenience there is a counter display to keep track of your missed calls and text
messages while you were using Do Not Disturb.
Do Not Disturb can automatically reply with a text message, a call or both, when
declining an incoming call and send it to voicemail.
Automatic reply messages can be:
• “I am driving right now, I will get back to you shortly.”
• Create a custom auto reply message up to 160 characters.
While in Do Not Disturb, Conference Call can be selected so you can still place a
second call without being interrupted by incoming calls.
NOTE:
• Only the beginning of your custom message will be seen on the touchscreen.
• Reply with text message is not compatible with iPhones.
• Auto reply with text message is only available on phones that supporting Bluetooth
MAP.
150
ELECTRONICS
Incoming Text Messages

After pairing your Uconnect system with a Bluetooth enabled mobile device with the
Message Access Profile (MAP), the Uconnect system can announce a new incoming
text message and read it to you over the vehicle’s audio system.
NOTE:
Only incoming text messages received during the current ignition cycle can be
viewed/read.
To enable incoming text messaging:
iPhone
1. Press the settings button on the mobile phone.
2. Select Bluetooth.
• Ensure Bluetooth is enabled, and the mobile phone is paired to the Uconnect
system.
3. Select located under DEVICES next to Uconnect.
4. Turn “Show Notifications” to On.
Enable iPhone Incoming Text Messages
151
ELECTRONICS
Android Devices
1. Push the Menu button on the mobile phone.
2. Select Settings.
3. Select Connections.
4. Turn “Show Notifications” to On.
• A pop up will appear asking you to accept a request for permission to connect
to your messages. Select “Don’t ask again” and press OK.
NOTE:
All incoming text messages received dur-
ing the current ignition cycle will be de-
leted from the Uconnect system when the
ignition is turned to the Off position.
Enable Android Device Incoming Text

Messages
Voice Text Reply (Not Compatible With iPhone)

NOTE:
Voice texting reply and voice texting features require a compatible mobile device
enabled with Bluetooth Message Access Profile (MAP). iPhone, and some other
smartphones, may not entirely support Bluetooth MAP. Visit UconnectPhone.com for
the latest system and device compatibility.
• Due to the extremely large number of mobile phone manufacturers, your mobile
device may not be listed. For further assistance, contact Uconnect Customer
Care @ 1-877-855-8400 for U.S. residents or, 1-800-465-2001 (English) /
1-800-387-9983 (French) for Canadian residents.
Once your Uconnect system is paired with a compatible mobile device, the system
can announce a new incoming text message, and read it to your over the vehicle audio
system. You can reply to the message using Voice Recognition by selecting, or saying,
one of the 18 pre-defined messages.
152
ELECTRONICS
Here’s How:
1. Push the Uconnect Phone button and wait for the beep, then say “reply.”
Uconnect will give the following prompt: “Please say the message you would like
to send.”
2. Wait for the beep and say one of the pre-defined messages. (If you are not sure,
you can say “help”). Uconnect will then read the pre-defined messages allowed.
3. As soon as you hear the message you would like to send, you can interrupt the list
of prompts by pushing the Uconnect phone button and saying the phrase.
Uconnect will confirm the message by reading it back to you.
4. Push the Phone button and say “Send.”
Okay. Where are you? I will be <5, 10,
Call me. Are you there yet? 15,...etc.> minutes late.
I’ll call you later. I need directions. See you in <5, 10,
I’m on my way. 15,...etc.> of minutes.
I’m lost. Thanks.
NOTE:
To make the SMS voice reading function available, the SMS notification option on
phone must be enabled; this option is usually available on the phone, in the
Bluetooth connections menu for a device registered as Uconnect. After enabling this
function on the mobile phone, it must be disconnected and reconnected with the
Uconnect system in order to make it effective.
153
ELECTRONICS
Helpful Tips And Common Questions To Improve Bluetooth

Performance With Your Uconnect System
Mobile Phone won’t reconnect to system after pairing:
• Set mobile phone to auto-connect or trusted device in mobile phone Bluetooth
settings (Blackberry devices).
• Perform a factory reset on your mobile phone. Refer to your mobile phone
manufacturer or cellular provider for instructions.
• Many mobile phones do not automatically reconnect after being restarted (hard
reboot). Your mobile phone can still be connected manually. Close all applications
that may be operating (refer to mobile phone manufacturer’s instructions), and
follow “Pairing (Wirelessly Connecting) Your Mobile Phone To The Uconnect
System”.
Mobile Phone won’t pair to system:
• Perform a hard reset in the mobile phone by removing the battery (if removable —
see your mobile phone’s owner manual).
• Delete pairing history in mobile phone and Uconnect system; usually found in
phone’s Bluetooth connection settings.
• Verify you are selecting “Uconnect” in the discovered Bluetooth devices on your
mobile phone.
• If your vehicle system generates a pin code the default is 0000.
Mobile Phonebook didn’t download:
• Check “Do not ask again,” then accept the “phonebook download” request on
your mobile phone.
• Up to 5,000 contact names with four numbers per contact will transfer to the
Uconnect 8.4A/8.4AN system phonebook.
• Up to 2,000 contact names with six numbers per contact will transfer to the
Uconnect 5.0 system phonebook.
Text messaging won’t work:
• Check “Do not ask again,” then accept the “connect to your messages” request on
your mobile phone.
• Verify that your mobile phone has the Bluetooth feature (Message Access Profile).
Can’t make a conference call:
• CDMA (Code-Division Multiple Access) carriers do not support conference calling.
Refer to your mobile phone user’s manual for further information.
Making calls while connected to AUX:
• Plugging in your mobile phone to AUX while connected to Bluetooth will disable
Hands-Free Calling. Do not make calls while your mobile phone is plugged into the
AUX jack.
154
ELECTRONICS
STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS

The steering wheel audio controls are
located on the rear surface of the steering
wheel.
Right Switch
• Push the switch up or down to increase
or decrease the volume.
• Push the button in the center to change
modes AM/FM/CD/SXM.
Left Switch
Steering Wheel Audio Controls
• Push the switch up or down to search
for the next listenable station.
• Push the button in the center to select the next preset station.
ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER (EVIC) OR DRIVER

INFORMATION DISPLAY (DID)
The EVIC/DID features an interactive display that is located in the instrument cluster.
Pushing the controls on the left side of the steering wheel allows the driver to select
vehicle information and Personal Settings. Refer to “EVIC/DID Programmable
Features” in this section for further information.
• Push and release the UP arrow
button to scroll upward through the main
menus and submenus (Digital Speedom-
eter, Vehicle Info, Fuel Economy Info,
Trip A, Trip B, Stop/Start, Trailer Tow,
Audio, Stored Messages, Screen Setup,
Vehicle Settings).
• Push and release the DOWN arrow
button to scroll downward through the
main menus and submenus.
• Push and release the RIGHT arrow
button for access to main menus, sub-
menus or to select a personal setting in
the setup menu. Push and hold the EVIC/DID Controls
RIGHT arrow button for two seconds
to reset features.
• Push and release the LEFT arrow button to scroll back to a previous menu or
submenu.
155
ELECTRONICS
Compass Calibration
This compass is self-calibrating, which eliminates the need to set the compass
manually. When the vehicle is new, the compass may appear erratic, and the
EVIC/DID will display “CAL” until the compass is calibrated.
You may also calibrate the compass by completing one or more 360 degree turns (in
an area free from large metal or metallic objects) until the “CAL” message displayed
in the EVIC/DID turns off. The compass will now function normally.
PROGRAMMABLE FEATURES
EVIC/DID Programmable Features
The EVIC/DID can be used to view or change the following settings. Push the UP
or DOWN arrow button until System Setup displays, then push the RIGHT arrow
button. Scroll through the settings using the UP or DOWN arrow button. Push
the RIGHT arrow button to change the setting. Push the LEFT arrow button to
scroll back to a previous menu or sub menu.
• Language Select • Remote Start Comfort System
• Units • Easy Exit Seat
• ParkSense • Key-Off Power Delay
• Tilt Mirror In Reverse • Commercial Settings
• Rain Sensing Wipers • Air Suspension Display Alerts
• Hill Start Assist • Aero Ride Height Mode
• Headlights Off Delay • Tire/Jack Mode
• Illuminated Approach • Transport Mode
• Headlights On With Wipers • Wheel Alignment Mode
• Automatic Highbeams • Horn With Remote Lower
• Flash Lights With Lock • Lights With Remote Lower
• Auto Lock Doors • Trailer Select
• Auto Unlock Doors • Brake Type
• Sound Horn With Remote Start • Trailer Name
• Sound Horn With Remote Lock • Compass Variance
• Remote Unlock Sequence • Calibrate Compass
• Key Fob Linked To Me • Fuel Saver Display
• Passive Entry • Park Assist Front Chime Volume
• Park Assist Rear Chime Volume
156
ELECTRONICS
Uconnect Customer Programmable Features

The Uconnect system allows you to access Customer Programmable feature settings
such as Display, Voice, Clock, Safety & Driving Assistance, Lights, Doors & Locks,
Auto-On Comfort, Engine Off Options, Compass Settings (Uconnect 5.0,) Trailer
Brake, Suspension, Audio, Phone/Bluetooth, SiriusXM Setup, Restore Settings,
Clear Personal Data, and System Information through buttons on the touchscreen.
• Push the SETTINGS button (Uconnect 5.0), or press the “Apps” button
(Uconnect 8.4) located near the bottom of the touchscreen, then press the
“Settings” button on the touchscreen to access the Settings screen. When making
a selection, scroll up or down until the preferred setting is highlighted, then press
the preferred setting until a check-mark appears next to the setting, showing that
setting has been selected. The following feature settings are available:
• Display • Suspension
• Voice • Audio
• Clock • Phone/Bluetooth
• Safety & Driving Assistance • SiriusXM Setup
• Lights • Restore Settings
• Doors & Locks • Clear Personal Data
• Auto-On Comfort • System Information
• Engine Off Options • Compass Settings (Uconnect 5.0)
• Trailer Brake
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicles options, feature settings may vary.
Refer to “Uconnect Settings/Customer Programmable Features” found within “Un-
derstanding Your Instrument Panel” located in your Owner's Manual on the DVD for
Instrument Cluster Reconfigurable Screen Setup

The following settings allow you to change what information is displayed in the
instrument cluster as well as the location that information is displayed.
Digital Speedometer
• Push the UP or DOWN arrow button until the Digital display icon is
highlighted in the EVIC/DID. Push the RIGHT arrow button to change the
display between km/h and mph.
157
ELECTRONICS
Vehicle Info (Customer Information Features)
• Push the UP or DOWN arrow button until the Vehicle Info icon is
highlighted in the EVIC/DID Display. Push the RIGHT or LEFT arrow button
to scroll through the following Vehicle Info submenus:
• Tire Pressure Monitor System
• Air Suspension — If Equipped
• Coolant Temperature (Diesel Only)
• Transmission Temperature (Automatic Transmission Only)
• Oil Temperature
• Oil Pressure
• Oil Life
• Fuel Filter Life (Diesel Only)
• Battery Voltage
• Exhaust Brake (Diesel Only)
• Turbo Boost (Diesel Only)
• Gauge Summary
• Engine Hours
Trip A
• Push the UP or DOWN arrow button until the Trip A icon is highlighted in
the EVIC/DID. Push and hold the RIGHT arrow button to reset the Trip A
information.
Trip B
• Push the UP or DOWN arrow button until the Trip B icon is highlighted in
the EVIC/DID. Push and hold the RIGHT arrow button to reset the Trip B
information.
Fuel Economy
• Push the UP or DOWN arrow button until the Fuel Economy icon is
highlighted. The screen will display the following:
• Average Fuel Economy/Miles Per Gallon
• Range To Empty (RTE)
• Current Miles Per Gallon (MPG)
• Dual Tanks- If Equipped (Heavy Duty Only)
Stop/Start
• Push the UP or DOWN arrow button until the Stop/Start icon is highlighted
in the EVIC/DID. Push the RIGHT arrow button to display the Stop/Start status.
Trailer Tow
• Push the UP or DOWN arrow button until the Trailer Tow icon is
highlighted. The screen will display the following information:
• Trailer Trip Distance
158
ELECTRONICS
Audio
• Push the UP or DOWN arrow button until the Audio display icon is
highlighted in the EVIC/DID. This screen will display the current media source.
Screen Setup
• Push the UP or DOWN arrow button until the Screen Setup display icon is
highlighted in the EVIC/DID. Push the RIGHT arrow button to enter the Screen
Setup sub-menu. The Screen Setup feature allows you to change what information
is displayed in the instrument cluster as well as the location that information is
displayed.
UNIVERSAL GARAGE DOOR OPENER (HomeLink)

HomeLink replaces up to three hand-held transmitters that operate devices such as
garage door openers, motorized gates, lighting or home security systems. The
HomeLink unit is powered by your vehicles 12 Volt battery.
The HomeLink buttons that are located in the overhead console or sunvisor designate
the three different HomeLink channels.
The HomeLink indicator is located above the center button.
Before You Begin Programming

HomeLink
Ensure that your vehicle is parked out-
side of the garage before you begin pro-
gramming.
For efficient programming and accurate
transmission of the radio-frequency sig-
nal, it is recommended that a new battery
be placed in the hand-held transmitter of
the device that is being programmed to
the HomeLink system.
To erase the channels, place the ignition
switch into the ON/RUN position, then Universal Garage Door Opener (HomeLink)
push and hold the two outside HomeLink Buttons
buttons (I and III) for up to 20 seconds or
until the red indicator flashes.
NOTE:
Erasing all channels should only be performed when programming HomeLink for the
first time. Do not erase channels when programming additional buttons.
If you have any problems, or require assistance, please call toll-free 1-800-355-3515
or, on the Internet at HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
159
ELECTRONICS
Programming A Rolling Code

NOTE:
For programming Garage Door Openers that were manufactured after 1995. These
Garage Door Openers can be identified by the “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button located
where the hanging antenna is attached to the Garage Door Opener. It is NOT the
button that is normally used to open and close the door. The name and color of the
button may vary by manufacturer.
1. Place the ignition switch into the ON/RUN position.
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inch (3 to 8 cm) away from the HomeLink
button you wish to program while keeping the HomeLink indicator light in view.
3. Simultaneously press and hold both the Homelink button you want to program
and the hand-held transmitter button.
4. Continue to hold the buttons until the EVIC/DID display changes from “CHANNEL
# TRAINING” to “CHANNEL # TRAINED”, then release both buttons.
NOTE:
If the EVIC/DID displays “DID NOT TRAIN” repeat from Step 2.
5. At the garage door opener motor (in the garage), locate the “LEARN” or
“TRAINING” button. This can usually be found where the hanging antenna wire
is attached to the garage door opener motor. Firmly press and release the
“LEARN” or “TRAINING” button.
NOTE:
You have 30 seconds in which to initiate the next step after the LEARN button has
been pressed.
6. Return to the vehicle and press the programmed HomeLink button twice (holding
the button for two seconds each time). The EVIC/DID will display “CHANNEL #
TRANSMIT”. If the garage door opener/device activates, programming is com-
plete.
NOTE:
If the device does not activate, press the button a third time (for two seconds) to
complete the training.
7. To program the remaining two HomeLink buttons, repeat each step for each
remaining button. DO NOT erase the channels.
160
ELECTRONICS
Programming A Non-Rolling Code

NOTE:
For programming Garage Door Openers manufactured before 1995.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position.
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inch (3 to 8 cm) away from the HomeLink
button you wish to program while keeping the HomeLink indicator light in view.
3. Simultaneously press and hold both the HomeLink button you want to program
and the hand-held transmitter button.
4. Continue to hold both buttons until the EVIC/DID display changes from “CHANNEL
# TRAINING” to “CHANNEL # TRAINED”, then release both buttons.
5. Press and hold the programmed HomeLink button and observe the indicator light.
NOTE:
If the EVIC/DID displays “DID NOT TRAIN” repeat from Step 2.
• To program the two remaining HomeLink buttons, repeat each step for each
remaining button. DO NOT erase the channels.
Using HomeLink
To operate, push and release the programmed HomeLink button. Activation will now
occur for the programmed device (i.e., garage door opener, gate operator, security
system, entry door lock, home/office lighting, etc.,). The hand-held transmitter of the
device may also be used at any time.
WARNING!
• Your motorized door or gate will open and close while you are programming the
universal transceiver. Do not program the transceiver if people or pets are in the
path of the door or gate.
• Do not run your vehicle in a closed garage or confined area while programming
the transceiver. Exhaust gas from your vehicle contains Carbon Monoxide (CO)
which is odorless and colorless. Carbon Monoxide is poisonous when inhaled
and can cause you and others to be severely injured or killed.
161
ELECTRONICS
POWER INVERTER
A 115 Volt, 150 Watt power inverter
outlet is located on the lower instrument
panel next to the climate control knob.
This outlet can power cellular phones,
electronics and other low power devices
requiring power up to 150 Watts.
To turn on the power outlet, simply plug
in the device. The outlet automatically
turns off when the device is unplugged.
NOTE:
The power inverter is designed with
built-in overload protection. If the power
rating of 150 Watts is exceeded, the
power inverter will automatically shut Power Inverter
down. Once the electrical device has
been removed from the outlet, the inverter should automatically reset.
WARNING!
To Avoid Serious Injury or Death DO NOT:
• insert any objects into the receptacles
• touch with wet hands
Close the lid when not in use. If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an electric
shock and failure.
162
ELECTRONICS
POWER OUTLETS
The auxiliary 12 Volt (13 Amp) power outlets can provide power for in-cab accesso-
ries designed for use with the standard “cigar lighter” plug. The 12 Volt power outlets
have a cap attached to the outlet indicating “12V DC”, together with either a key
symbol or a battery symbol.
The auxiliary power outlets can be found in the following locations:
• Lower left and lower right in the center of the instrument panel – if equipped with
a column or a eight-speed electronic shifter.
• Inside the top storage tray.
Power Outlet — Center Console
• Rear of the center console storage compartment.
Power Outlet — Rear Console
163
ELECTRONICS
• Inside the upper lid of the center storage compartment.
NOTE:
• Do not exceed the maximum power of
160 Watts (13 Amps) at 12 Volts. If
the 160 Watt (13 Amp) power rating is
exceeded, the fuse protecting the sys-
tem will need to be replaced.
• Power outlets are designed for acces-
sory plugs only. Do not insert any other
object in the power outlet as this will
damage the outlet and blow the fuse.
Improper use of the power outlet can Power Outlet (USB Charge Only Port) —
Storage Compartment
cause damage not covered by your new
vehicle warranty.
• The rear center console power outlet can be switched to “battery” powered all the
time by switching the power outlet rear center console fuse in the fuse panel.
Power Outlet Fuse Locations

1 — F90 – F91 Fuse 20A Yellow Power Outlet Rear Center Console
2 — F104 Fuse 20A Yellow Power Outlet Center Console
3 — F93 Fuse 20A Yellow Cigar Lighter Instrument Panel
164
ELECTRONICS
AUXILIARY SWITCHES — IF EQUIPPED

There can be up to five auxiliary switches located in the lower switch bank of the
instrument panel which can be used to power various electronic devices and PTO
(Power Take Off) – If Equipped. If Power Take Off is equipped, it will take the place
of the fifth Auxiliary switch. Connections to the switches are found under the hood in
the connectors attached to the auxiliary Power Distribution Center.
You have the ability to configure the functionality of the auxiliary switches via the
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) or Driver Information Display (DID). All
switches can now be configured for setting the switch type operation to latching or
momentary, power source of either battery or ignition, and ability to hold last state
across key cycles.
NOTE:
Holding last state conditions are met when switch type is set to latching and power
source is set to ignition.
For further information on using the auxiliary switches, please refer to the Ram Body
Builders Guide by accessing www.rambodybuilder.com and choosing the appropriate
links.
165
OFF-ROAD CAPABILITIES
ELECTRONICALLY SHIFTED FOUR WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION

The four position electronically shifted transfer case provides four mode positions:
• Two-wheel drive high range (2WD)
• Four-wheel drive high range (4WD LOCK)
• Four-wheel drive low range (4WD LOW)
• NEUTRAL (N)
This transfer case is intended to be
driven in the 2WD position for normal
street and highway conditions, such as
dry, hard-surfaced roads.
When additional traction is required, the
4WD LOCK and 4WD LOW positions can
be used to lock the front and rear drive-
shafts together.
When operating your vehicle in 4WD
LOW, do not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h).
Shifting Procedure
Shifting between 2WD and 4WD LOCK
can be made with the vehicle stopped or
in motion at speeds up to 55 mph
(88 km/h).
Shifting between 2WD or 4WD LOCK into Four-Position/Part Time Transfer Case
4WD LOW must be made with the trans-
1 — Neutral Button
mission in NEUTRAL and the vehicle
2 — Rotary 2WD/4WD Control Knob
stopped or rolling at 2 to 3 mph (3 to
5 km/h).
NOTE:
It is preferred to have the engine running and the vehicle moving at 2 to 3 mph (3 to
5 km/h).
WARNING!
You or others could be injured if you leave the vehicle unattended with the transfer
case in the NEUTRAL position without first fully engaging the parking brake. The
transfer case NEUTRAL position disengages both the front and rear driveshafts
from the powertrain and will allow the vehicle to move regardless of the transmis-
sion position. The parking brake should always be applied when the driver is not
in the vehicle.
166
These five position electronically shifted
transfer cases provide five mode posi-
tions:
• Two-wheel drive high range (2WD)
• Four-wheel drive automatic range
(4WD AUTO)
• Four-wheel drive lock range (4WD
LOCK)
• Four-wheel drive low range (4WD
LOW)
• NEUTRAL (N)
These electronically shifted transfer
cases are designed to be driven in the
two-wheel drive position (2WD) or four-
wheel drive position (4WD AUTO) for nor-
mal street and highway conditions on dry,
hard-surfaced roads. Five-Position/On-Demand Transfer Case
Driving the vehicle in 2WD will have 1 — Neutral Button

greater fuel economy benefits as the front 2 — Rotary 2WD/4WD Control Knob
axle is not engaged in 2WD.
Five-Position/On-Demand Transfer Case —

Eight Speed Transmission Only
167
Shifting Procedure
Shifting between 2WD and 4WD AUTO or 4WD LOCK can be made with the vehicle
stopped or in motion at speeds up to 55 mph (88 km/h).
Shifting between 2WD, 4WD AUTO and 4WD LOCK into 4WD LOW must be made
with the transmission in NEUTRAL and the vehicle stopped or rolling at 2 to 3 mph
(3 to 5 km/h).
NOTE:
It is preferred to have the engine running and the vehicle moving at 2 to 3 mph (3 to
5 km/h).
WARNING!
You or others could be injured if you leave the vehicle unattended with the transfer
case in the NEUTRAL position without first fully engaging the parking brake. The
transfer case NEUTRAL position disengages both the front and rear driveshafts
from the powertrain and will allow the vehicle to move regardless of the transmis-
sion position. The parking brake should always be applied when the driver is not
in the vehicle.
168
UTILITY
TONNEAU COVER
The Tonneau Cover can be removed and reinstalled by using the locking clamps
located underneath the Tonneau Cover.
NOTE:
Be sure that the Tonneau Cover is secured before driving.
EASY-OFF TAILGATE
To simplify mounting of a camper unit with an overhang, the tailgate can be removed.
NOTE:
If your vehicle is equipped with a rear camera or RKE the electrical connector must
be disconnected prior to removing the tailgate.
Removing The Tailgate

1. Disconnect the wiring harness for the rear camera or RKE (if equipped).
2. Unlatch the tailgate and remove the support cables by releasing the lock tang
from the pivot.
3. Raise the right side of the tailgate until the right side pivot clears the hanger
bracket.
4. Slide the entire tailgate to the right to free the left side pivot.
5. Remove the tailgate from the vehicle.
NOTE:
Do not carry the tailgate loose in the truck pickup box.
Locking Tailgate
The lock is located next to the tailgate handle. The tailgate can be locked using the
vehicle key.
WARNING!
To avoid inhaling carbon monoxide, which is deadly, the exhaust system on
vehicles equipped with “Cap or Slide-In Campers” should extend beyond the
overhanging camper compartment and be free of leaks.
169
UTILITY
PICKUP BOX
The pickup box has many features designed for utility and convenience.
NOTE:
If you are installing a Toolbox, Ladder Rack or Headache Rack at the front of the
Pickup Box, you must use Mopar Box Reinforcement Brackets that are available from
your authorized dealer.
You can carry wide building materials (sheets of plywood, etc.) by building a raised
load floor. Place lumber across the box in the indentations provided above the wheel
housings and in the bulkhead dividers to form the floor.
WARNING!
• The pickup box is intended for load carrying purposes only, not for passengers,
who should sit in seats and use seat belts.
• Care should always be exercised when operating a vehicle with unrestrained
cargo. Vehicle speeds may need to be reduced. Severe turns or rough roads may
cause shifting or bouncing of the cargo that may result in vehicle damage. If
wide building materials are to be frequently carried, the installation of a
support is recommended. This will restrain the cargo and transfer the load to
the pickup box floor.
• If you wish to carry more than 600 lbs (272 kg) of material suspended above
the wheelhouse, supports must be installed to transfer the weight of the load
to the pickup box floor or vehicle damage may result. The use of proper
supports will permit loading up to the rated payload.
• Unrestrained cargo may be thrown forward in an accident causing serious or
fatal injury.
There are stampings in the sheet metal on the inner side bulkheads of the box in front
of and behind both wheel housings. Place wooden boards across the box from side to
side to create separate load compartments in the pickup box.
There are four tie-down cleats bolted to the lower sides of the pickup box that can
sustain loads up to 1000 lbs (450 kg) total.
Cargo Camera — If Equipped

Your vehicle may be equipped with the Cargo Camera that allows you to see an image
of the inside of the pickup box. The image will be displayed in the Uconnect screen.
A display timer is initiated when the cargo camera image is displayed. The image will
continue to be displayed until the display timer exceeds 10 seconds and the vehicle
speed is above 8 mph (13 km/h) or the touchscreen button "X" to disable display of
the Cargo Camera image is pressed.
170
UTILITY
NOTE:
If the vehicle speed remains below 8 mph (13 km/h), the cargo camera image will be
displayed continuously until the touchscreen button "X" to disable display of the
Cargo Camera image is pressed.
The Cargo Camera is located in the bottom center area of the center high-mounted
stoplamp (CHMSL).
A touchscreen button to indicate the current active Camera image being
displayed is made available whenever the Cargo camera image is displayed.
Also, a touchscreen button to switch the display to Rear View camera image
is made available whenever the Cargo camera image is displayed.
A touchscreen button "X" to disable display of the camera image is made available
when the vehicle is not in REVERSE gear.
NOTE:
If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance builds up on the camera lens, clean the
lens, rinse with water, and dry with a soft cloth. Do not cover the lens.
Turning Cargo Camera On Or Off — With Uconnect 8.4A/8.4AN

1. Press the “Controls” button located on the bottom of the Uconnect display.
2. Press the “Cargo Camera” button to turn the Cargo Camera system ON.
NOTE:
Once initiated by the "Cargo Camera" button, the Cargo Camera image may be
deactivated by pressing the "X" soft button. On deactivation, the previous selected
screen will appear.
Cargo Camera Display
171
UTILITY
RAMBOX
RamBox Features
1 — Bed Extender
2 — Bed Rail Tie-Down System Adjustable Cleats
3 — Storage Bin
4 — Push The Button To Open
The RamBox system is an integrated pickup box storage and cargo management
system consisting of three features:
• Integrated box side storage bins
• Cargo extender/divider
• Bed rail tie-down system
172
UTILITY
RamBox Integrated Box Side Storage Bins

The cargo storage bins provide watertight, lockable, illuminated storage for up to
150 lbs (68 kg) of evenly distributed cargo.
• To open a storage bin, push and release the button located on the lid.
• The interior of the RamBox will automatically illuminate when the lid is opened.
Pushing the switch once will turn off the bin lights, pushing the switch again will
turn the lights back on.
• Storage bins feature two removable drain plugs (to allow water to drain from bins).
To remove plug, pull up on the edge. To install, push plug downward into drain
hole.
The RamBox storage bins can be locked and unlocked using the vehicle key or the
remote keyless entry transmitter.
NOTE:
Provisions are provided in the bins for cargo dividers and shelf supports. These
accessories (in addition to other RamBox accessories) are available from MOPAR.
RamBox Storage Bin Cover Emergency Release Lever

As a security measure, a Storage Bin Cover Emergency Release is built into the
storage bin cover latching mechanism.
NOTE:
In the event of an individual being locked inside the storage bin, the storage bin cover
can be opened from inside of the bin by pulling on the glow-in-the-dark lever
attached to the storage bin cover latching mechanism.
Bed Extender
The bed extender has three functional positions:
• Storage Position
• Divider Position
• Extender Position
Storage Position
The storage position for the bed extender is at the front of the truck bed.
To install the bed extender into the storage position, perform the following:
1. Make sure the center handle is unlocked using the vehicle key and rotate the
center handle vertically to release the extender side gates.
2. With the side gates open, position the extender fully forward in the bed against the
front panel.
3. Rotate the side gates closed allowing the outboard ends to be positioned in front
of the cargo tie-down loops.
173
UTILITY
4. Rotate the center handle horizontally to secure the side gates in the closed
position.
5. Lock the center handle using the vehicle key to secure the panel into place and
assist against theft.
Divider Position
There are 11 divider slots along the bed inner panels which allow for various positions
to assist in managing your cargo.
To install the bed extender into a divider position perform the following:
1. Make sure the center handle is unlocked using the vehicle key and rotate the
center handle vertically to release the extender side gates.
2. With the side gates open, position the extender so the outboard ends align with
the intended slots in the sides of the bed.
3. Rotate the side gates closed so that the outboard ends are secured into the
intended slots of the bed.
4. Rotate the center handle horizontally to secure the side gates in the closed
position.
5. Lock the center handle to secure the panel into place and assist against theft.
Extender Position
The bed extender will add an additional 15 in (38 cm) in the back of the truck when
additional cargo room is needed.
To install the bed extender into the extender position, perform the following:
1. Lower the tailgate.
2. Make sure the center handle is unlocked and rotate the center handle vertically in
order to release the extender side gates.
3. Fit the end of the side gate ends onto the pin and handle.
4. Rotate the handles to the horizontal position to secure into place.
Bed Rail Tie-Down System

There are two adjustable cleats on each side of the bed that can be used to assist in
securing cargo.
Each cleat must be located and tightened down in one of the detents, along either
rail, in order to keep cargo properly secure.
• To move the cleat to any position on the rail, turn the nut counterclockwise,
approximately three turns. Then, pull out on the cleat and slide it to the detent
nearest the desired location. Make sure the cleat is seated in the detent and
tighten the nut.
174
UTILITY
• To remove the cleats from the utility rail, remove the end cap by pushing up on the
locking tab, located on the bottom of the end cap. Slide the cleat off the end of the rail.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow the following items could cause damage to the vehicle:
• Assure that all cargo inside the storage bins is properly secured.
• Do not exceed cargo weight rating of 150 lb (68 kg) per bin.
• Leaving the lid open for extended periods of time could cause the vehicle
battery to discharge. If the lid is required to stay open for extended periods of
time, it is recommended that the bin lights be turned off manually using the
on/off switch.
• Ensure cargo bin lids are closed and latched before moving or driving vehicle.
• Loads applied to the top of the bin lid should be minimized to prevent damage
to the lid and latching/hinging mechanisms.
• Damage to the RamBox bin may occur due to heavy/sharp objects placed in bin
that shift due to vehicle motion. In order to minimize potential for damage,
secure all cargo to prevent movement and protect inside surfaces of bin from
heavy/sharp objects with appropriate padding.
• The maximum load per cleat should not exceed 250 lbs (113 kg) and the angle
of the load on each cleat should not exceed 60 degrees above horizontal, or
damage to the cleat or cleat rail may occur.
• Do not use a storage bin latch as a tie down.
• To reduce the risk of potential injury or property damage:
• Cargo must be secured.
• Do not exceed cargo load rating of your vehicle.
• Secure all loads to truck utilizing cargo tie-downs.
• Extender should not be used as cargo tie-down.
• When vehicle is in motion do not exceed 150 lbs (68 kg) load on the
tailgate.
• The bed extender is not intended for off road use.
• When not in use, the extender/divider should be in stowed or divider po-
sition with the tailgate closed.
• When in use, all handles are to be in the locked position.
WARNING!
• Always close the storage bin covers when your vehicle is unattended or in
motion.
• Do not allow children to have access to the storage bins. Once in the storage
bin, young children may not be able to escape. If trapped in the storage bin,
children can die from suffocation or heat stroke.
• In a collision, serious injury could result if the storage bin covers are not
properly latched.
175
UTILITY
TOWING & PAYLOAD

NOTE:
For additional trailer towing information (maximum trailer weight ratings) refer to the
following website addresses:
• ramtrucks.com/en/towing_guide/
• ramtruck.ca (Canada)
• rambodybuilder.com
TOW/HAUL MODE
When driving in hilly areas, towing a trailer, carrying a heavy load, etc., and frequent
transmission shifting occurs, push the TOW/HAUL switch to select TOW/HAUL
mode. This will improve performance and reduce the potential for transmission
overheating or failure due to excessive shifting. When operating in TOW/HAUL mode,
transmission upshifts are delayed, and the transmission will automatically downshift
(for engine braking) during steady braking maneuvers.
The “TOW/HAUL Indicator Light” will il-
luminate in the instrument cluster to in-
dicate that TOW/HAUL mode has been
activated. Pushing the switch a second
time restores normal operation. If the
TOW/HAUL mode is desired, the switch
must be pushed each time the engine is
started.
TOW/HAUL Switch
176
UTILITY
INTEGRATED TRAILER BRAKE MODULE

The Integrated Trailer Brake Controller allows you to automatically or manually
activate the Electric Trailer Brakes and Electric Over Hydraulic Trailer Brakes for a
better braking performance when towing a trailer.
NOTE:
The Integrated Trailer Brake Controller is located in the center stack below the
climate controls.
This module will have four different options depending on the type of trailer you want
to tow and can be selected through the 3.5” Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC) or touchscreen radio.
• Light Electric
• Heavy Electric
• Light EOH (Electric Over Hydraulic)
• Heavy EOH (Electric Over Hydraulic)
Setting With The Uconnect Touchscreen Radio
To make the proper selection in the Uconnect touchscreen radio, push the More
button on the faceplate (Uconnect 5.0) or press the “Apps” button on the touch-
screen (Uconnect 8.4), then press the “Settings” button on the touchscreen to
display the menu setting screen and press “Trailer Brake”. For additional informa-
tion, refer to your Owner’s Manual on the DVD.
Setting With 3.5” EVIC
1. Push the RIGHT arrow on the steering wheel to enter “VEHICLE SETTINGS”.
2. Push the UP or DOWN buttons until Trailer Brake Type appears on the screen.
3. Push the RIGHT arrow and then push the UP or DOWN buttons until the proper
Trailer Brake Type appears on the screen. For additional information, refer to your
Owner’s Manual on the DVD.
177
UTILITY
GAIN Adjustment Buttons (+/-)

Pushing the +/- buttons, located on the left side of the module, will increase/
decrease the brake control power output to the trailer brakes in 0.5 increments. The
GAIN setting can be increased to a maximum of 10 or decreased to a minimum of 0
(no trailer braking).
Refer to your Owner's Manual on the DVD
for further details.
Adjustment Buttons
1 — Decrease (-)
2 — Increase (+)
WARNING!
Connecting a trailer that is not compatible with the ITBM system may result in
reduced or complete loss of trailer braking. There may be a increase in stopping
distance or trailer instability which could result in personal injury.
178
UTILITY
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME, ETC.)

Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle
Towing Condition Wheels OFF Two-Wheel Four-Wheel Drive Models
The Ground Drive
Models
See Instructions
• Automatic transmission in PARK
NOT • Manual transmission in gear
Flat Tow NONE
ALLOWED (NOT in NEUTRAL)
• Transfer case in NEUTRAL (N)
• Tow in forward direction
Front NOT NOT ALLOWED
Dolly Tow ALLOWED
Rear OK NOT ALLOWED
On Trailer ALL OK OK
NOTE:
• When recreational towing your vehicle, always follow applicable state and provin-
cial laws. Contact state and provincial Highway Safety offices for additional
details.
• Vehicles equipped with air suspension must be placed in Transport mode before
tying them down (from the body) on a trailer or flatbed truck. Refer to “Air
Suspension – If Equipped” for more information. If the vehicle cannot be placed
in Transport mode (for example, engine will not run), tie-downs must be fastened
to the axles (not to the body). Failure to follow these instructions may cause fault
codes to be set and/or cause loss of proper tie-down tension.
179
UTILITY
Recreational Towing — Two-Wheel Drive Models

DO NOT flat tow this vehicle. Damage to the drivetrain will result.
Recreational towing (for two-wheel drive models) is allowed ONLY if the rear wheels
are OFF the ground. This may be accomplished using a tow dolly or vehicle trailer. If
using a tow dolly, follow this procedure:
NOTE:
If vehicle is equipped with air suspension, ensure the vehicle is set to Normal Ride
Height.
1. Properly secure the dolly to the tow vehicle, following the dolly manufacturer's
instructions.
2. Drive the rear wheels onto the tow dolly.
3. Firmly apply the parking brake. Place automatic transmission in PARK, manual
transmission in gear (not in NEUTRAL).
4. Properly secure the rear wheels to the dolly, following the dolly manufacturer's
instructions.
5. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position and remove the Key Fob.
6. Install a suitable clamping device, designed for towing, to secure the front wheels
in the straight position.
CAUTION!
• Towing with the rear wheels on the ground will cause severe transmission
damage. Damage from improper towing is not covered under the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
• Do not disconnect the driveshaft because fluid may leak from the transmission,
causing damage to internal parts.
180
UTILITY
Recreational Towing — Four-Wheel Drive Models

NOTE:
Both the manual shift and electronic shift transfer cases must be shifted into
NEUTRAL (N) for recreational towing. Automatic transmissions must be shifted into
PARK for recreational towing. Manual transmissions must be placed in gear (NOT in
NEUTRAL) for recreational towing. Refer to the following for the proper transfer case
NEUTRAL (N) shifting procedure for your vehicle.
CAUTION!
• Front or rear wheel lifts should not be used while recreational towing. Towing
with only one set of wheels on the ground (front or rear) will cause severe
damage to the transmission and or transfer case. Tow with all four wheels either
ON the ground, or OFF the ground (using a vehicle trailer). Damage from
improper towing is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
• Do not disconnect the driveshaft because fluid may leak from the transmission,
causing damage to internal parts.
• Front or rear wheel lifts should not be used. Internal damage to the transmis-
sion or transfer case will occur if a front or rear wheel lift is used when
recreational towing.
• Tow only in the forward direction. Towing this vehicle backwards can cause
severe damage to the transfer case.
• Before recreational towing, the transfer case must be in NEUTRAL. To be
certain the transfer case is fully in NEUTRAL, perform the procedure outlined
under “Shifting Into NEUTRAL”. Internal transmission damage will result, if
the transfer case is not in NEUTRAL during towing.
• Manual transmissions must be placed in gear (not in Neutral) for recreational
towing.
• Before recreational towing, perform the procedure outlined under “Shifting
Into NEUTRAL” to be certain that the transfer case is fully in NEUTRAL.
Otherwise, internal damage will result.
• Towing this vehicle in violation of the above requirements can cause severe
transmission and/or transfer case damage. Damage from improper towing is
not covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
• Do not disconnect the rear driveshaft because fluid will leak from the transfer
case, causing damage to internal parts.
• Do not use a bumper-mounted clamp-on tow bar on your vehicle. The bumper
face bar will be damaged.
181
UTILITY
Shifting Into NEUTRAL (N)
Use the following procedure to prepare your vehicle for recreational towing.
WARNING!
You or others could be injured or killed if you leave the vehicle unattended with the
transfer case in the NEUTRAL (N) position without first fully engaging the parking
brake. The transfer case NEUTRAL (N) position disengages both the front and rear
drive shaft from the powertrain, and will allow the vehicle to roll, even if the
automatic transmission is in PARK (or manual transmission is in gear). The
parking brake should always be applied when the driver is not in the vehicle.
CAUTION!
It is necessary to follow these steps to be certain that the transfer case is fully in
NEUTRAL (N) before recreational towing to prevent damage to internal parts.
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop, with the engine running. Firmly apply the
parking brake.
2. Shift the transmission to NEUTRAL.
NOTE:
If vehicle is equipped with air suspension, ensure the vehicle is set to Normal Ride
Height.
3. Press and hold the brake pedal.
4. Depress the clutch pedal on a manual transmission.
5. With manual shift transfer case, shift the transfer case lever into NEUTRAL (N).
• With electronic shift transfer case, push and hold the transfer case NEUTRAL
(N) button. Some models have a small, recessed “N” button (at the center of
the transfer case switches) that must be pushed using a ballpoint pen or similar
object. Other models have a rectangular NEUTRAL switch, below the rotary
transfer case control knob. The NEUTRAL (N) indicator light will blink while
the shift is in progress. The light will stop blinking (stay on solid) when the shift
to NEUTRAL (N) is complete. After the shift is completed and the NEUTRAL
(N) light stays on, release the NEUTRAL (N) button.
6. Release the parking brake.
7. Shift the transmission into REVERSE.
8. Release the brake pedal (and clutch pedal on manual transmissions) for five
seconds and ensure that there is no vehicle movement.
9. Repeat steps 7 and 8 with automatic transmission in DRIVE or manual transmis-
sion in first gear.
182
UTILITY
10. Shift the transmission to NEUTRAL. Firmly apply the parking brake. Turn OFF
the engine. For vehicles with Keyless Enter-N-Go, push and hold the ENGINE
START/STOP button until the engine shuts off.
11. Shift the transmission into PARK or place manual transmission in gear (NOT in
Neutral). On 8-speed transmissions the shifter will automatically select PARK
when the engine is turned off.
12. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position, then cycle the Key or the Keyless
Enter-N-Go button to the RUN position and back to the OFF position. Remove
the Key Fob from the ignition switch.
13. Attach the vehicle to the tow vehicle using a suitable tow bar.
NOTE:
With electronic shift transfer case:
• Steps 2 through 4 are requirements that must be met before pushing the
NEUTRAL (N) button, and must continue to be met until the shift has been
completed. If any of these requirements are not met before pushing the NEUTRAL
(N) button or are no longer met during the shift, the NEUTRAL (N) indicator light
will flash continuously until all requirements are met or until the NEUTRAL (N)
button is released.
• The ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN position for a shift to take place and
for the position indicator lights to be operable. If the ignition switch is not in the
ON/RUN position, the shift will not take place and no position indicator lights will
be on or flashing.
• A flashing NEUTRAL (N) position indicator light indicates that shift requirements
have not been met.
• If the vehicle is equipped with air suspension, the engine should be started and
left running for a minimum of 60 seconds (with all the doors closed) at least once
every 24 hours. This process allows the air suspension to adjust the vehicle’s ride
height to compensate for temperature effects.
Shifting Out Of NEUTRAL (N)
Use the following procedure to prepare your vehicle for normal usage:
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop, leaving it connected to the tow vehicle.
2. Firmly apply the parking brake.
4. Start the engine. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL. Depress the clutch pedal
on a manual transmission.
• With manual shift transfer case, shift the transfer case lever to the desired
position.
183
UTILITY
• With electronic shift transfer case with rotary selector switch, push and hold
the transfer case NEUTRAL (N) button until the NEUTRAL (N) indicator light
turns off. After the NEUTRAL (N) indicator light turns off, release the
NEUTRAL (N) button. After the NEUTRAL (N) button has been released, the
transfer case will shift to the position indicated by the selector switch.
• With electronic shift transfer case with push-button selector switch, push and
hold the switch for the desired transfer case position, until the NEUTRAL (N)
indicator light turns off and the desired position indicator light turns on.
NOTE:
When shifting out of transfer case NEUTRAL (N), turning the engine OFF is not
required, but may be helpful to avoid gear clash. With the 8-speed automatic
transmission, the engine must remain running, since turning the engine OFF will
shift the transmission to PARK (and the transmission must be in NEUTRAL for the
transfer case to shift out of NEUTRAL).
5. Turn the engine OFF. Shift automatic transmission into PARK. On 8-speed
transmissions the shifter will automatically select PARK when the engine is
turned off.
6. Release the brake pedal (and clutch pedal on a manual transmission).
7. Disconnect vehicle from the tow vehicle.
8. Start the engine.
11. Shift the transmission into gear, release the brake pedal (and clutch pedal on
manual transmissions), and check that the vehicle operates normally.
NOTE:
With electronic shift transfer case:
• Steps 3 and 4 are requirements that must be met before pushing the button to
shift out of NEUTRAL (N), and must continue to be met until the shift has been
completed. If any of these requirements are not met before pushing the button or
are no longer met during the shift, the NEUTRAL (N) indicator light will flash
continuously until all requirements are met or until the button is released.
• The ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN position for a shift to take place and
for the position indicator lights to be operable. If the ignition switch is not in the
ON/RUN position, the shift will not take place and no position indicator lights will
be on or flashing.
• A flashing NEUTRAL (N) position indicator light indicates that shift requirements
have not been met.
184
1500 3.0L DIESEL
DIESEL ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS

The 3.0 turbocharged diesel engine does not require a break-in period due to its
construction. Normal operation is allowed, providing the following recommendations
are followed:
• Warm up the engine before placing it under load.
• Do not operate the engine at idle for prolonged periods.
• Use the appropriate transmission gear to prevent engine lugging.
• Observe vehicle oil pressure and temperature indicators.
• Check the coolant and oil levels frequently.
• Vary throttle position at highway speeds when carrying or towing significant
weight.
NOTE:
Light duty operation such as light trailer towing or no load operation will extend the
time before the engine is at full efficiency. Reduced fuel economy and power may be
seen at this time.
The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a high-quality energy
conserving type lubricant. Oil changes should be consistent with anticipated climate
conditions under which vehicle operations will occur. The recommended viscosity
and quality grades are shown under “FLUIDS AND CAPACITIES”, under “MAIN-
TAINING YOUR VEHICLE” in this User Guide. NON-DETERGENT OR STRAIGHT
MINERAL OILS MUST NEVER BE USED.
DIESEL ENGINE STARTING PROCEDURES

Normal Starting Procedure
1. Apply the parking brake.
2. Ensure the shift lever is in the PARK position.
3. Press and hold the brake pedal while pushing the ENGINE START/STOP button
once and the system will engage the starter to crank the engine.
NOTE:
• A delay of the start of up to five seconds is possible under very cold conditions.
The “Wait to Start” telltale will be illuminated during the pre-heat process,
When the engine Wait To Start light goes off the engine will automatically crank.
• If you wish to stop the cranking of the engine prior to the engine starting, push
the button again.
4. Check that the oil pressure warning light has turned off.
185
1500 3.0L DIESEL
CAUTION!
If the “Water in Fuel Indicator Light” remains on, DO NOT START the engine
before you drain the water from the fuel filters to avoid engine damage. Refer to
“Maintenance Procedures/Draining Fuel/Water Separator Filter” in “Maintaining
Your Vehicle” in your Diesel Supplement on the DVD for further information.
Extreme Cold Weather

The engine block heater is a resistance heater installed in the water jacket of the
engine. It requires a 110–115 Volt AC electrical outlet with a grounded, three-wire
extension cord.
Its use is recommended for environments that routinely fall below -10°F. It should be
used when the vehicle has not been running overnight or longer periods and should
be plugged in two hours prior to start. Its use is required for cold starts with
temperatures under -20°F.
A 12 Volt heater built into the fuel filter housing aids in preventing fuel gelling. It is
controlled by a built-in thermostat.
A Diesel Pre-Heat system both improves engine starting and reduces the amount of
white smoke generated by a warming engine.
NOTE:
The engine block heater cord is a factory installed option. If your vehicle is not
equipped, heater cords are available from your authorized MOPAR dealer.
Winter Front Usage
A winter front or cold weather cover is to be used in ambient temperatures below
32°F (0°C), especially during extended idle conditions to reduce condensation
build-up within engine crankcase. If a winter front or cold weather cover is to be used,
a percentage of the total grille opening area must be left uncovered to provide
sufficient air flow to the charge air cooler and automatic transmission oil cooler. The
percentage of opening must be increased with the increasing ambient air tempera-
ture and/or engine load. If the cooling fan can be heard cycling frequently, increase
the size of the opening in the winter front. A suitable cold weather cover is available
from your MOPAR dealer.
Water In Fuel Message

If a Water In Fuel message or indicator appears in the cluster and a chime
sounds five times, the fuel/water separator will need to be drained immediately to
prevent engine damage.
Refer to “Draining Fuel Water Separator” in this guide for draining instructions or see
your dealer.
186
1500 3.0L DIESEL
DIESEL FUEL FILTER/WATER SEPARATOR

Draining Fuel/Water Separator
If the “Water in Fuel” indicator light is illuminated and an audible chime is
heard five times, you should stop the engine and drain the water from the separator.
The drain plug is located on the bottom of the Fuel Filter and Water Separator
assembly which is located above the rear axle next to the fuel tank.
Loosen the drain plug (located on the bottom filter assembly) then turn the ignition
switch to the ON/RUN position to allow any accumulated water to drain.
When clean fuel is visible, close the drain and switch the ignition to the OFF position.
Refer to the Diesel Supplement on the DVD for further details.
Fuel Filter Replacement

1. Ensure engine is turned off.
2. Place drain pan under the fuel filter assembly.
3. Open the water drain valve, and let any accumulated water drain.
4. Close the water drain valve.
5. Remove bottom cover using a strap wrench. Rotate counterclockwise for removal.
Remove the used o-ring and discard it.
6. Remove the used filter cartridge from the housing and dispose of according to
your local regulations.
7. Wipe the sealing surfaces of the lid and housing clean.
8. Install new o-ring back into ring groove on the filter housing and lubricate with
clean engine oil.
NOTE:
The WIF (Water In Fuel) sensor is re-usable. Service kit comes with new o-ring for
filter canister and WIF (Water In Fuel) sensor.
CAUTION!
• Diesel fuel will damage blacktop paving surfaces. Drain the filter into an
appropriate container.
• Do not prefill the fuel filter when installing a new fuel filter. There is a possibility
debris could be introduced into the fuel filter during this action. It is best to install
the filter dry and allow the in-tank lift pump to prime the fuel system.
• If the “Water In Fuel Indicator Light” remains on, DO NOT START the engine
before you drain water from the fuel filter to avoid engine damage.
187
1500 3.0L DIESEL
EXHAUST REGENERATION
This engine meets all required EPA diesel engine emissions standards. To achieve
these emissions standards, your vehicle is equipped with a state-of-the-art engine
and exhaust system. These systems are seamlessly integrated into your vehicle and
managed by the Powertrain Control Module (PCM). Additionally, your vehicle has the
ability to alert you to additional maintenance required on your vehicle or engine.
Refer to the following messages that may be displayed on your Driver Information
Display (DID).
Exhaust System — Regeneration Required Now

This message Indicates that the Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF) reached 80% of its
maximum storage capacity.
By simply driving your vehicle at highway speeds for up to 20 minutes, you can
remedy the condition in the particulate filter system and allow your diesel engine and
exhaust after-treatment system to cleanse the filter to remove the trapped PM and
restore the system to normal operating condition.
Exhaust System — Regeneration in Process Exhaust Filter

XX% Full
Indicates that the Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF) is self-cleaning. Maintain your
current driving condition until regeneration is completed.
Exhaust System — Regeneration Completed

This message indicates that the Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF) self-cleaning is
completed. If this message is displayed, you will hear one chime to assist in alerting
you of this condition.
Exhaust Service Required — See Dealer Now

This message indicates regeneration has been disabled due to a system malfunction.
The Powertrain control Module (PCM) will register a fault code and the instrument
panel will display the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL).
CAUTION!
See your authorized dealer, as damage to the exhaust system could occur soon
with continued operation.
188
1500 3.0L DIESEL
Exhaust Filter Full — Power Reduced See Dealer

The PCM derates the engine in order to limit the likelihood of permanent damage to
the after-treatment system. If this condition is not corrected and a dealer service is
not performed, extensive exhaust after-treatment damage can occur. Have your
vehicle serviced by your local authorized dealer.
NOTE:
Failing to follow the oil change indicator, changing your oil and resetting the oil
change indicator by 0 miles remaining will prevent the diesel exhaust filter from
performing it's cleaning routine. This will shortly result in a Malfunction Indicator
Light (MIL) and reduced engine power. Only an authorized dealer will be able to
correct this condition.
CAUTION!
See your authorized dealer, as damage to the exhaust system could occur with the
exhaust filter full.
COOL-DOWN IDLE CHART

TURBO "COOL DOWN" CHART
Idle Time
Driving Conditions Load Turbo Temp (in minutes) Before
Shut Down
Stop and Go Empty Cool Less than 1
Stop and Go Medium Warm 1
Highway Speeds Medium Warm 2
City Traffic Max. GCWR Warm 3
Highway Speeds Max. GCWR Warm 4
Uphill Grade Max. GCWR Hot 5
189
1500 3.0L DIESEL
ADDING FUEL — DIESEL ENGINE ONLY

Your vehicle is equipped with a cap-less fuel system.
Most fuel cans will not open the flapper door.
A funnel is provided to open the flapper door to allow emergency refueling with a fuel can.
Emergency Fuel Can Refueling
1. Retrieve funnel from the jack storage
area under the passenger seat.
2. Insert the funnel into same filler pipe
opening as the fuel nozzle.
3. Ensure the funnel is inserted fully to
hold flapper door open.
Fill Locations
1 — Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Fill
Location
2 — Diesel Fuel Fill Location
4. Pour fuel into funnel opening.

5. Remove the funnel from filler pipe,
clean off prior to putting back in the
jack storage area under the passenger
seat.
Fill Locations And Funnel Useage

Location
3 — Emergency Diesel Fuel Fill Funnel
190
1500 3.0L DIESEL
DIESEL EXHAUST FLUID

Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) sometimes known simply by the name of its active
component, UREA – is a key component of selective catalytic reduction (SCR)
systems, which help diesel vehicles meet stringent emission regulations. DEF is a
liquid reducing agent that reacts with engine exhaust in the presence of a catalyst to
convert smog-forming nitrogen oxides (NOx) into harmless nitrogen and water vapor.
Your vehicle is equipped with a Selective Catalytic Reduction system in order to meet
the very stringent diesel emissions standards required by the Environmental Protec-
tion Agency. Selective Catalytic Reduction (SCR) is the first and only technology in
decades to be as good for the environment as it is good for business and vehicle
performance.
The purpose of the SCR system is to reduce levels of NOx (oxides of nitrogen emitted
from engines) that are harmful to our health and the environment to an almost
near-zero level. Small quantities of Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) are injected into the
exhaust upstream of a catalyst where, when vaporized, convert smog-forming
nitrogen oxides (NOx) into harmless nitrogen (N2) and water vapor (H2O), two
natural components of the air we breathe. You can operate with the comfort that your
vehicle is contributing to a cleaner, healthier world environment for this and
generations to come.
System Overview
This vehicle is equipped with a Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) injection system and a
Selective Catalytic Reduction (SCR) catalyst to meet the emission requirements.
The DEF injection system consists of the following components:
• DEF tank
• DEF pump
• DEF injector
• Electronically-heated DEF lines
• NOx sensors
• Temperature sensors
• SCR catalyst
The DEF injection system and SCR catalyst enable the achievement of diesel
emissions requirements; while maintaining outstanding fuel economy, drivability,
torque and power ratings.
NOTE:
• Your vehicle is equipped with a DEF injection system. You may occasionally hear
an audible clicking noise. This is normal operation.
• The DEF pump will run for a period of time after engine shutdown to purge the DEF
system. This is normal operation.
191
1500 3.0L DIESEL
Adding Diesel Exhaust Fluid

The DEF gauge (located in the instrument panel) will display the level of DEF
remaining in the tank.
Completely fill the DEF tank through the diesel exhaust fluid fill location (located
behind the fuel door) at every maintenance interval or before if prompted by the
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Driver Information Display (DID).
NOTE:
• Driving conditions (altitude, vehicle speed, load, etc.) will effect the amount of
DEF that is used in your vehicle.
• Since DEF will begin to freeze at 12°F (-11°C), your vehicle is equipped with an
automatic DEF heating system. This allows the DEF injection system to operate
properly at temperatures below 12°F (-11°C). If your vehicle is not in operation for
an extended period of time with temperatures below 12°F (-11°C), the DEF in the
tank may freeze. If the tank is overfilled and freezes, it could be damaged.
Therefore, do not overfill the DEF tank. Extra care should be taken when filling
with portable containers to avoid overfilling. Note the level of the DEF gauge in
your instrument cluster. On pickup applications, you may safely add a maximum of
2 gallons of DEF from portable containers when your DEF gauge is reading ½ full.
DEF Fill Procedure
1. Remove cap from DEF tank (located behind the fuel door on drivers side of the
vehicle).
2. Insert DEF container or fill nozzle into
DEF fill location and fill DEF tank.
NOTE:
• The DEF gauge may take up to five
seconds to update after adding a
gallon or more of Diesel Exhaust
Fluid (DEF) to the DEF tank. If you
have a fault related to the DEF sys-
tem, the gauge may not update to
the new level. See your authorized
dealer for service.
Fill Locations
Location
192
1500 3.0L DIESEL
• The DEF gauge may also not immediately update after a refill if the temperature
of the DEF fluid is below 12F (-11C). The DEF line heater will possibly warm up
the DEF fluid and allow the gauge to update after a period of run time. Under
very cold conditions, it is possible that the gauge may not reflect the new fill
level for several drives.
3. Reinstall cap onto DEF tank.
Refer to your Diesel Supplement on the DVD for further details.
CAUTION!
• To avoid DEF spillage and overfilling, do not “top off” the DEF tank after filling.
• When DEF is spilled, clean the area immediately with water or a mild solvent.
• DO NOT OVERFILL. DEF will freeze below 12 degrees F (-11 degrees C). The
DEF system is designed to work in temperatures below the DEF freezing point,
however, if the tank is overfilled and freezes, the system could be damaged.
Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Warning Messages

Your vehicle will begin displaying warning messages when the DEF level reaches a
driving range of approximately 500 miles (800 km).
If the following warning message sequence is ignored, your vehicle may not restart
unless DEF is added within the displayed mileage shown in the DID message.
Engine Will Not Restart in XXXX mi DEF Low Refill Soon – This message will display when
DEF driving range is less than 500 miles, DEF fluid top off is required with in the
displayed mileage. The message will be displayed in the DID during vehicle start up
with the current allowed mileage and accompanied by a single chime. The remaining
mileage can be pulled up anytime by way of the “Messages” list within the DID.
Engine Will Not Restart in XXXX mi Refill DEF – This message will display when DEF
driving range is less than 200 miles. It is also displayed at 150 miles and 100 miles.
DEF fluid top off is required with in the displayed mileage. The message will be
displayed in the DID during vehicle start up with an updated distance mileage, and
it will be accompanied by a single chime. Stating at 100 miles, remaining range will
be continuously displayed while operating the vehicle. Chimes will also accompany
the 75, 50 and 25 mile remaining distances. The DEF Low telltale will be on
continuously until DEF fluid is topped off.
Engine Will Not Restart Refill DEF – This message will display when the DEF driving
range is less than 1 mile, DEF fluid top off is required or the engine will not restart.
The message will be displayed in the DID during vehicle start up, and it will be
accompanied by a single chime. The DEF Low telltale will be illuminated continu-
ously until DEF fluid tank is filled with a minimum of two gallons of DEF.
193
1500 3.0L DIESEL
Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Fault Warning Messages

There are different messages which are displayed if the vehicle detects that the DEF
system has been filled with a fluid other than DEF, has experienced component
failures, or when tampering has been detected.
When the DEF system needs to be serviced the following warnings will display:
Service DEF System See Dealer – This message will display when the fault is initially
detected and each time the vehicle is started. The message will be accompanied by
a single chime and the Malfunction Indicator Light. We recommend you drive to your
nearest authorized dealer and have your vehicle serviced immediately. If not
corrected in 50 miles, vehicle will enter the “Engine Will not restart in XXXmi Service
DEF See dealer” warning stage and message.
Incorrect DEF Detected See Dealer – This message will display if the DEF system has
detected the incorrect fluid has been introduced to the DEF tank. The message will
be accompanied by a single chime. We recommend you drive to your nearest
authorized dealer and have your vehicle serviced immediately. If not corrected in
50 miles, vehicle will enter the Engine Will not restart in XXX mi Service DEF See
dealer warning stage and message.
Engine Will Not Restart in XXX mi Service DEF See Dealer – This message is first
displayed if the fault detected is not serviced after 50 miles of operation. It is also
displayed at 150 miles 125 miles and 100 miles. System service is required within
the displayed mileage. The message will be displayed in the DID during vehicle start
up with an updated distance mileage, and it will be accompanied by a single chime.
Starting at 100 miles, remaining range will be continuously displayed while operat-
ing the vehicle. Chimes will also accompany the 75, 50 and 25 mile remaining
distances. We recommend you drive to your nearest authorized dealer and have your
vehicle serviced immediately.
Engine Will Not Restart Service DEF System See Dealer – This message will display if the
DEF system issue detected is not serviced during the allowed period. Your engine will
not restart unless your vehicle is serviced by your authorized dealer. This message will
be displayed when under 1 mile until the engine will not start and each time the
vehicle is started. The message will be continuously displayed and be accompanied
by a single chime. Your Malfunction Indicator Light will also be continuously
illumined. We highly recommend you drive to your nearest authorized dealer
immediately if the message appears while engine is running.
Engine Will Not Start Service DEF System See Dealer – This message will display when
the fault detected is not serviced after the Engine will not restart Service DEF System
See Dealer message is displayed on the next subsequent restart. Your engine will not
start unless you vehicle is serviced by your authorized dealer. The message will be
accompanied by a single chime. Your Malfunction Indicator Light will be continuously
illuminated. If the message appears and you can not start the engine, we recommend
you have your vehicle towed to your nearest authorized dealer immediately.
194
6.7L CUMMINS DIESEL
DIESEL ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS

The Cummins turbocharged diesel engine does not require a break-in period due to
its construction. Normal operation is allowed, providing the following recommenda-
tions are followed:
• Warm up the engine before placing it under load.
• Do not operate the engine at idle for prolonged periods.
• Use the appropriate transmission gear to prevent engine lugging.
• Observe vehicle oil pressure and temperature indicators.
• Check the coolant and oil levels frequently.
• Vary throttle position at highway speeds when carrying or towing significant
weight.
NOTE:
Light duty operation such as light trailer towing or no load operation will extend the
time before the engine is at full efficiency. Reduced fuel economy and power may be
seen at this time.
Because of the construction of the Cummins turbocharged diesel engine, engine
run-in is enhanced by loaded operating conditions which allow the engine parts to
achieve final finish and fit during the first 6,000 miles (10 000 km).
DIESEL ENGINE STARTING PROCEDURES

Engine Block Heater
For ambient temperatures below 0°F (-18°C), engine block heater usage is recom-
mended.
For ambient temperatures below –20°F (-29°C), engine block heater usage is
required.
The engine block heater cord is routed under the hood to the right side and can be
located just behind the grille near the headlamp.
Connect the heater cord to a ground-fault interrupter protected 110–115 volt AC
electrical outlet with a grounded, three-wire extension cord.
NOTE:
The block heater will require 110 volts AC and 6.5 amps to activate the heater
element.
The block heater must be plugged in at least one hour to have an adequate warming
effect on the coolant.
195
6.7L CUMMINS DIESEL
Water In Fuel Message

If a Water In Fuel message or indicator appears in the cluster and a chime
sounds five times, the fuel/water separator will need to be drained immediately to
prevent engine damage.
Refer to “Draining Fuel Water Separator” in this guide for draining instructions or see
your dealer.
Cold Start Procedure

Turn the ignition switch to the ON position. If the Wait To Start light appears in
the cluster, wait for the light to turn off before starting.
In extremely cold weather below 0°F (-18°C) it may be beneficial to cycle the
manifold heaters twice before attempting to start the engine. This can be accom-
plished by turning the ignition OFF for at least five seconds and then back ON after
the “Wait To Start Light” has turned off, but before the engine is started. However,
excessive cycling of the manifold heaters will result in damage to the heater elements
or reduced battery voltage.
Refer to the Owner's Manual Diesel Supplement on the DVD for further details.
Winter Front Usage

A winter front or cold weather cover is to be used in ambient temperatures below
32°F (0°C), especially during extended idle conditions to reduce condensation
build-up within engine crankcase. If a winter front or cold weather cover is to be used,
a percentage of the total grille opening area must be left uncovered to provide
sufficient air flow to the charge air cooler and automatic transmission oil cooler. The
percentage of opening must be increased with the increasing ambient air tempera-
ture and/or engine load. If the cooling fan can be heard cycling frequently, increase
the size of the opening in the winter front. A suitable cold weather cover is available
from your MOPAR dealer.
Engine Idling
Avoid prolonged engine idling. Long periods of idling may be harmful to your engine
because combustion chamber temperatures can drop so low that the fuel may not
burn completely.
Incomplete combustion allows carbon and varnish to form on piston rings, engine
valves, and injector nozzles. Also, the unburned fuel can enter the crankcase,
diluting the oil and causing rapid wear to the engine.
196
6.7L CUMMINS DIESEL
If the engine is allowed to idle, under some conditions the idle speed may increase
to 900 RPM then return to normal idle speed. This is normal operation.
WARNING!
Remember to disconnect the cord before driving. Damage to the 110–115 volt
electrical cord could cause electrocution.
DIESEL EXHAUST BRAKE (ENGINE BRAKING)

The Exhaust Brake switch is located on the switch bank below the audio system. This
switch is used to enable exhaust brake modes.
Pushing the exhaust brake switch once will enable full strength exhaust brake mode,
indicated by a yellow icon in the EVIC/DID. This mode applies full exhaust braking
when the accelerator pedal is released. This is most useful for slowing the vehicle.
Pushing the exhaust brake switch again will enable the Smart Brake feature,
indicated by a green icon in the EVIC/DID. This feature is intended to maintain the
vehicle speed present when the accelerator pedal is released. However, when the
brakes are applied, full exhaust braking is still enabled to slow the vehicle.
A third push of the brake switch will turn the exhaust brake off, and will extinguish
the exhaust brake icon in the EVIC/DID.
NOTE:
In general, higher engine speeds result in higher exhaust braking force. For optimum
braking power, it is recommended to use the exhaust brake while in TOW/HAUL
mode.
CAUTION!
Use of aftermarket exhaust brakes is not recommended and could lead to engine
damage.
WARNING!
Do not use the exhaust brake feature when driving in icy or slippery conditions as
the increased engine braking can cause the rear wheels to slide and the vehicle to
swing around with the possible loss of vehicle control, which may cause a collision
possibly resulting in personal injury or death.
197
6.7L CUMMINS DIESEL
IDLE-UP FEATURE (AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION ONLY)
Speed Control Switches
1 — Push CANCEL
2 — Push ON/OFF
3 — Push Resume/Accel
4 — Push Set/Decel
The Idle-Up Feature uses the speed control switches to increase engine idle speed
and quickly warm the vehicle’s interior. This feature must be enabled by your dealer.
See your local dealer.
With the transmission in PARK, the parking brake applied, and the engine running,
push the speed control ON/OFF switch on, then push the SET switch.
The engine RPM will go up to 1100 RPM. To increase the RPM, push and hold the
RESUME/ACCEL switch and the idle speed will increase to approximately
1500 RPM. To decrease the RPM, push and hold the SET/DECEL switch and the idle
speed will decrease to approximately 1100 RPM.
To cancel the Idle Up Feature, either push the CANCEL switch, push the ON/OFF
switch or push the brake pedal.
198
6.7L CUMMINS DIESEL
ENGINE MOUNTED FUEL FILTER/WATER SEPARATOR

The drain is located on the bottom of the Fuel Filter and Water Separator assembly
which is located on the driver's side of the engine.
Turn the drain valve (located on the side of the filter) counterclockwise 1/4 turn, then turn
the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position to allow any accumulated water to drain.
When clean fuel is visible, close the drain and switch the ignition to OFF.
Refer to the Diesel Supplement on the DVD for further details.
Fuel Filter Replacement

1. With the engine off and a drain pan under the fuel filter drain hose, open the water
drain valve 1/4 turn counterclockwise and completely drain fuel and water into
the approved container.
2. Close the water drain valve and remove the lid using a socket or strap wrench;
rotate counterclockwise for removal. Remove the used o-ring and discard it.
4. Wipe clean the sealing surfaces of the lid and housing and install the new o-ring
into ring groove on the filter housing and lubricate with clean engine oil.
5. Install a new filter in the housing. Push down on the cartridge to ensure it is
properly seated. Do not pre-fill the filter housing with fuel.
6. Install the lid onto the housing and tighten to 22.5 ft lbs (30.5 N·m). Do not
overtighten the lid.
7. Start the engine and confirm no leaks are present.
The engine mounted filter housing is equipped with a No-Filter-No-Run (NFNR)
feature. Engine will not run if:
• No filter is installed.
• Inferior/Non-approved filter is used. Use of OEM filter is required to ensure vehicle
will run.
CAUTION!
199
6.7L CUMMINS DIESEL
UNDERBODY MOUNTED FUEL FILTER/WATER SEPARATOR

The drain is located on the bottom of the Fuel Filter and Water Separator assembly
which is located in front of the rear axle above the drive shaft on pick up models. The
Chassis Cab models second filter location is on the frame behind the front axle. The
best access to this water drain valve is from under the vehicle.
• Turn the drain valve (located on the side of the filter) counterclockwise 1 full turn,
then turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position to allow any accumulated
water to drain.
• When clean fuel is visible, close the drain and switch the ignition to OFF.
• Refer to the Diesel Supplement on the DVD for further details.
Underbody Fuel Filter Replacement

1. With the engine off and a drain pan under the fuel filter drain hose, open the water
drain valve 1 full turn counterclockwise and completely drain fuel and water into
the approved container.
2. Close the water drain valve and remove the lid using a socket or strap wrench;
rotate counterclockwise for removal. Remove the used o-ring and discard it.
4. Wipe clean the sealing surfaces of the lid and housing and install the new o-ring
into ring groove on the filter housing and lubricate with clean engine oil.
5. Install a new filter in the housing. Push down on the cartridge to ensure it is
properly seated. Do not pre-fill the filter housing with fuel.
6. Start the engine and confirm no leaks are present.
The underbody mounted filter housing will cause the engine not to run if:
• No filter is installed.
NOTE:
• Using a fuel filter that does not meet the manufacturer's filtration and water
separating requirements can severely impact fuel system life and reliability.
• The WIF sensor is re-usable. Service kit comes with new o-ring for filter canister
and WIF sensor.
200
6.7L CUMMINS DIESEL
CAUTION!
EXHAUST REGENERATION
Under certain conditions, your Cummins diesel engine and exhaust after-treatment
system may never reach the conditions required to remove the trapped particulate
matter. If this occurs, the “Exhaust System — Regeneration Required Now” message
will be displayed on the EVIC/DID screen in your cluster and you will hear one chime
to alert you of this condition. Driving your vehicle at highway speeds for as little as 45
minutes can remedy the condition and allow the engine and exhaust after-treatment
system to remove the trapped particulate matter.
NOTE:
Under typical operating conditions, NO indications of regeneration state will be
displayed. If you do reach 80% of filter capacity, the following messages will assist
you in inducing and understanding the regeneration process.
Perform Service
Your vehicle will require emissions maintenance at a set interval. To help remind you
when this maintenance is due, the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/
Driver Information Display (DID) will display “Perform Service”. When the “Perform
Service” message is displayed on the EVIC/DID it is necessary to have the emissions
maintenance performed. Emissions maintenance may include replacing the Closed
Crankcase Ventilation (CCV) filter element, and cleaning of the EGR Cooler. The
procedure for clearing and resetting the “Perform Service” indicator message is
located in the appropriate Service Information.
Exhaust System — Regeneration Required Now

“Exhaust System — Regeneration Required Now” will be displayed on the EVIC/DID
if the exhaust particulate filter reaches 80% of its maximum storage capacity.
Exhaust Filter XX% Full

Indicates that the Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF) is approaching full.
201
6.7L CUMMINS DIESEL
Exhaust System — Regeneration in Process Exhaust Filter

XX% Full
Indicates that the Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF) is self-cleaning. Maintain your
current driving condition until regeneration is completed.
Exhaust System — Regeneration Completed

This message indicates that the Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF) self-cleaning is
completed. If this message is displayed, you will hear one chime to assist in alerting
you of this condition.
Exhaust Service Required — See Dealer Now

This message indicates regeneration has been disabled due to a system malfunction.
The Powertrain control Module (PCM) will register a fault code and the instrument
panel will display the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL).
CAUTION!
See your authorized dealer, as damage to the exhaust system could occur soon
with continued operation.
Exhaust Filter Full — Power Reduced See Dealer

The PCM derates the engine in order to limit the likelihood of permanent damage to
the after-treatment system. If this condition is not corrected and a dealer service is
not performed, extensive exhaust after-treatment damage can occur. Have your
vehicle serviced by your local authorized dealer.
NOTE:
Failing to follow the oil change indicator, changing your oil and resetting the oil
change indicator by 0 miles remaining will prevent the diesel exhaust filter from
performing it's cleaning routine. This will shortly result in a Malfunction Indicator
Light (MIL) and reduced engine power. Only an authorized dealer will be able to
correct this condition.
CAUTION!
See your authorized dealer, as damage to the exhaust system could occur with the
exhaust filter full.
202
6.7L CUMMINS DIESEL
COOL-DOWN IDLE CHART

TURBO "COOL DOWN" CHART
Idle Time
Driving Conditions Load Turbo Temp (in minutes) Before
Shut Down
Stop and Go Empty Cool Less than 1
Stop and Go Medium Warm 1
Highway Speeds Medium Warm 2
City Traffic Max. GCWR Warm 3
Highway Speeds Max. GCWR Warm 4
Uphill Grade Max. GCWR Hot 5
ADDING FUEL — DIESEL ENGINE ONLY

Your vehicle is equipped with a cap-less fuel system.
Most fuel cans will not open the flapper door.
A funnel is provided to open the flapper door to allow emergency refueling with a fuel
can.
Emergency Fuel Can Refueling
1. Retrieve funnel from the jack storage
area under the passenger seat.
2. Insert the funnel into same filler pipe
opening as the fuel nozzle.
3. Ensure the funnel is inserted fully to
hold flapper door open.
Fill Locations
Location
203
6.7L CUMMINS DIESEL
4. Pour fuel into funnel opening.
5. Remove the funnel from filler pipe,
clean off prior to putting back in the
jack storage area under the passenger
seat.
Fill Locations And Funnel Useage

Location
3 — Emergency Diesel Fuel Fill Funnel
DIESEL EXHAUST FLUID

Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) sometimes known simply by the name of its active
component, UREA – is a key component of selective catalytic reduction (SCR)
systems, which help diesel vehicles meet stringent emission regulations. DEF is a
liquid reducing agent that reacts with engine exhaust in the presence of a catalyst to
convert smog-forming nitrogen oxides (NOx) into harmless nitrogen and water vapor.
Your vehicle is equipped with a Selective Catalytic Reduction system in order to meet
the very stringent diesel emissions standards required by the Environmental Protec-
tion Agency. Selective Catalytic Reduction (SCR) is the first and only technology in
decades to be as good for the environment as it is good for business and vehicle
performance.
The purpose of the SCR system is to reduce levels of NOx (oxides of nitrogen emitted
from engines) that are harmful to our health and the environment to an almost near-zero
level. Small quantities of Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) are injected into the exhaust
upstream of a catalyst where, when vaporized, convert smog-forming nitrogen oxides
(NOx) into harmless nitrogen (N2) and water vapor (H2O), two natural components of
the air we breathe. You can operate with the comfort that your vehicle is contributing to
a cleaner, healthier world environment for this and generations to come.
204
6.7L CUMMINS DIESEL
System Overview
This vehicle is equipped with a Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) injection system and a
Selective Catalytic Reduction (SCR) catalyst to meet the emission requirements.
The DEF injection system consists of the following components:
• DEF tank
• DEF pump
• DEF injector
• Electronically-heated DEF lines
• DEF control module
• NOx sensors
• NH3 sensor
• Temperature sensors
• SCR catalyst
The DEF injection system and SCR catalyst enable the achievement of diesel
emissions requirements; while maintaining outstanding fuel economy, drivability,
torque and power ratings.
NOTE:
• Your vehicle is equipped with a DEF injection system. You may occasionally hear
an audible clicking noise. This is normal operation.
• The DEF pump will run for a period of time after engine shutdown to purge the DEF
system. This is normal operation.
Diesel Exhaust Fluid Storage

Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) is considered a very stable product with a long shelf life.
If DEF is kept in temperatures between 10° to 90°F (-12° to 32°C), it will last a
minimum of one year.
DEF is subject to freezing at the lowest temperatures. For example, DEF may freeze
at temperatures at or below 12°F (-11°C). The system has been designed to operate
in this environment.
NOTE:
When working with DEF, it is important to know that:
• Any containers or parts that come into contact with DEF must be DEF compatible
(plastic or stainless steel). Copper, brass, aluminum, iron or non-stainless steel
should be avoided as they are subject to corrosion by DEF.
• If DEF is spilled, it should be wiped up completely.
205
6.7L CUMMINS DIESEL
Adding Diesel Exhaust Fluid

The DEF gauge (located in the instrument cluster) will display the level of DEF
remaining in the tank.
Completely fill the DEF tank through the diesel exhaust fluid fill location at every
maintenance interval or before if prompted by the Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC)/Driver Information Display (DID).
NOTE:
• Driving conditions (altitude, vehicle speed, load, etc.) will effect the amount of
DEF that is used in your vehicle.
• Since DEF will begin to freeze at 12°F (-11°C), your vehicle is equipped with an
automatic DEF heating system. This allows the DEF injection system to operate
properly at temperatures below 12°F (-11°C). If your vehicle is not in operation for an
extended period of time with temperatures below 12°F (-11°C), the DEF in the tank
may freeze. If the tank is overfilled and freezes, it could be damaged. Therefore, do
not overfill the DEF tank. Extra care should be taken when filling with portable
containers to avoid overfilling. Note the level of the DEF gauge in your instrument
cluster. On pickup applications, you may safely add a maximum of 2 gallons
(7.5 liters) of DEF from portable containers when your DEF gauge is reading ½ full.
On Chassis Cab applications a maximum of 2 gallons (7.5 liters) may be added when
the DEF gauge is reading ¾ full.
DEF Fill Procedure
1. Remove cap from DEF tank (located behind the fuel door on drivers side of the
vehicle).
2. Insert DEF container or fill nozzle into
DEF fill location and fill DEF tank.
3. Reinstall cap onto DEF tank.
Refer to your Diesel Supplement on the
DVD for further details.
Fill Locations
Location
206
6.7L CUMMINS DIESEL
CAUTION!
• To avoid DEF spillage and overfilling, do not “top off” the DEF tank after filling.
• When DEF is spilled, clean the area immediately with water or a mild solvent.
• DO NOT OVERFILL. DEF will freeze below 12 degrees F (-11 degrees C). The
DEF system is designed to work in temperatures below the DEF freezing point,
however, if the tank is overfilled and freezes, the system could be damaged.
Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Warning Messages

Your vehicle will begin displaying warning messages when the DEF level reaches a
driving range of approximately 350 miles (563 km). If the following warning message
sequence is ignored, your vehicle may be limited to a maximum speed of 5 mph
(8 km/h) unless DEF is added.
DEF Low Refill Soon — This message will display when the low level is reached, during
vehicle start up, and with increased frequency during vehicle operation. It will be
accompanied by a single chime. Approximately 5 gallons (19 liters) of DEF is
required to refill the tank when this message is initially displayed on pickup
applications, and approximately 7 gallons (28 liters) are required on chassis-cab
applications.
Speed Limited to 5 MPH in XXX mi Refill DEF — This message will continuously display
if the “DEF Low Refill Soon” message is ignored, and the frequency of occurance of
the chime will increase unless up to 2 gallons (7.5 liters) of DEF is added to the tank.
5 MPH Max Speed on Restart, Long Idle or Refuel Refill DEF — This message will
continuously display when the counter reaches zero, and will be accompanied by a
periodic chime.
The vehicle will only be capable of a maximum speed of 5 mph (8 km/h) upon the
first of the following conditions to occur:
• If the vehicle is shutoff and restarted.
• If the vehicle is idled for an extended period of time, approximately one hour or
greater.
• If the system detects that the level of fuel in the tank has increased.
Add a minimum of 2 gallons (7.5 liters) of DEF to the tank in order to avoid vehicle
operation at a maximum speed of 5 mph (8 km/h).
5 MPH Max Speed Refill DEF — The vehicle will only be capable of a maximum speed
of 5 mph (8 km/h) when this message is displayed. Add up to 2.5 gallons (7.5 liters)
of DEF to the tank to restore normal vehicle operation.
NOTE:
A minimum of 2 gallons (7.5 liters) may be required to restore normal vehicle
operation. Although the vehicle will start normally and can be placed in gear after this
message has been initially displayed, extreme caution should be utilized since the
vehicle will only be capable of maneuvering at a maximum speed of 5 mph (8 km/h).
207
6.7L CUMMINS DIESEL
Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Fault Warning Messages

There are four different messages which are displayed if the vehicle detects that the
DEF system has been filled with a fluid other than DEF, has experienced component
failures, or when tampering has been detected. The vehicle may be limited to a
maximum speed of 5 mph (8 km/h) if the DEF system is not serviced within less than
250 miles (402 kilometers) of the fault being detected.
When the DEF system needs to be serviced the following warnings will display:
Service DEF System – See Dealer — This message will display when the fault is initially
detected, each time the vehicle is started, and periodically during driving. The
message will be accompanied by a single chime. We recommend you drive to your
nearest authorized dealer and have your vehicle serviced as soon as possible.
5 MPH Max Speed in 150 mi Service DEF System See Dealer — This message will
display if the DEF system has not been serviced after the “Service DEF System – See
Dealer” message is displayed. This message will continuously display until the
mileage counter reaches zero, and will be accompanied by a periodic chime. The
message will continue to countdown until it reaches zero unless the vehicle is
serviced. We recommend you drive to your nearest authorized dealer and have your
NOTE:
Under some circumstances this mileage counter may start with a value of less than
150 miles (241 kilometers). For example, if recurring faults are detected in a time
interval of less than 40 hours, the counter may restart at the value where it stopped
when a previous fault was temporarily remedied, or at a minimum of 50 miles
(80 kilometers).
5 MPH Max Speed on Restart, Long Idle or Refuel Service DEF See Dealer — This
message will continuously display when the mileage counter reaches zero, and will
be accompanied by a periodic chime.
The vehicle will only be capable of a maximum speed of 5 mph (8 km/h) upon the first
of the following conditions to occur:
• If the vehicle is shutoff and restarted.
• If the vehicle is idled for an extended period of time, approximately one hour or
greater.
• If the system detects that the level of fuel in the tank has increased.
5 MPH Max Speed Service DEF System See Dealer — This message will continuously
display, and will be accompanied by a periodic chime. Although the vehicle can be
started and placed in gear, the vehicle will only operate at a maximum speed of
5 mph (8 km/h). Your vehicle will require towing, see your authorized dealer for
service.
NOTE:
When this message is displayed, the engine can still be started. However, the vehicle
will only operate at a maximum speed of 5 mph (8 km/h).
208
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE
Dial toll-free 1-800-521-2779 for U.S. Residents or 1-800-363-4869 for Canadian
Residents.
• Provide your name, vehicle identification number, license plate number, and your
location, including the telephone number from which you are calling.
• Briefly describe the nature of the problem and answer a few simple questions.
• You will be given the name of the service provider and an estimated time of arrival.
If you feel you are in an “unsafe situation”, please let us know. With your consent,
we will contact local police or safety authorities.
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER WARNING LIGHTS

- Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Activation/Malfunction
Indicator Light
If this indicator light flashes during acceleration, apply as little throttle as possible.
While driving, ease up on the accelerator. Adapt your speed and driving to the
prevailing road conditions. To improve the vehicle's traction when starting off in deep
snow, sand or gravel, it may be desirable to switch the ESC system off.
- Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Light

Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked monthly, when cold
and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on
the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires of a
different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure
label, you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS) which display in the Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC) or Driver Information Display (DID) when one or more of your tires is
significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure EVIC or DID
display illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and
inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire
causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces
fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping
ability.
IF THE LIGHT STARTS FLASHING INDICATING A LOW TIRE PRESSURE, ADJUST THE AIR
PRESSURE IN THE LOW TIRE TO THE AIR PRESSURE SHOWN ON THE VEHICLE PLACARD OR
TIRE INFLATION PRESSURE LABEL LOCATED ON THE DRIVER'S DOOR.
NOTE:
After inflation, the vehicle may need to be driven for 20 minutes before the flashing light
will turn off.
209
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is
the driver’s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has
not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low EVIC or DID display.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate
when the system is not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is
combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the system detects a malfunction,
the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously
illuminated. This sequence will continue each time the vehicle is restarted as long as
the malfunction exists.
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect
or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of
reasons, including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the
vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS
malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle, to
ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue
to function properly.
NOTE:
Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per 12° F (7° C) of air
temperature change. Keep this in mind when checking tire pressure inside a garage,
especially in the Winter. Example: If garage temperature is 68°F (20°C) and the
outside temperature is 32°F (0°C), then the cold tire inflation pressure should be
increased by 3 psi (21 kPa), which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (7°C) for this
outside temperature condition.
CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the original equipment tires and wheels. TPMS
pressures and warning have been established for the tire size equipped on your
vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor damage may result when using
replacement equipment that is not of the same size, type, and/or style. Aftermar-
ket wheels can cause sensor damage. Do not use tire sealant from a can, or
balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a TPMS, as damage to the sensors
may result.
- Engine Temperature Warning Light

This light warns of an overheated engine condition.
If the light turns on and a warning chime sounds while driving, safely pull over and
stop the vehicle. If the A/C system is on, turn it off. Also, shift the transmission into
NEUTRAL and idle the vehicle. If the temperature reading does not return to normal,
turn the engine off immediately.
We recommend that you do not operate the vehicle or engine damage will occur. Have
the vehicle serviced immediately.
210
WARNING!
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or others could be badly burned by
steam or boiling coolant.
– Brake Warning Light

This light monitors various brake functions, including brake fluid level and parking
brake application. If the brake light turns on, it may indicate that the parking brake
is applied, that the brake fluid level is low, or that there is a problem with the brake
system master cylinder reservoir.
If the light remains on when the parking brake has been disengaged, and the fluid level
is at the full mark on the master cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possible brake hydraulic
system malfunction or that a problem with the Brake Booster has been detected by the
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)/Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system. In this case,
the light will remain on until the condition has been corrected. If the problem is related
to the brake booster, the ABS pump will run when applying the brake, and a brake pedal
pulsation may be felt during each stop.
The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capacity in the event of a failure to
a portion of the hydraulic system. A leak in either half of the dual brake system is
indicated by the Brake Warning Light, which will turn on when the brake fluid level
in the master cylinder has dropped below a specified level. The light will remain on
until the cause is corrected.
Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) are also equipped with
Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD). In the event of an EBD failure, the Brake
Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS Light. Immediate repair to the ABS
system is required.
Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by turning the ignition switch
from the OFF position to the ON/RUN position. The light should illuminate for
approximately two seconds. The light should then turn off unless the parking brake
is applied or a brake fault is detected. If the light does not illuminate, have the light
inspected by an authorized dealer.
The light also will turn on when the parking brake is applied with the ignition switch
in the ON/RUN position.
NOTE:
This light shows only that the parking brake is applied. It does not show the degree
of brake application.
WARNING!
Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is dangerous. Part of the brake system
may have failed. It will take longer to stop the vehicle. You could have a collision.
Have the vehicle checked immediately.
211
- Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)

The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is part of an onboard diagnostic system called
OBD II that monitors engine and automatic transmission control systems. The light
will illuminate when the key is in the ON/RUN position before engine start. If the bulb
does not come on when turning the key from OFF to ON/RUN, have the condition
checked promptly.
Certain conditions, poor fuel quality, etc., may illuminate the light after engine start.
The vehicle should be serviced if the light stays on through several of your typical
driving cycles. In most situations, the vehicle will drive normally and will not require
towing.
CAUTION!
Prolonged driving with the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) on could cause
damage to the engine control system. It also could affect fuel economy and
driveability. If the MIL is flashing, severe catalytic converter damage and power
loss will soon occur. Immediate service is required.
WARNING!
A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as referenced above, can reach higher
temperatures than in normal operating conditions. This can cause a fire if you
drive slowly or park over flammable substances such as dry plants, wood,
cardboard, etc. This could result in death or serious injury to the driver, occupants
or others.
- Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Indicator Light

The ESC OFF indicator will illuminate when the Electronic Stability Control (ESC) is
turned off.
- Charging System Light

This light shows the status of the electrical charging system. If the charging system
light remains on, it means that the vehicle is experiencing a problem with the
charging system.
We recommend you do not continue driving if the charging system light is on. Have
the vehicle serviced immediately.
- Oil Pressure Warning Light

This light indicates low engine oil pressure. If the light turns on while driving, stop
the vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible. A chime will sound for four
minutes when this light turns on.
We recommend you do not operate the vehicle or engine damage will occur. Have the
212
- Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Light

This light monitors the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS). The light will turn on when the
ignition switch is turned to the ON/RUN position and may stay on for as long as four
seconds.
If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving, it indicates that the Anti-Lock
portion of the brake system is not functioning and that service is required. However,
the conventional brake system will continue to operate normally if the BRAKE
warning light is not on.
If the ABS light is on, the brake system should be serviced as soon as possible to
restore the benefits of Anti-Lock brakes. If the ABS light does not turn on when the
ignition switch is turned to the ON/RUN position, have the light inspected by an
authorized dealer.
- Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Light

This light informs you of a problem with the Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) system.
If a problem is detected, the light will come on while the engine is running. Cycle the
ignition when the vehicle has completely stopped and the shift lever is placed in the
PARK position; the light should turn off.
If the light remains lit with the engine running, your vehicle will usually be drivable;
however, see an authorized service center immediately. If the light is flashing when
the engine is running, immediate service is required and you may experience reduced
performance, an elevated/rough idle or engine stall and your vehicle may require
towing.
- Air Bag Warning Light

This light will turn on for four to eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition
switch is first turned to the ON/RUN position. If the light is either not on during
starting, stays on, or turns on while driving, have the system inspected at an
authorized dealer as soon as possible. Refer to “Occupant Restraints” in “Things To
Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” in your Owner’s Manual on the DVD for further
information.
NOTE:
The Air Bag System is designed to be maintenance free.
- SERV (Service) 4WD Indicator Light

The SERV 4WD light monitors the electric shift four-wheel drive system. If the SERV
4WD light stays on or comes on during driving, it means that the four-wheel drive
system is not functioning properly and that service is required.
For vehicles equipped with a premium cluster, this indicator will display in the Driver
Information Display (DID).
213
- Transmission Temperature Warning Light

This light indicates that there is excessive transmission fluid temperature that might
occur with severe usage such as trailer towing. If this light turns on, stop the vehicle
and run the engine at idle, with the transmission in NEUTRAL, until the light turns
off. Once the light turns off, you may continue to drive normally.
CAUTION!
Continuous driving with the Transmission Temperature Warning Light illuminated
will eventually cause severe transmission damage or transmission failure.
WARNING!
If you continue operating the vehicle when the Transmission Temperature Warning
Light is illuminated you could cause the fluid to boil over, come in contact with hot
engine or exhaust components and cause a fire.
Oil Change Indicator

Message
If an “oil change” message (shown as “Change Oil Soon” and “Oil Change Needed”)
appears and a single chime sounds, it is time for your next required oil change.
Resetting The Light After Servicing
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position (do not start engine).
2. Fully depress the accelerator pedal three times within 10 seconds.
3. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF/LOCK position.
- Low Coolant Level Indicator Light

This light indicates low coolant level. If the light turns on while driving, stop the
vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible.
We recommend you do not operate the vehicle or engine damage will occur. Have the
214
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER INDICATOR LIGHTS

– Turn Signal Indicator
The arrows will flash with the exterior turn signals when the turn signal lever is
operated. A tone will chime, and a EVIC/DID message will appear if either turn signal
is left on for more than 1 mile (1.6 km).
NOTE:
If either indicator flashes at a rapid rate, check for a defective outside light bulb.
– High Beam Indicator

Indicates that headlights are on high beam.
– Park/Headlight ON Indicator
This indicator will illuminate when the park lights or headlights are turned on.
– Front Fog Light Indicator

This indicator will illuminate when the front fog lights are on.
– Vehicle Security Light

This light will flash rapidly for approximately 15 seconds when the vehicle security
alarm is arming. The light will flash at a slower speed continuously after the alarm is
set. The security light will also come on for about three seconds when the ignition is
first turned on.
— Tow/Haul Mode
Indicates that the Tow/Haul Mode is active.
— Four Wheel Drive Auto

Indicates that the Four Wheel Drive has engaged automatically.
– Electronic Stability Control OFF

This light indicates the ESC system has been turned off by the driver.
— Cargo Light
Indicates that the rear cargo light is on.
— Door Ajar
Indicates that one of the vehicles doors is open.
215
Electronic Speed Control Set

Indicates that the Electronic Speed Control has been set.
- Fuel Cap/Loose Gas Cap Message

If a “gas cap” message appears, tighten the gas cap until a “clicking” sound is heard.
Push the odometer reset button to turn the message off.
If the message continues to appear for more than three days after tightening the gas
cap, see your authorized service center.
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS

In any of the following situations, you can reduce the potential for overheating by
taking the appropriate action.
• On the highways — slow down.
• In city traffic — while stopped, place the transmission in NEUTRAL, but do not
increase the engine idle speed while preventing vehicle motion with the brakes.
NOTE:
There are steps that you can take to slow down an impending overheat condition:
• If your air conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off. The A/C system adds heat to the
engine cooling system and turning the A/C off can help remove this heat.
• You can also turn the temperature control to maximum heat, the mode control to floor
and the blower control to high. This allows the heater core to act as a supplement to
the radiator and aids in removing heat from the engine cooling system.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot cooling system could damage your vehicle. If the temperature
gauge reads HOT (H), pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the air
conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back into the normal range. If the
pointer remains on HOT (H), and you hear continuous chimes, turn the engine off
immediately and call for service.
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot engine coolant (antifreeze) or steam from
your radiator. If you see or hear steam coming from under the hood, do not open
the hood until the radiator has had time to cool. Never try to open a cooling system
pressure cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.
216
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING

Jack Location
The jack and jack tools are stored under the front passenger seat.
Removal Of Jack And Tools

• To access the jack and jack tools you must remove the plastic access cover,
located on the side of the seat. To remove the cover, pull the front part of the cover
(closest to the front of the seat) toward you to release a locking tab. Once the front
of the cover is loose, slide the cover toward the front of the seat until it is free from
the seat frame.
Jack And Tools Location

1500 Series Trucks
• Remove the jack and tool bag by removing the wing bolt and sliding the jack and
tool bag from under the seat.
Wing Bolt Location
217
2500/3500 Series Trucks
• Remove the jack and tool bracket assembly by removing the wing bolt and sliding
the jack and tool bracket assembly from under the seat.
Jack And Tool Bracket Assembly
Removing The Spare Tire

• Remove the spare tire before attempting to jack up the truck. Attach the wheel
wrench to the jack extension tube. Insert the tube through the access hole between
the lower tailgate and the top of the bumper and into the winch mechanism tube.
Rotate the wheel wrench handle counterclockwise until the spare tire is on the
ground with enough cable slack to allow you to pull it out from under the vehicle.
When the spare is clear, tilt the retainer at the end of the cable and pull it through
the center of the wheel.
NOTE:
Always stow the spare tire with the valve stem facing the ground.
• It is recommended that you stow the
flat or spare to avoid tangling the loose
cable.
NOTE:
The winch mechanism is designed for
use with the jack extension tube only.
Use of an air wrench or other power tools
is not recommended and can damage the
winch.
Wheel Wrench/Spare Tire

1 — Wheel 2 — Spare Tire
Wrench
218
Preparations
1. Park the vehicle on a firm, level surface. Avoid ice or slippery areas.
2. Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.
3. Set the parking brake.
4. Place the shift lever into PARK. On four-wheel drive vehicles, shift the transfer
case to the 4L position.
5. Turn the ignition OFF.
• Block both the front and rear of the wheel diagonally opposite the jacking position.
For example, if the right front wheel is being changed, block the left rear wheel.
NOTE:
Passengers should not remain in the ve-
hicle when the vehicle is being jacked.
Wheel Blocked
Instructions
1. Remove the spare wheel, jack, and
tools from storage.
2. Using the wheel wrench, loosen, but
do not remove, the wheel nuts by
turning them counterclockwise one
turn while the wheel is still on the
ground.
Warning Label
219
3. Placement of the jack:
1500 Series Trucks
• When changing a front wheel, place the scissors jack under the rear portion of the
lower control arm as shown below.
Front 4x2 Jacking Location
Front 4x4 Jacking Location
220
• Operate the jack using the jack drive tube and the wheel wrench. The tube
extension may be used but is not required.
• For 4x2 and 4x4 trucks, when changing a rear wheel, assemble the jack drive tube
to the jack and connect the drive tube to the extension tube. Place the jack under
the axle between the wheel and the shock bracket with the drive tubes extending
to the rear.
Rear 4x4 Jacking Location
• Connect the jack tube extension and wheel wrench.
221
• For 2500/3500 4x2 series trucks, when changing a front wheel, place the bottle
jack under the frame rail behind the wheel. Locate the jack as far forward as
possible on the straight part of the frame.
Jacking Location
• Operate the jack using the jack drive tube and the wheel wrench. The tube
extension, may be used, but is not required.
222
• For 2500/3500 4x4 series trucks, when changing the front wheel, assemble the
jack drive tube to the jack and connect the drive tube to the extension tube. Place
the jack under the axle as close to the tire as possible with the drive tubes
extending to the front. Connect the jack tube extension and wheel wrench.
• For 4x2 and 4x4 trucks, when changing
a rear wheel, assemble the jack drive
tube to the jack and connect the drive
tube to the extension tube. Place the
jack under the axle between the spring
and the shock absorber with the drive
tubes extending to the rear.
• Connect the jack tube extension and
wheel wrench.
NOTE:
If the bottle jack will not lower by turning
the dial (thumbwheel) by hand, it may be
necessary to use the jack drive tube in
order to lower the jack. Front Jacking Location
• By rotating the wheel wrench clock-
wise, raise the vehicle until the wheel
just clears the surface.
• Remove the wheel nuts and pull the
wheel off. On single rear-wheel (SRW)
trucks, install the spare wheel and
wheel nuts with the cone shaped end
of the wheel nuts toward the wheel. On
3500 dual rear-wheel models (DRW)
the wheel nuts are a two-piece assem-
bly with a flat face. Lightly tighten the
wheel nuts. To avoid the risk of forcing
the vehicle off the jack, do not fully
tighten the wheel nuts until the vehicle
has been lowered. Rear Jacking Location
• Using the lug wrench, finish tighten-
ing the wheel nuts using a crisscross pattern. The correct wheel nut tightness is
130 ft lbs (176 N·m) torque (1500 Series), 135 ft lbs (183 N·m) torque for
2500/3500 single-rear wheel (SRW) models, and 140 ft lbs (190 N·m) for 3500
dual rear-wheel models. If in doubt about the correct tightness, have them
checked with a torque wrench by your authorized dealer or at a service station.
• Install the wheel center cap and remove the wheel blocks. Do not install chrome
or aluminum wheel center caps on the spare wheel. This may result in cap damage.
223
• Lower the jack to its fully closed position. If the bottle jack will not lower by turning
the dial (thumbwheel) by hand, it may be necessary to use the jack drive tube in order
to lower the jack. Stow the replaced tire, jack, and tools as previously described.
• Adjust the tire pressure when possible.
NOTE:
Do not oil wheel studs. For chrome wheels, do not substitute with chrome plated
wheel nuts.
Reinstalling The Jack And Tools

1500 Series Trucks
1. Tighten the jack all the way down by turning the jack turn-screw clockwise until
the jack is snug.
2. Position the jack and tool bag. Make sure the lug wrench is under the jack near the
jack turn-screw.
3. Secure the tool bag straps to the jack.
Jack And Tool Bag
224
4. Place the jack and tools in the storage position holding the jack by the jack
turn-screw, slip the jack and tools under the seat so that the bottom slot engages
into the fastener on the floor.
NOTE:
Ensure that the jack slides into the front
hold down location.
Floor Fastener Location
5. Turn the wing bolt clockwise to secure to the floor pan. Reinstall the plastic cover.
Wing Bolt Location
225
1. Tighten the jack all the way down by turning the jack turn-screw clockwise until
the jack is snug.
2. Position the jack and tools into bracket assembly. Make sure the lug wrench is
under the jack near the jack turn-screw. Snap tools into bracket assembly clips.
Install the jack into bracket assembly and turn screw until jack is snug into
bracket assembly.
3. Place the jack and tool bracket assembly in the storage position holding the jack
by the jack turn-screw, slip the jack and tools under the seat so that the bottom
slot engages into the fastener on the floor.
NOTE:
Ensure that the jack and tool bracket
assembly slides into the front hold down
location.
4. Turn the wing bolt clockwise to secure
to the floor pan. Reinstall the plastic
cover.
Floor Fastener Location
Hub Caps/Wheel Covers

• The hub caps must be removed before raising the vehicle off the ground.
• For single rear-wheel (SRW) models, use the blade on the end of the lug wrench
to pry the hub cap off. Insert the blade end into the pry-off notch and carefully pop
off the hub cap with a back-and-forth motion.
• On models with dual rear wheels (DRW), you must first remove the hub caps. The jack
handle driver has a hook at one end that will fit in the pry off notch of the rear hub
caps. Position the hook and pull out on the ratchet firmly. The hub cap should pop off.
The wheel skins can now be removed. For the front hub cap use the blade on the end
of the lug wrench to pry the caps off. The wheel skin can now be removed.
• You must use the flat end of the lug wrench to pry off the wheel skins. Insert the
flat tip completely and using a back-and-forth motion, loosen the wheel skin.
Repeat this procedure around the tire until the skin pops off.
• Replace the wheel skins first using a rubber mallet. When replacing the hub caps,
tilt the cap retainer over the lug nut bolt circle and strike the high side down with
a rubber mallet. Be sure that the hub caps and wheel skins are firmly seated
around the wheel.
226
Wheel Nuts
All wheel nuts should be tightened occasionally to eliminate the possibility of wheel
studs being sheared or the bolt holes in the wheels becoming elongated. This is
especially important during the first few hundred miles/kilometers of operation to
allow the wheel nuts to become properly set. All wheel nuts should first be firmly
seated against the wheel. The wheel nuts should then be tightened to recommended
torque. Tighten the wheel nuts to final torque in increments. Progress around the bolt
circle, tightening the wheel nut opposite to the wheel nut just previously tightened
until final torque is achieved.
Recommended torques are shown in the following chart:
Disc Wheels
Nut Type Stud Size Hex Size Torque Ft Lbs Torque Newton
Meters
Cone M14 x 1.5 22 mm 130 176
Flanged M14 x 1.5 22 mm 140 190
8-Stud — Dual Rear Wheels

• Dual wheels are flat-mounted and center-piloted. The lug nuts are a two-piece
assembly. When the tires are being rotated or replaced, clean these lug nuts and
add two drops of oil at the interface between the hex and the washer.
• Slots in the wheels will assist in prop-
erly orienting the inner and outer
wheels. Align these slots when assem-
bling the wheels for best access to the
tire valve on the inner wheel. The tires
of both dual wheels must be com-
pletely off the ground when tightening,
to ensure wheel centering and maxi-
mum wheel clamping.
• Dual wheel models require a special
heavy-duty lug nut tightening adapter
(included with the vehicle) to correctly
tighten the lug nuts. Also, when it is
necessary to remove and install dual
rear wheels, use a proper vehicle lifting Oil Interface Location
device.
NOTE:
When installing a spare tire as part of a dual rear wheel end combination, the tire
diameter of the two individual tires must be compared. If there is a significant
difference, the larger tire should be installed in a front location. The correct direction
of rotation for dual tire installations must also be observed.
227
These dual rear wheels should be tightened as follows:
1. Tighten the wheel nuts in the num-
bered sequence to a snug fit.
2. Retighten the wheel nuts in the same
sequence to the torques listed in the
table. Go through the sequence a sec-
ond time to verify that specific torque
has been achieved. Retighten to
specifications at 100 miles (160 km)
and after 500 miles (800 km).
• It is recommended that wheel stud nuts
be kept torqued to specifications at all
times. Torque wheel stud nuts to speci-
fications at each lubrication interval.
Wheel Nuts Numbered Sequence
To Stow The Flat Or Spare
NOTE:
RAM 1500 vehicles equipped with aluminum wheels cannot be stored under the vehicle
because the wheel retainer will not fit through the wheel pilot hole. Secure the flat tire
in the bed of the truck. Have the flat tire repaired or replaced immediately.
• Turn the wheel so that the valve stem is down. Slide the wheel retainer through the
center of the wheel and position it properly across the wheel opening.
• For convenience in checking the spare tire inflation, stow with the valve stem
toward the rear of the vehicle.
• Attach the wheel wrench to the extension tube. Rotate the winch mechanism until
the wheel is drawn into place against the underside of the vehicle. Continue to
rotate until you feel the winch mechanism slip, or click three or four times. It
cannot be overtightened. Push against the tire several times to be sure it is firmly
in place.
CAUTION!
• Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on locations other than those
indicated in the Jacking Instructions for this vehicle.
• Before raising the wheel off the ground, make sure that the jack will not
damage surrounding truck parts and adjust the jack position as required.
• Use a back and forth motion to remove the hub cap. Do not use a twisting
motion when removing the hub cap, damage to the hub cap; finish may occur.
• The rear hub caps on the dual rear wheel has two pry off notches. Make sure
that the hook of the jack handle driver is located squarely in the cap notch
before attempting to pull off.
228
WARNING!
• Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the vehicle close to moving
traffic. Pull far enough off the road to avoid the danger of being hit when
operating the jack or changing the wheel.
• Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous. The vehicle could slip off the
jack and fall on you. You could be crushed. Never put any part of your body
under a vehicle that is on a jack.
• Never start or run the engine while the vehicle is on a jack. If you need to get
under a raised vehicle, take it to an authorized dealer where it can be raised on
a lift.
• The jack is designed to be used as a tool for changing tires only. The jack
should not be used to lift the vehicle for service purposes. The vehicle should
be jacked on a firm level surface only. Avoid ice or slippery areas.
• Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the vehicle close to moving
traffic, pull far enough off the road to avoid the danger of being hit when
operating the jack or changing the wheel.
• Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to help prevent personal injury or
damage to your vehicle:
• Always park on a firm, level surface as far from the edge of the roadway
as possible before raising the vehicle.
• Turn on the Hazard Warning flashers.
• Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to be raised.
• Set the parking brake firmly and set an automatic transmission in PARK;
a manual transmission in REVERSE.
• Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a jack.
• Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack.
• Only use the jack in the positions indicated and for lifting this vehicle
during a tire change.
• If working on or near a roadway, be extremely careful of motor traffic.
• To assure that spare tires, flat or inflated, are securely stowed, spares
must be stowed with the valve stem facing the ground.
• Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make the vehicle less
stable. It could slip off the jack and hurt someone near it. Raise the ve-
hicle only enough to remove the tire.
• To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do not fully tighten
the wheel bolts until the vehicle has been lowered. Failure to follow this
warning may result in personal injury.
• To avoid possible personal injury, handle the wheel covers with care to
avoid contact with any sharp edges.
• A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or hard stop could en-
danger the occupants of the vehicle. Always stow the jack parts and the
spare tire in the places provided.
• A loose tire thrown forward in a collision or hard stop could injure the
occupants in the vehicle. Have the deflated (flat) tire repaired or re-
placed immediately.
229
JUMP-STARTING PROCEDURES
If your vehicle has a discharged battery it can be jump-started using a set of jumper
cables and a battery in another vehicle or by using a portable battery booster pack.
Jump-starting can be dangerous if done improperly so please follow the procedures
in this section carefully.
NOTE:
When using a portable battery booster pack follow the manufacturer’s operating
instructions and precautions.
CAUTION!
Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any other booster source with a
system voltage greater than 12 Volts or damage to the battery, starter motor,
alternator or electrical system may occur.
WARNING!
Do not attempt jump-starting if the battery is frozen. It could rupture or explode
and cause personal injury.
230
Preparations For Jump-Start

The battery in your vehicle is located in the front of the engine compartment, behind
the left headlight assembly.
NOTE:
The positive battery post is covered with a protective cap. Lift up on the cap to gain
access to the positive battery post. Do not jump off fuses. Only jump directly off
positive post.
Battery Positive Post (Gas Version Shown)

1 — Fuses
2 — Positive Battery Post
WARNING!
• Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan whenever the hood is raised. It can
start anytime the ignition switch is ON. You can be injured by moving fan
blades.
• Remove any metal jewelry such as rings, watch bands and bracelets that could
make an inadvertent electrical contact. You could be seriously injured.
• Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn your skin or eyes and generate
hydrogen gas which is flammable and explosive. Keep open flames or sparks
away from the battery.
1. Set the parking brake, shift the automatic transmission into PARK and turn the
ignition to LOCK.
2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all unnecessary electrical accessories.
3. If using another vehicle to jump-start the battery, park the vehicle within the
jumper cables reach, set the parking brake and make sure the ignition is OFF.
231
WARNING!
Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this could establish a ground
connection and personal injury could result.
Jump-Starting Procedure
WARNING!
Failure to follow this jump-starting procedure could result in personal injury or
property damage due to battery explosion.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these procedures could result in damage to the charging system
of the booster vehicle or the discharged vehicle.
Connecting The Jumper Cables

1. Connect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable to the positive (+) post of the
discharged vehicle.
NOTE:
Do not jump off fuses. Only jump directly off positive post.
2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper cable to the positive (+) post
of the booster battery.
3. Connect the negative (-) end of the jumper cable to the negative (-) post of the
booster battery.
4. Connect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper cable to a good engine ground
(exposed metal part of the discharged vehicle’s engine) away from the battery and
the fuel injection system.
WARNING!
Do not connect the jumper cable to the negative (-) post of the discharged battery. The
resulting electrical spark could cause the battery to explode and could result in personal
injury. Only use the specific ground point, do not use any other exposed metal parts.
5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster battery, let the engine idle a
few minutes, and then start the engine in the vehicle with the discharged battery.
CAUTION!
Do not connect jumper cable to any of the fuses on the positive battery terminal.
The resulting electrical current will blow the fuse.
232
6. Once the engine is started, remove the jumper cables in the reverse sequence:
Disconnecting The Jumper Cables
1. Disconnect the negative (-) end of the jumper cable from the engine ground of the
vehicle with the discharged battery.
2. Disconnect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper cable from the negative (-)
post of the booster battery.
3. Disconnect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable from the positive (+) post of
the booster battery.
4. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper cable from the positive (+)
post of the vehicle with the discharged battery.
If frequent jump-starting is required to start your vehicle you should have the battery
and charging system inspected at your authorized dealer.
CAUTION!
Accessories plugged into the vehicle power outlets draw power from the vehicle’s
battery, even when not in use (i.e., cellular devices, etc.). Eventually, if plugged in
long enough without engine operation, the vehicle’s battery will discharge suffi-
ciently to degrade battery life and/or prevent the engine from starting.
EMERGENCY TOW HOOKS

Your vehicle may be equipped with emergency tow hooks.
NOTE:
For off-road recovery, it is recommended to use both of the front tow hooks to
minimize the risk of damage to the vehicle.
WARNING!
• Do not use a chain for freeing a stuck vehicle. Chains may break, causing
serious injury or death.
• Stand clear of vehicles when pulling with tow hooks. Tow straps may become
disengaged, causing serious injury.
CAUTION!
Tow hooks are for emergency use only to rescue a vehicle stranded off-road. Do not
use tow hooks for tow truck hookup or highway towing. You could damage your
vehicle.
233
SHIFT LEVER OVERRIDE — 6-SPEED TRANSMISSION

If a malfunction occurs and the shift lever cannot be moved out of the PARK position,
you can use one of the following procedures to temporarily move the shift lever:
Column Shifter — If Equipped

1. Turn the engine off.
3. Tilt the steering wheel to the full up position.
4. Push and maintain firm pressure on the brake pedal.
5. Insert a screwdriver or similar tool, into the access port (ringed circle) on the
bottom of the steering column and push and hold the override release lever up.
6. Move the shift lever to the NEUTRAL
position.
7. The vehicle may then be started in
NEUTRAL.
Shift Lock Manual Override Access Port
234
Center Console Shifter — If Equipped

1. Turn the engine off.
3. Using a small screwdriver or similar tool, remove the shift lever override access
cover (located to the right of the shift lever).
4. Push and maintain firm pressure on the brake pedal.
5. Insert the screwdriver or similar tool into the access hole, and push and hold the
override release lever down.
6. Move the shift lever to the NEUTRAL
position.
7. The vehicle may then be started in
NEUTRAL.
8. Reinstall the shift lever override ac-
cess cover.
Shift Lever Override Access Cover
235
MANUAL PARK RELEASE — 8 SPEED TRANSMISSION
WARNING!
Always secure your vehicle by fully applying the parking brake, before activating
the Manual Park Release. Activating the Manual Park Release will allow your
vehicle to roll away if it is not secured by the parking brake or by proper connection
to a tow vehicle. Activating the Manual Park Release on an unsecured vehicle
could lead to serious injury or death for those in or around the vehicle.
In order to push or tow the vehicle in cases where the transmission will not shift out
of PARK (such as a dead battery), a Manual Park Release is available.
Follow these steps to activate the Manual Park Release:
2. Using a small screwdriver or similar tool, remove the Manual Park Release access
cover, which is just above the parking brake release handle, below and to the left
of the steering column.
Manual Park Release Access Cover
236
3. Using the screwdriver or similar tool, push the Manual Park Release lever locking
tab (just below the middle of the lever) to the right.
Manual Park Release Lever Locking Tab
4. While holding the locking tab in the disengaged position, pull the tether strap to
rotate the lever rearward, until it locks in place pointing towards the driver's seat.
Release the locking tab and verify that the Manual Park Release lever is locked in
the released position.
5. The vehicle is now out of PARK and
can be towed. Release the parking
brake only when the vehicle is se-
curely connected to a tow vehicle.
Manual Park Release Tether
237
To Reset The Manual Park Release:
1. Push the locking tab to the right, to unlock the lever.
2. Rotate the Manual Park Release lever forward to its original position, until the
locking tab snaps into place to secure the lever.
3. Pull gently on the tether strap to confirm that the lever is locked in its stowed
position.
4. Re-install the access cover.
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE

Towing Wheels OFF
2WD Models 4WD Models
Condition the Ground
• Auto Transmission in
PARK
If transmission is operable: • Manual Transmission
• Transmission in NEUTRAL in gear (NOT NEUTRAL)
Flat Tow NONE
• 30 mph (48 km/h) max • Transfer Case in
• 15 miles (24 km) max NEUTRAL
distance • Tow in FORWARD
direction
Wheel Lift or Front NOT ALLOWED
Dolly Tow Rear OK NOT ALLOWED
Flatbed ALL BEST METHOD BEST METHOD
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE

If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand, or snow, it can often be moved using a rocking
motion. Turn the steering wheel right and left to clear the area around the front wheels.
Then shift back and forth between DRIVE and REVERSE (with automatic transmission) or
2nd gear and REVERSE (with manual transmission), while gently pressing the accelerator.
Use the least amount of accelerator pedal pressure that will maintain the rocking motion,
without spinning the wheels or racing the engine.
NOTE:
For trucks equipped with 8-speed automatic transmission: Shifts between DRIVE
and REVERSE can only be achieved at wheel speeds of 5 mph (8 km/h) or less.
Whenever the transmission remains in NEUTRAL for more than two seconds, you
must push the brake pedal to engage DRIVE or REVERSE.
238
CAUTION!
Racing the engine or spinning the wheels may lead to transmission overheating and
failure. Allow the engine to idle with the transmission in NEUTRAL for at least one
minute after every five rocking-motion cycles. This will minimize overheating and
reduce the risk of clutch or transmission failure during prolonged efforts to free a stuck
vehicle.
NOTE:
Push the "ESC Off" switch, to place the Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system in
"Partial Off" mode, before rocking the vehicle. Refer to “Electronic Brake Control” in
“Starting And Operating” for further information. Once the vehicle has been freed,
push the "ESC Off" switch again to restore "ESC On" mode.
CAUTION!
• When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by shifting between DRIVE/2nd gear and
REVERSE, do not spin the wheels faster than 15 mph (24 km/h), or drivetrain
damage may result.
• Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too fast may lead to transmission
overheating and failure. It can also damage the tires. Do not spin the wheels
above 30 mph (48 km/h) while in gear (no transmission shifting occurring).
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated by excessive wheel speeds
may cause damage, or even failure, of the axle and tires. A tire could explode and
injure someone. Do not spin your vehicle's wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h)
or for longer than 30 seconds continuously without stopping when you are stuck
and do not let anyone near a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
239
ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE SYSTEM (EARS)

This vehicle is equipped with an Enhanced Accident Response System.
Please refer to “Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) — Air Bags” in “Getting
Started” in this guide for further information on the Enhanced Accident Response
System (EARS) function.
EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR)

This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an
EDR is to record, in certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air bag
deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in understanding how a
vehicle’s systems performed.
Please refer to “Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) — Air Bags” in “Getting
Started” in this guide for further information on the Event Data Recorder (EDR).
240
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD

To open the hood, two latches must be released.
1. Pull the hood release lever located below the steering wheel at the base of the
instrument panel.
2. Reach into the opening beneath the
center of the hood and push the safety
latch lever to the left to release it,
before raising the hood.
Hood Release Lever Location
CAUTION!
To prevent possible damage, do not slam the hood to close it. Use a firm downward
push at the front center of the hood to ensure that both latches engage.
WARNING!
Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving your vehicle. If the hood is not fully
latched, it could open when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision. Failure
to follow this warning could result in serious injury or death.
241
ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 3.6L
1. Air Cleaner Filter

2. Engine Oil Fill (Under Cover)
3. Brake Fluid Reservoir
4. Battery
5. Power Distribution Center (Fuses)
242
6. Washer Fluid Reservoir

7. Engine Coolant Reservoir
8. Engine Coolant Pressure Cap
9. Engine Oil Dipstick
243

2. Transmission Fluid Dipstick
3. Engine Oil Fill
5. Battery
244

10. Engine Coolant Pressure Cap
245

3. Engine Oil Fill
5. Aux Power Distribution Center (Fuses)
6. Battery
246

9. Power Steering Reservoir
247
ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 3.0L DIESEL

2. Engine Oil Fill
5. Battery
248

249
ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 6.7L DIESEL WITH 68RFE TRANSMISSION
1. Batteries
250
7. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir

10. Engine Oil Fill
251
ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 6.7L DIESEL WITH AS69RC TRANSMISSION
1. Batteries
252

8. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir
10. Engine Oil Fill
253
FLUID CAPACITIES — GAS ENGINE

U.S. Metric
Fuel (Approximate)
1500 Regular Cab Shortbed/Crew Quad Cab Models 26 Gallons 98 Liters
1500 Regular Cab Longbed/Crew Quad Cab Models
32 Gallons 121 Liters
(Optional)
2500/3500 Shortbed Models 31 Gallons 117 Liters
2500/3500 Longbed Models 32 Gallons 121 Liters
Engine Oil With Filter
3.6L Engine (We recommend you use SAE 5W-20,
6 Quarts 5.6 Liters
API Certified)
5.7L Engines (We recommend you use
7 Quarts 6.6 Liters
SAE 5W-20, API Certified)
5.7L Engine (We recommend you use SAE 5W-30,
API Certified), for 2500/3500 trucks operating
7 Quarts 6.6 Liters
under a gross combined weight rating greater than
14,000 lbs (6 350 kg).
6.4L Engines (We recommend you use SAE 0W-40
engine oil meeting the requirements of FCA Mate-
7 Quarts 6.6 Liters
rial Standard MS-12633 for use in all operating
temperatures.)
Cooling System
3.6L Engine (We recommend you use MOPAR
Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula
13.7 Quarts 13 Liters
that meets the requirements of FCA Material
Standard MS.90032.)
5.7L Engine – 1500 Models (We recommend
you use MOPAR Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/
18.3 Quarts 17.3 Liters
150,000 Mile Formula that meets the require-
ments of FCA Material Standard MS.90032.)
5.7L Engine – 2500/3500 Models (We recom-
mend you use MOPAR Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/
6.4 Liter Engine – 2500/3500 Models (We recom-
mend you use MOPAR Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/
254
FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS, AND GENUINE PARTS — GAS ENGINE

Engine
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Engine Coolant We recommend you use MOPAR Antifreeze/Coolant 10
Year/150,000 Mile Formula OAT (Organic Additive Tech-
nology).
Engine Oil – 3.6L Engine We recommend you use API Certified SAE 5W-20 Engine
Oil, meeting the requirements of FCA Material Standard
MS-6395 such as MOPAR, Pennzoil, and Shell Helix.
Refer to your engine oil filler cap for correct SAE grade.
MOPAR SAE 5W-30 engine oil approved to FCA Material
Standard MS-6395 may be used when SAE 5W-20 engine
oil meeting MS-6395 is not available.
Oil, meeting the requirements of FCA Material Standard
MS-6395 such as MOPAR, Pennzoil, and Shell Helix.
Refer to your engine oil filler cap for correct SAE grade.
2500/3500 trucks operat- Oil, meeting the requirements of FCA Material Standard
ing under a gross combined MS-6395 such as MOPAR, Pennzoil, Shell Helix or
weight rating greater than equivalent. Refer to your engine oil filler cap for correct
14,000 lbs/(6,350 kg.) SAE grade.
Engine Oil – 6.4L For best performance and maximum protection under all
types of operating conditions, the manufacturer only rec-
ommends full synthetic engine oils that meet the Ameri-
can Petroleum Institute (API) categories of SN. The manu-
facturer recommends the use of Pennzoil Ultra 0W-40 or
equivalent MOPAR engine oil meeting the requirements of
FCA Material Standard MS-12633 for use in all operating
temperatures.
Engine Oil Filter We recommend you use MOPAR brand Engine Oil Filters.
Spark Plugs We recommend you use MOPAR Spark Plugs.
Fuel Selection – 87 Octane, 0-15% Ethanol.
3.6L Engine
Fuel Selection – 3.6L Flex 87 Octane, Up To 85% Ethanol.
Fuel (E-85) Engine –
If Equipped
Fuel Selection – 89 Octane Recommended - 87 Octane Acceptable,
5.7L/6.4L Engines 0-15% Ethanol.
255
CAUTION!
• Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than specified Organic Additive
Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze), may result in engine damage and
may decrease corrosion protection. Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine
coolant is different and should not be mixed with Hybrid Organic Additive
Technology (HOAT) engine coolant (antifreeze) or any “globally compatible”
coolant (antifreeze). If a non-OAT engine coolant (antifreeze) is introduced into
the cooling system in an emergency, the cooling system will need to be drained,
flushed, and refilled with fresh OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032), by an
authorized dealer as soon as possible.
• Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) products.
Do not use additional rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not be
compatible with the radiator engine coolant and may plug the radiator.
• This vehicle has not been designed for use with propylene glycol-based engine
coolant (antifreeze). Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze)
is not recommended.
E-85 Flexible Fuel — 3.6L Engine Only

E-85 General Information
The information in this section is unique for Flexible Fuel vehicles only. These
vehicles can be identified by a unique fuel filler door label that states Ethanol (E-85)
or Unleaded Gasoline Only and a yellow fuel cap. Refer to the Owner’s Manual on the
CAUTION!
Only vehicles with the E-85 fuel filler door label or a yellow gas cap can operate on
E-85.
Chassis
Automatic Transmission – Use only MOPAR ZF 8&9 Speed ATF Automatic Transmis-
Eight-Speed Automatic sion Fluid, or equivalent. Failure to use the correct fluid
may affect the function or performance of your transmis-
sion.
Automatic Transmission – Use only ATF+4 Automatic Transmission Fluid. Failure to
Six-Speed Automatic with use ATF+4 fluid may affect the function or performance of
Gasoline Engine (For Diesel your transmission. We recommend MOPAR ATF+4 fluid.
Engine see Diesel Supple-
ment)
Transfer Case We recommend you use MOPAR BW44–44 Transfer Case
Fluid.
256

Front Axle – 1500 We recommend you use MOPAR GL-5 Synthetic Axle
Four-Wheel Drive Models Lubricant SAE 75W-85.
Rear Axle – 1500 Models We recommend you use MOPAR Synthetic Gear Lubricant
SAE 75W-140 (MS-8985). Limited-Slip Rear Axles re-
quire the addition of 5 oz. (148 ml) MOPAR Limited Slip
Additive (MS-10111).
Front and Rear Axle – We recommend you use Synthetic, GL-5 SAE, 75W-90.
2500/3500 Models Limited slip additive is not required for Limited-Slip Rear
Axles.
Brake Master Cylinder We recommend you use MOPAR DOT 3. If DOT 3 brake
fluid is not available, then DOT 4 is acceptable.
Power Steering Reservoir – We recommend you use MOPAR Power Steering Fluid +4
2500/3500 Models or MOPAR ATF+4 Automatic Transmission Fluid.
FLUID CAPACITIES — 1500 3.0L DIESEL

U.S. Metric
Fuel (Approximate)
3.0L Diesel Engine 26 Gallons 98.5 Liters
Diesel Exhaust Fluid Tank 8 Gallons 30.3 Liters
3.0L Liter Diesel Engine (SAE 5W-30
10.5 Quarts 10 Liters
Synthetic, API Certified Low Ash)
Cooling System
3.0L Turbo Diesel Engine (MOPAR Engine
Coolant/Antifreeze 10 Year/150,000 Mile 11.6 Quarts 11 Liters
Formula OAT (Organic Additive Technology))
FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS, AND GENUINE PARTS — 1500 3.0L DIESEL

Engine
Engine We recommend you use MOPAR Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/
Coolant 150,000 Mile Formula OAT (Organic Additive Technology).
Only use ACEA C3 5W-30 Synthetic Low Ash engine oil meeting FCA
Engine Oil Material Standard MS-11106 or Pennzoil Ultra Euro L full synthetic
5W-30 motor oil.
Engine Oil
We recommend you use MOPAR Engine Oil Filters.
Filter
We recommend you use MOPAR Fuel Filter. Must meet 3 micron rating.
Fuel Filters Using a fuel filter that does not meet the manufacturers filtration and water
separating requirements can severely impact fuel system life and reliability.
257

Use good quality diesel fuel from a reputable supplier in your vehicle.
Federal law requires that you must fuel this vehicle with Ultra Low
Sulfur Highway Diesel fuel (15 ppm Sulfur maximum) and prohibits
the use of Low Sulfur Highway Diesel fuel (500 ppm Sulfur maximum)
to avoid damage to the emissions control system.
For most year-round service, No. 2 diesel fuel meeting ASTM specifi-
Fuel Selection cation D-975 Grade S15 will provide good performance. We recom-
mend you use a blend of up to 5% biodiesel, meeting ASTM specifi-
cation D-975 with your diesel engine.This vehicle is compatible with
biodiesel blends greater than 5% but no greater than 20% biodiesel
meeting ASTM specification D-7467 provided the shortened maintenance
intervals are followed as directed.
MOPAR Diesel Exhaust Fluid (API Certified) (DEF) or equivalent that
Diesel Exhaust
has been API Certified to the ISO 22241 standard. Use of fluids not
Fluid
API Certified to ISO 22241 may result in system damage.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is exposed to extreme cold (below 20°F or -7°C), or is required to
operate at colder-than-normal conditions for prolonged periods, use climatized No. 2
diesel fuel or dilute the No. 2 diesel fuel with 50% No. 1 diesel fuel. This will provide
better protection from fuel gelling or wax-plugging of the fuel filter.
CAUTION!
is not recommended.
258
Chassis
Automatic Transmission Only use MOPAR ZF 8&9 Speed ATF Automatic Transmis-
sion Fluid or equivalent. Failure to use the correct fluid may
affect the function or performance of your transmission.
Transfer Case We recommend you use MOPAR BW44–44 Transfer Case
Fluid.
Front Axle – 1500 We recommend you use MOPAR GL-5 Synthetic Axle
Four-Wheel Drive Models Lubricant SAE 75W-85.
Rear Axle We recommend you use MOPAR Synthetic Gear Lubricant
SAE 75W-140 (MS-8985). Limited-Slip Rear Axles re-
quire the addition of 5 oz. (148 ml) MOPAR Limited Slip
Additive (MS-10111).
Brake Master Cylinder We recommend you use MOPAR DOT 3 Brake Fluid, SAE
J1703 should be used. If DOT 3, SAE J1703 brake fluid
is not available, then DOT 4 is acceptable.
FLUID CAPACITIES — 6.7L CUMMINS DIESEL ENGINE

U.S. Metric
Fuel (Approximate)
2500/3500 Standard Cab Longbed Models 28 Gallons 106 Liters
2500/3500 Crew/Mega Cab Shortbed
Models
2500/3500 Crew Cab Longbed Models 32 Gallons 132 Liters
Standard Rear Tank – Chassis Cab Only 52 Gallons 197 Liters
Optional Midship Tank – Chassis Cab
Only
Diesel Exhaust Fluid Tank (Approximate)
5.5 Gallons 21 Liters
– 2500/3500 Models
Diesel Exhaust Fluid Tank (Approximate)
9 Gallons 34 Liters
– Chassis Cab
6.7L Turbo Diesel Engine 12 Quarts 11.4 Liters
Cooling System
6.7L Turbo Diesel Engine (MOPAR Engine
Coolant/Antifreeze 10 Year/150,000 Mile 5.7 Gallons 21.4 Liters
Formula)
259
FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS, AND GENUINE PARTS — 6.7L CUMMINS DIESEL

ENGINE
Engine
We recommend you use MOPAR Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/
Engine Coolant
150,000 Mile Formula OAT (Organic Additive Technology).
In ambient temperatures above 0°F (-18°C), we recommend you use
15W-40 engine oil such as MOPAR, Shell Rotella and Shell Rimula
that meets FCA Materials Standard MS-10902 and the API CJ-4
engine oil category is required. Products meeting Cummins CES
20081 may also be used. The identification of these engine oils is
Engine Oil typically located on the back of the oil container.
In ambient temperatures below 0°F (-18°C), we recommend you use
5W-40 synthetic engine oil such as MOPAR, Shell Rotella and Shell
Rimula that meets FCA Materials Standard MS-10902 and the API
CJ-4 engine oil category is required.
Engine Oil Filter We recommend you use MOPAR Engine Oil Filters.
We recommend you use MOPAR Fuel Filter. Must meet 3 micron
rating. Using a fuel filter that does not meet the manufacturers filtration
Fuel Filters
and water separating requirements can severely impact fuel system life
and reliability.
Crankcase Ven-
We recommend you use MOPAR CCV Filter.
tilation Filter
Use good quality diesel fuel from a reputable supplier in your vehicle.
Federal law requires that you must fuel this vehicle with Ultra Low
Sulfur Highway Diesel fuel (15 ppm Sulfur maximum) and prohibits
the use of Low Sulfur Highway Diesel fuel (500 ppm Sulfur maximum)
to avoid damage to the emissions control system.
For most year-round service, No. 2 diesel fuel meeting ASTM specifi-
cation D-975 Grade S15 will provide good performance.
If the vehicle is exposed to extreme cold (below 20°F or -7°C), or is
Fuel Selection required to operate at colder-than-normal conditions for prolonged
periods, use climatized No. 2 diesel fuel or dilute the No. 2 diesel fuel
with 50% No. 1 diesel fuel. This will provide better protection from
fuel gelling or wax-plugging of the fuel filters.
This vehicle is fully compatible with biodiesel blends up to 5% biodiesel
meeting ASTM specification D-975. Chassis Cab models and Pickup
models configured with optional B20 capability, are additionally com-
patible with 20% biodiesel meeting ASTM specification D-7467 pro-
vided the shortened maintenance intervals are followed as directed.
MOPAR Diesel Exhaust Fluid (API Certified) (DEF) or equivalent that
has been API Certified to the ISO 22241 standard. Use of fluids not
Diesel Exhaust API Certified to ISO 22241 may result in system damage. You can
Fluid receive assistance in locating DEF in the United States by calling
866-RAM-INFO (866-726-4636). In Canada call 1–800–465–2001
(English) or 1–800–387–9983 (French).
260
CAUTION!
is not recommended.
Chassis
Automatic Transmission – If Equipped Only use ATF+4 Automatic Transmission
(Six-Speed 68RFE) – Pickup models with- Fluid. Failure to use ATF+4 fluid may af-
out PTO fect the function or performance of your
transmission. We recommend MOPAR
ATF+4 fluid.
Automatic Transmission – If Equipped Only use MOPAR ASRC Automatic Trans-
(Six-Speed AS69RC) – Pickup models with mission Fluid or equivalent. Failure to use
PTO, and all Chassis Cab models the proper fluid may affect the function or
performance of your transmission.
Transfer Case We recommend you use MOPAR BW44–44
Transfer Case Fluid.
Front and Rear Axle Fluid (2500/3500) We recommend you use Synthetic, GL-5
SAE 75W-85. Limited slip additive is not
required for Limited-Slip Rear Axles.
Front and Rear Axle Fluid (4500/5500) We recommend you use Synthetic, GL-5
SAE 75W-90. Limited slip additive is not
required for Limited-Slip Rear Axles.
Clutch Linkage We recommend you use MOPAR Multi-
Purpose Grease, NLGI Grade 2 E.P. or
equivalent.
Manual Transmission (G-56) – If Equipped We recommend you use MOPAR ATF+4
Automatic Transmission Fluid or equiva-
lent licensed ATF+4 product.
261
MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
For information on the maintenance procedures for your vehicle, please refer to
“Maintenance Procedures” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” in your Owner’s Manual or
applicable supplement on the DVD for further details.
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE — GASOLINE ENGINE

Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic oil change indicator system. The oil
change indicator system will remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for
scheduled maintenance.
Based on engine operation conditions, the oil change indicator message will
illuminate. This means that service is required for your vehicle. Operating conditions
such as frequent short-trips, trailer tow, extremely hot or cold ambient temperatures,
and E85 fuel usage will influence when the “Oil Change Required” message is
displayed. Severe Operating Conditions can cause the change oil message to
illuminate as early as 3,500 miles (5,600 km) since last reset. Have your vehicle
serviced as soon as possible, within the next 500 miles (805 km).
Your authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator message after completing
the scheduled oil change. If a scheduled oil change is performed by someone other
than your authorized dealer, the message can be reset by referring to the steps
described under “Instrument Cluster Warning Lights” in “What To Do In Emergen-
cies” in this guide or “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” or “Driver
Information Display (DID)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” in your
1500 Models Only
NOTE:
Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 10,000 miles
(16,000 km), twelve months or 350 hours of engine run time, whichever comes first.
The 350 hours of engine run or idle time is generally only a concern for fleet
customers.
262
2500 – 3500 Models Only
NOTE:
(13,000 km), twelve months or 350 hours of engine run time, whichever comes first.
The 350 hours of engine run or idle time is generally only a concern for fleet
customers.
Severe Duty All Models Only
NOTE:
Change Engine Oil at 4,000 miles (6,500 km) if the vehicle is operated in a dusty
and off road environment or is operated predominantly at idle or only very low engine
RPM’s. This type of vehicle use is considered Severe Duty.
Once A Month Or Before A Long Trip:
• Check engine oil level
• Check windshield washer fluid level
• Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or damage. Rotate tires at the first
sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before the oil indicator system turns on.
• Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir, brake master cylinder, power
steering (2500/3500 Models Only) and automatic transmission (six-speed only)
and fill as needed
• Check function of all interior and exterior lights
Required Maintenance
Refer to the Maintenance Schedules on the following pages for required mainte-
nance.
At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil Change Indicator System:
• Change oil and filter.
• Rotate the tires. Rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before the oil
indicator system turns on.
• Inspect battery and clean and tighten terminals as required.
• Inspect automatic transmission fluid if equipped with dipstick.
• Inspect brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, hoses and park brake.
• Inspect engine cooling system protection and hoses.
• Inspect exhaust system.
• Inspect engine air cleaner if using in dusty or off-road conditions.
• Lube the front drive shaft fitting (2500/3500 (4x4) models only).
263
Maintenance Chart — Gasoline Engine
264
Mileage or time passed (whichever comes
first)
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Or Kilometers:
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
Additional Inspections
Inspect the CV/Universal joints. X X X X X
Inspect front suspension, tie rod ends,
X X X X X X X
and replace if necessary.
Inspect the front and rear axle surfaces.
If gear oil leakage is suspected, check
the fluid level. If using your vehicle for X X X X X X X
police, taxi, fleet, off-road or frequent
trailer towing, change axle fluid.
Inspect the brake linings, replace as nec-
X X X X X X X
essary.
Adjust parking brake as necessary. X X X X X X X
Inspect transfer case fluid. X X X
Additional Maintenance
Replace engine air filter. X X X X X

Replace spark plugs.** X
Flush and replace the engine coolant at
10 years or 150,000 miles X X
(240,000 km) whichever comes first.
Change automatic transmission fluid and
filter(s) (six-speed automatic only), if
X
using your vehicle for police, taxi, fleet,
or frequent trailer towing.
first)
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Or Kilometers:
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000

X
filter(s) (six-speed automatic only).
Inspect the transfer case fluid, change
for any of the following: police, taxi, X X
fleet, or frequent trailer towing.
Change the transfer case fluid. X
Inspect and replace PCV valve if
X
necessary.
** The spark plug change interval is mileage based only, yearly intervals do not apply.
WARNING!
• You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you have the knowledge and the
right equipment. If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
• Failure to properly inspect and maintain your vehicle could result in a component malfunction and effect vehicle handling and
performance. This could cause an accident.
265
MAINTENANCE RECORD
266
Odometer Date Signature, Authorized Odometer Date Signature, Authorized
Service Center Service Center
20,000 Miles 90,000 Miles
(32,000 km) or (144,000 km) or
2 Years 9 Years
30,000 Miles 100,000 Miles
(48,000 km) or (160,000 km) or
3 Years 10 Years
40,000 Miles 110,000 Miles
(64,000 km) or (176,000 km) or
4 Years 11 Years
50,000 Miles 120,000 Miles
(80,000 km) or (192,000 km) or
5 Years 12 Years
60,000 Miles 130,000 Miles
(96,000 km) or (208,000 km) or
6 Years 13 Years
70,000 Miles 140,000 Miles
(112,000 km) or (224,000 km) or
7 Years 14 Years
80,000 Miles 150,000 Miles

(128,000 km) or (240,000 km) or
8 Years 15 Years
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE — 1500 3.0L DIESEL ENGINE

Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic oil change indicator system. The oil
change indicator system will remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for
scheduled maintenance.
Based on engine operation conditions, the oil change indicator message will
illuminate. This means that service is required for your vehicle. Operating conditions
such as frequent short-trips, trailer tow, extremely hot or cold ambient temperatures
will influence when the “Oil Change Required” message is displayed. Severe
Operating Conditions can cause the change oil message to illuminate as early as
3,500 miles (5,600 km) since last reset. Have your vehicle serviced as soon as
possible, within the next 500 miles (805 km).
NOTE:
(16,000 km) or twelve months, whichever comes first.
267
Once A Month Or Before A Long Trip:
• Check engine oil level
• Check windshield washer fluid level
• Check the tire inflation pressures and look for unusual wear or damage
• Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir, brake master cylinder and power
steering, and fill as needed
• Check function of all interior and exterior lights
Required Maintenance
Refer to the Maintenance Schedules on the following pages for required mainte-
nance.
At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil Change Indicator System:
• Change oil and filter.
• Completely fill the Diesel Exhaust Fluid tank.
• Drain water from fuel filter assembly.
• Rotate the tires. Rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before the oil
indicator system turns on.
• Inspect battery and clean and tighten terminals as required.
• Inspect brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, hoses and park brake.
• Inspect engine cooling system protection and hoses.
• Inspect exhaust system.
• Inspect engine air cleaner if using in dusty or off-road conditions.
268
Maintenance Chart — Diesel Fuel Up To B5 Biodiesel (1500 Diesel)
Mileage or time passed (whichever comes first)
10,000
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Or Kilometers:
16,000
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
Completely fill the Diesel Exhaust Fluid tank. X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
Inspect the CV/Universal joints. X X X X X
Inspect front suspension, tie rod ends, and replace if necessary. X X X X X X X
Inspect the front and rear axle fluid. If gear oil leakage is
suspected, check the fluid level. If using your vehicle for po-
X X X X X X X
lice, taxi, fleet, off-road or frequent trailer towing change the
axle fluid.
Inspect the brake linings, parking brake function. X X X X X X X
Inspect the transfer case fluid. X X X
Drain water from fuel filter assembly. X X X X X X X X X X
Replace fuel filter and drain water from the fuel filter assembly. X X X X X
Replace engine air filter. X X X X X
Flush and replace the engine coolant at 10 years or
X X
150,000 miles (240,000 km) whichever comes first.
Replace accessory drive belt(s). X
Inspect the transfer case fluid, change for any of the follow-
X X
ing: police, taxi, fleet, or frequent trailer towing.
Change transfer case fluid. X
269
270
WARNING!
ADDITIONAL MAINTENANCE — B6 TO B20 BIODIESEL (1500 DIESEL)

NOTE:
• Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 8,000 miles (12 875 km) or six months, whichever comes first when
using Biodiesel blends greater than 5% (B5).
• The owner is required to monitor mileage for B6-B20 biodiesel, the automatic oil change indicator system does not reflect the use
of biofuels.
Additional Maintenance Chart — B6 to B20 Biodiesel (1500 Diesel)
Mileage or time passed (whichever comes first)
10,000
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Or Kilometers:
16,000
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
Additional B6 to B20 Maintenance

Replace fuel filter and drain water from the fuel filter assembly. X X X X X X X
WARNING!
271
MAINTENANCE RECORD
272
(32,000 km) or (144,000 km) or
2 Years 9 Years
30,000 Miles 100,000 Miles
(48,000 km) or (160,000 km) or
3 Years 10 Years
40,000 Miles 110,000 Miles
(64,000 km) or (176,000 km) or
4 Years 11 Years
50,000 Miles 120,000 Miles
(80,000 km) or (192,000 km) or
5 Years 12 Years
60,000 Miles 130,000 Miles
(96,000 km) or (208,000 km) or
6 Years 13 Years
70,000 Miles 140,000 Miles
(112,000 km) or (224,000 km) or
7 Years 14 Years
80,000 Miles 150,000 Miles

(128,000 km) or (240,000 km) or
8 Years 15 Years
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE — 6.7L CUMMINS DIESEL ENGINE
CAUTION!
Failure to perform the required maintenance items may result in damage to the
vehicle.
At Each Stop For Fuel

Check the engine oil level at least 30 minutes after a fully warmed engine is shut off.
Checking the oil level while the vehicle is on level ground will improve the accuracy
of the oil level reading. Add oil only when the level is at or below the ADD or MIN
mark.
Once A Month
• Inspect the batteries, and clean and tighten the terminals as required.
• Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir, brake master cylinder, and
automatic transmission (if equipped), and add as needed.
At Each Oil Change
• Change the engine oil filter.
• Inspect the exhaust system.
• Inspect engine air filter.
• Check the coolant level, hoses, and clamps.
• Lubricate outer tie rod ends.
Inspection and service should also be performed anytime a malfunction is observed
or suspected. Retain all receipts.
273
Oil Change Indicator System — Cummins Diesel

Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change indicator system. This system will
alert you when it is time to change your engine oil by displaying the words “Oil
Change Due” on your Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) or Driver Infor-
mation Display (DID). The oil change reminder will remind the owner to change the
engine oil every 15,000 miles or 500 hours, whichever comes first, except for the
Chassis Cab models and Pickup models configured with optional B20 capability that
are using B20 biodiesel, which are 12,500 miles or 400 hours, whichever comes
first. Failure to change the engine oil per the maintenance schedule can result in
internal engine damage.
Replace the engine oil and oil filter every 15,000 miles (24 000 km) or six months, or
sooner if prompted by the oil change indicator system. Under no circumstances should oil
change intervals exceed 15,000 miles (24 000 km) or six months, whichever comes first.
NOTE:
• Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 15,000 miles
(24,000 km) or six months or 500 Hours, whichever comes first.
• Replace the engine oil and oil filter every 12,500 miles (20 000 km) when
running B20 fuel (Chassis Cab Only).
If Chassis Cab models and Pickup models configured with optional B20 capability
are operated with greater than 5% levels of Biodiesel, the oil change interval must
not exceed 12,500 miles (20 000 km) under any circumstances. See the Fuel
Requirements section for more information regarding operation of Chassis Cab
models and Pickup models configured for use with Biodiesel blend (B6-B20) fuel
meeting ASTM specification D-7467.
Perform Service Indicator — Cummins Diesel

Your vehicle will require emissions maintenance at a set interval. To help remind you
when this maintenance is due, the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) or
Driver information Display (DID) will display “Perform Service”. When the “Perform
Service” message is displayed on the EVIC/DID it is necessary to have the emissions
maintenance performed. Emissions maintenance may include replacing the Closed
Crankcase Ventilation (CCV) filter element. The procedure for clearing and resetting
the “Perform Service” indicator message is located in the appropriate Service
Information.
274
Maintenance Chart — Cummins Diesel Engine
first):
7,500
15,000
22,500
30,000
37,500
45,000
52,500
60,000
67,500
75,000
82,500
90,000
97,500
105,000
112,500
120,000
127,500
135,000
142,500
150,000
Or Months: 6 12 18 24 30 36 42 48 54 60 66 72 78 84 90 96 102 108 114 120
Or Kilometers:
12,000
24,000
36,000
48,000
60,000
72,000
84,000
96,000
108,000
120,000
132,000
144,000
156,000
168,000
180,000
192,000
204,000
216,000
228,000
240,000
Change engine oil every 15,000 miles

(24 000 km) or six months or 500 Hours or
X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
sooner if prompted by the oil change indica-
tor system, whichever comes first. **
Check the Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF)
X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
tank, refill if necessary.
Rotate the tires. X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
Lubricate front drive shaft fitting (4x4). X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
Lubricate outer tie rod ends. X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
Inspect engine air filter, replace if neces-
X X X X X X X X X X
sary. ****
Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends
and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all
X X X X X X X X X X
parts for damage, wear, improper loose-
ness or end play; replace if necessary.
Inspect the brake linings. X X X X X X
Inspect and adjust parking brake. X X X X X X
Inspect drive belt; replace as necessary. X X X X X X
Inspect wheel bearings. X X X X X
275
276
first):
7,500
15,000
22,500
30,000
37,500
45,000
52,500
60,000
67,500
75,000
82,500
90,000
97,500
105,000
112,500
120,000
127,500
135,000
142,500
Or Months: 6 12 18 24 30 36 42 48 54 60 66 72 78 84 90 96 102 108 114 120 150,000
Or Kilometers:
12,000
24,000
36,000
48,000
60,000
72,000
84,000
96,000
108,000
120,000
132,000
144,000
156,000
168,000
180,000
192,000
204,000
216,000
228,000
240,000
Replace engine fuel filter element. X X X X X X X X X X
Replace chassis mounted fuel filter ele-
X X X X X X X X X X
ment.
Inspect the front and rear axle surfaces. If
gear oil leakage is suspected, check the
fluid level. If using your vehicle for police,
taxi, fleet, off-road or frequent trailer tow-
ing change the axle fluid. *
Inspect the transfer case fluid (4x4),
change for any of the following: police, X X X X X
taxi, fleet, or frequent trailer towing.
Change the transfer case fluid (4x4). X X
Change automatic transmission fluid
X X X X X
(AS69RC transmission only).
Change the automatic transmission fluid
and sump filter (AS69RC transmission X X

only).
filter(s) if using your vehicle for any of the
X X
following: police, fleet, or frequent trailer
towing (68RFE transmission only).
X
filter(s).
first):
7,500
15,000
22,500
30,000
37,500
45,000
52,500
60,000
67,500
75,000
82,500
90,000
97,500
105,000
112,500
120,000
127,500
135,000
142,500
150,000
Or Months: 6 12 18 24 30 36 42 48 54 60 66 72 78 84 90 96 102 108 114 120
Or Kilometers:
12,000
24,000
36,000
48,000
60,000
72,000
84,000
96,000
108,000
120,000
132,000
144,000
156,000
168,000
180,000
192,000
204,000
216,000
228,000
240,000
Change the manual transmission fluid if

using your vehicle for any of the following: X X
police, fleet, or frequent trailer towing.
Replace Crankcase Ventilation Filter
X X
(CCV).
Flush and replace power steering fluid. X
Flush and replace engine coolant. *** X
Adjust valve lash clearance. X
Inspection and service should also be performed anytime a malfunction is observed or suspected. Retain all receipts.
* Inspect the front and rear axle surfaces every 20,000 miles (32,000 km). If gear oil leakage is suspected, check the fluid level.
If using your vehicle for police, taxi, fleet, off-road or frequent trailer towing change the axle fluid every 20,000 miles (32,000 km).
** Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 15,000 miles (24 000 km) or six months or 500 Hours, whichever
comes first.
**** Under no circumstances should the air cleaner filter element exceed 30,000 miles (48,000 km) or 24 months, whichever
comes first.
CAUTION!
***The manufacturer highly recommends that all cooling system service, maintenance, and repairs be performed by your local
authorized dealer.
277
278
WARNING!
Maintenance Record — Cummins Diesel Engine

(12,000 km) or (108,000 km) or
6 Months 54 Months
(24,000 km) or (120,000 km) or
12 Months 60 Months
(36,000 km) or (132,000 km) or
18 Months 66 Months
(48,000 km) or (144,000 km) or
24 Months 72 Months
(60,000 km) or (156,000 km) or
30 Months 78 Months
45,000 Miles 105,000 Miles
(72,000 km) or (168,000 km) or
36 Months 84 Months
52,500 Miles 112,500 Miles
(84,000 km) or (180,000 km) or
42 Months 90 Months
60,000 Miles 120,000 Miles
(96,000 km) or (192,000 km) or
48 Months 96 Months
279
280
127,500 Miles 142,500 Miles
(204,000 km) or (228,000 km) or
102 Months 114 Months
135,000 Miles 150,000 Miles
(216,000 km) or (240,000 km) or
108 Months 120 Months
FUSES
WARNING!
• When replacing a blown fuse, always use an appropriate replacement fuse with
the same amp rating as the original fuse. Never replace a fuse with another
fuse of higher amp rating. Never replace a blown fuse with metal wires or any
other material. Failure to use proper fuses may result in serious personal injury,
fire and/or property damage.
• Before replacing a fuse, make sure that the ignition is off and that all the other
services are switched off and/or disengaged.
• If the replaced fuse blows again, contact an authorized dealer.
• If a general protection fuse for safety systems (air bag system, braking system),
power unit systems (engine system, gearbox system) or steering system blows,
contact an authorized dealer.
Power Distribution Center

The Power Distribution Center is located in the engine compartment near the battery.
This center contains cartridge fuses, micro fuses, relays, and circuit breakers. A
description of each fuse and component may be stamped on the inside cover,
otherwise the cavity number of each fuse is stamped on the inside cover that
corresponds to the following chart.
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description

F01 80 Amp Black – Rad Fan Control Module – If Equipped
F03 60 Amp Yellow – Rad Fan – If Equipped
F05 40 Amp Green – Compressor for Air Suspension – If
Equipped
F06 40 Amp Green – Antilock Brakes/Electronic Stability
Control Pump
F07 40 Amp Green – Starter Solenoid
F08 20 Amp Blue – Emissions Diesel – If Equipped
(1500 LD/
Cummins
Diesel)
281

F09 40 Amp Green – Diesel Fuel Heater – If Equipped
(Special Ser-
vices Vehicle &
Cummins
Diesel)
30 Amp Pink
(1500 LD
Diesel)
F10 40 Amp Green – Body Controller / Exterior Lighting #2
F10 50 Amp Red – Body Controller / Exterior Lighting #2 –
If Equipped with Stop/Start
F11 30 Amp Pink – Integrated Trailer Brake Module – If
Equipped
F12 40 Amp Green – Body Controller #3 / Power Locks
F13 40 Amp Green – Blower Motor
F14 40 Amp Green – Body Controller #4 / Interior Lighting
F16 30 Amp Pink – Smart Bar – If Equipped
F19 20 Amp Blue – SCR – If Equipped
(1500 LD
Diesel)
30 Amp Pink
(Cummins
Diesel)
F20 30 Amp Pink – Passenger Door Module
F21 30 Amp Pink – Drive Train Control Module
F22 20 Amp Blue – Engine Control Module
30 Amp Pink
(Cummins
Diesel)
F23 30 Amp Pink – Body Controller #1 / Interior Lighting
F24 30 Amp Pink – Driver Door Module
F25 30 Amp Pink – Front Wiper
F26 30 Amp Pink – Antilock Brakes / Stability Control
Module / Valves
F28 20 Amp Blue – Trailer Tow Backup Lights – If
Equipped
F29 20 Amp Blue – Trailer Tow Parking Lights – If
Equipped
F30 30 Amp Pink – Trailer Tow Receptacle
F31 30 Amp Pink – Urea Heater Control – If Equipped
(1500 LD
Diesel)
F32 – – Spare Fuse
F33 20 Amp Blue – Special Services Vehicle Only
282

F34 30 Amp Pink – Vehicle System Interface Module #2 –
If Equipped
F35 30 Amp Pink – Sunroof – If Equipped
F36 30 Amp Pink – Rear Defroster – If Equipped
F37 30 Amp Pink – Cummins Diesel Fuel Heater #2 – If
Equipped
F38 30 Amp Pink – Power Inverter 115V AC – If Equipped
F39 20 Amp Blue – Power Outlet – Special Services Only
F41 – 10 Amp Red Active Grill Shutter – If Equipped
F42 – 20 Amp Yellow Horn
F44 – 10 Amp Red Diagnostic Port
F46 – 10 Amp Red Upfitter – If Equipped
F49 – 10 Amp Red Instrument Panel Cluster
F50 – 20 Amp Yellow Air Suspension Control Module – If
Equipped
F51 – 10 Amp Red Ignition Node Module / Keyless Ignition
F52 – 5 Amp Tan Battery Sensor
F53 – 20 Amp Yellow Trailer Tow – Left Turn/Stop Lights
F54 – 20 Amp Yellow Adjustable Pedals
F56 – 15 Amp Blue Additional Diesel Content – If
Equipped
F57 – 20 Amp Yellow Transmission
F58 – 20 Amp Yellow Spare Fuse
F59 – 10 Amp Red SCR Relay – If Equipped
F60 – 15 Amp Blue Underhood Lamp
F61 – 10 Amp Red PM Sensor – If Equipped
(1500 LD Die-
sel & Cummins
Diesel)
F62 – 10 Amp Red Air Conditioning Clutch
F63 – 20 Amp Yellow Ignition Coils (Gas), Urea Heater (Cum-
mins Diesel)
F64 – 25 Amp Clear Fuel Injectors / Powertrain
F65 – – Spare Fuse
F66 – 10 Amp Red Sunroof / Passenger Window Switches /
Rain Sensor
F67 – 10 Amp Red CD / DVD / Bluetooth Hands-free
Module – If Equipped
F69 – 15 Amp Blue Mod SCR 12V (Cummins Diesel) – If
Equipped
F70 – 30 Amp Green Fuel Pump Motor
F71 – 25 Amp Clear Amplifier
283

F72 – 10 Amp Red PCM – If Equipped
F73 – 20 Amp Yellow Fuel Transfer Pump (HD Only) – If
Equipped
F74 – 20 Amp Yellow Brake Vacuum Pump Gas/Diesel – If
(Gas Engine & Equipped
1500 LD
Diesel)
F75 – 10 Amp Red Coolant Temperature Valve Actuator
F76 – 10 Amp Red Antilock Brakes / Electronic Stability
Control
F77 – 10 Amp Red Drivetrain Control Module/Front Axle
Disconnect Module
F78 – 10 Amp Red Engine Control Module / Electric Power
Steering
F79 – 15 Amp Blue Clearance Lights
F80 – 10 Amp Red Universal Garage Door Opener /
Compass
F81 – 20 Amp Yellow Trailer Tow Right Turn / Stop Lights
F82 – 10 Amp Red Steering Column Control Module /
Cruise Control
F84 – 15 Amp Blue Switch Bank / Instrument Cluster
F85 – 10 Amp Red Airbag Module
F86 – 10 Amp Red Airbag Module
F87 – 10 Amp Red Air Suspension – If Equipped / Trailer
Tow / Steering Column Control Module
F88 – 15 Amp Blue Instrument Panel Cluster
F90/F91 – 20 Amp Yellow Power Outlet (rear seats) Customer
Selectable
F93 – 20 Amp Yellow Cigar Lighter
F94 – 10 Amp Red Shifter / Transfer Case Module
F95 – 10 Amp Red Rear Camera / Park Assist
F96 – 10 Amp Red Rear Seat Heater Switch
F97 – 25 Amp Clear Rear Heated Seats & Heated Steering
Wheel – If Equipped
F98 – 25 Amp Clear Front Heated Seats – If Equipped
F99 – 10 Amp Red Climate Control
F100 – 10 Amp Red Upfitters – If Equipped
F101 – 15 Amp Blue Electrochromatic Mirror / Smart High
Beams – If Equipped
F104 – 20 Amp Yellow Power Outlets (Instrument Panel /
Center Console)
284
CAUTION!
• When installing the power distribution center cover, it is important to ensure
the cover is properly positioned and fully latched. Failure to do so may allow
water to get into the power distribution center and possibly result in an
electrical system failure.
• When replacing a blown fuse, it is important to use only a fuse having the
correct amperage rating. The use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated
may result in a dangerous electrical system overload. If a properly rated fuse
continues to blow, it indicates a problem in the circuit that must be corrected.
TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION

TIRE PRESSURES
Check the inflation pressure of each tire, including the spare tire (if equipped), at
least monthly and inflate to the recommended pressure for your vehicle.
The tire pressures recommended for your vehicle are found on the “Tire and Loading
Information” label located on the driver’s side door opening or B pillar.
NOTE:
Refer to the Owner's Manual on the DVD
or the Tire Information Supplement lo-
cated in your Owner’s Information kit for
more information regarding tire warnings
and instructions.
Tire And Loading Information Location

(Example)
285
WARNING!
• Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading can cause tire failure,
affect vehicle handling, and increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the
recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never overload them.
• Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can cause collisions. Under-
inflation increases tire flexing and can result in over-heating and tire failure.
Over-inflation reduces a tire’s ability to cushion shock. Objects on the road and
chuck holes can cause damage that results in tire failure. Unequal tire
pressures can cause steering problems. You could lose control of your vehicle.
Over-inflated or under-inflated tires can affect vehicle handling and can fail
suddenly, resulting in loss of vehicle control. Always drive with each tire
inflated to the recommended cold tire inflation pressure.
SPARE TIRES — IF EQUIPPED

NOTE:
For vehicles equipped with Tire Service Kit instead of a spare tire, please refer to “Tire
Service Kit” in “What To Do In Emergencies” on your DVD for further information.
CAUTION!
Because of the reduced ground clearance, do not take your vehicle through an
automatic car wash with a compact or limited-use temporary spare installed.
Damage to the vehicle may result.
Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire And Wheel — If Equipped

Your vehicle may be equipped with a spare tire and wheel equivalent in look and
function to the original equipment tire and wheel found on the front or rear axle of
your vehicle. This spare tire may be used in the tire rotation for your vehicle. If your
vehicle has this option, refer to an authorized tire dealer for the recommended tire
rotation pattern.
Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped

The compact spare is for temporary emergency use only. You can identify if your
vehicle is equipped with a compact spare by looking at the spare tire description on
the Tire and Loading Information Placard located on the driver’s side door opening or
on the sidewall of the tire. Compact spare tire descriptions begin with the letter “T”
or “S” preceding the size designation. Example: T145/80D18 103M.
T, S = Temporary Spare Tire
Since this tire has limited tread life, the original equipment tire should be repaired
(or replaced) and reinstalled on your vehicle at the first opportunity.
286
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a conventional tire on the compact
spare wheel, since the wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare tire. Do not
install more than one compact spare tire and wheel on the vehicle at any given time.
WARNING!
Compact spares are for temporary emergency use only. With these spares, do not
drive more than 50 mph (80 km/h). Temporary use spares have limited tread life.
When the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators, the temporary use spare tire
needs to be replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings, which apply to your spare.
Failure to do so could result in spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
Full Size Spare — If Equipped

The full size spare is for temporary emergency use only. This tire may look like the
originally equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not. This
spare tire may have limited tread life. When the tread is worn to the tread wear
indicators, the temporary use full size spare tire needs to be replaced. Since it is not
the same as your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the original equipment
tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the first opportunity.
Limited Use Spare — If Equipped

The limited-use spare tire is for temporary emergency use only. This tire is identified by a
label located on the limited-use spare wheel. This label contains the driving limitations for
this spare. This tire may look like the original equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your
vehicle, but it is not. Installation of this limited-use spare tire affects vehicle handling.
Since it is not the same as your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the original
equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the first opportunity.
WARNING!
Limited-use spares are for emergency use only. Installation of this limited-use
spare tire affects vehicle handling. With this tire, do not drive more than the speed
listed on the limit-use spare wheel. Keep inflated to the cold tire inflation
pressures listed on your Tire and Loading Information Placard located on the
driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the driver’s side door. Replace (or repair)
the original equipment tire at the first opportunity and reinstall it on your vehicle.
Failure to do so could result in loss of vehicle control.
WHEEL AND WHEEL TRIM CARE

All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and chrome plated wheels, should
be cleaned regularly with a mild soap and water to prevent corrosion.
To remove heavy soil and/or excessive brake dust, use MOPAR Wheel Cleaner or
equivalent or select a non-abrasive, non-acidic cleaner.
287
CAUTION!
Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle brush, or metal polishes. Do not use oven
cleaner. These products may damage the wheel's protective finish. Avoid automatic car
washes that use acidic solutions or harsh brushes that may damage the wheel's
protective finish. Only MOPAR Wheel Cleaner or equivalent is recommended.
REPLACEMENT BULBS
All of the inside bulbs are brass or glass-wedge base. Aluminum base bulbs are not
approved.
Interior Bulbs
Bulb Number
Overhead Console Lamps TS 212–9
Dome Lamp 7679
For lighted switches, see your authorized dealer for replacement instructions.
Exterior Bulbs
Bulb Number
Base Quad Headlamp – Low Beam H11LL
Base Quad Headlamp – High Beam 9005LL
Front Turn Signal Lamp (Base Quad Headlamp) 3157NA
Premium Bi Halogen Projector Headlamp - Low Beam 9005Sl+
Premium Bi Halogen Projector Headlamp - High Beam 9005LL
LED (Serviced at
Front Turn Signal Lamp (Premium Headlamp)
Authorized Dealer)
Fog Lamp (Horizontal shape) 9145
Fog Lamp (Vertical shape) 9006
Center High Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL) 921K
Rear Cargo Lamp 921
LED Center High Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL)/Cargo LED (Serviced at
Lamp Authorized Dealer)
Cab Roof Marker Lamps 194NA
Base Rear Tail/Turn and Stop Lamp 3157K
LED (Serviced at
Premium Rear Tail/Turn and Stop Lamp
Authorized Dealer)
Premium Backup Lamp 7440/W21W
Rear Lamp Bar ID Marker Lamp 194
Side Marker Lamps (Dual Rear Wheels) 194
Backup Lamp 921
Rear License Plate Lamp 194
288
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
FCA US LLC CUSTOMER CENTER

P.O. Box 21–8004 Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004 Phone: 1-866-726-4636
FCA CANADA INC. CUSTOMER CENTER

P.O. Box 1621 Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6 Phone: 1-800-465-2001 (English)
Phone: 1-800-387-9983 (French)
ASSISTANCE FOR THE HEARING IMPAIRED

To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, the manufacturer has installed
special TDD (Telecommunication Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its customer
center. Any hearing or speech impaired customer, who has access to a TDD or a
conventional teletypewriter (TTY) in the United States, can communicate with
the manufacturer by dialing 1-800-380-CHRY. Canadian residents with hearing
difficulties that require assistance can use the special needs relay service offered
by Bell Canada. For TTY teletypewriter users, dial 711 and for Voice callers, dial
1-800-855-0511 to connect with a Bell Relay Service operator.
WARNING!
Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and certain vehicle components con-
tain, or emit, chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth
defects, or other reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids contained in
vehicles and certain products of component wear contain, or emit, chemicals
known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects, or other
reproductive harm.
PUBLICATIONS ORDERING
• If you are the first registered retail owner of your vehicle, you may obtain a
complimentary printed copy of the Owner's Manual, Navigation/Uconnect Manuals
or Warranty Booklet. United States customers may visit the Ram Truck Contact Us
page at www.ramtrucks.com scroll to the bottom of the page and select the
“Contact Us” link, then select the “Owner’s Manual and Glove Compartment
Material” from the left menu. You may also obtain a complimentary copy by calling
1-866-726-4636 (U.S.) or 1-800-387-1143 (Canada).
• Replacement User Guide kits or DVDs or, if you prefer, additional printed copies
of the Owner's Manual, Warranty Booklet or Radio Manuals may be purchased
by visiting www.techauthority.com or by calling 1-800-890-4038 (U.S.) or
1-800-387-1143 (Canada). Visa, Master Card, American Express and Discover
orders are accepted. If you prefer mailing your order, please call the above
numbers for an order form.
289
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
NOTE:
• A street address is required when ordering manuals (no P.O. Boxes).
• The Owner's Manual and User Guide electronic files are also available on the
Chrysler, Jeep®, Ram Truck, Dodge and SRT websites.
• Click on the “Owners” tab, select “Owner And Service Manuals”, then select your
desired model year and vehicle from the drop down lists.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS IN THE UNITED STATES

If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could cause a collision or cause
injury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying the manufacturer.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds
that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between
you, your authorized dealer and the manufacturer.
To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety Hotline toll free at
1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write
to: Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE., West Building,
Washington, D.C. 20590. You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle
safety from http://www.safercar.gov.
In Canada
If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, you should contact the Customer
Service Department immediately. Canadian customers who wish to report a safety
defect to the Canadian government should contact Transport Canada, Motor Vehicle
Defect Investigations and Recalls at 1-800-333-0510 or go to http://www.tc.gc.ca/
roadsafety/.
French Canadian customers who wish to report a safety defect to the Canadian
government should contact Transport Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations
and Recalls at 1-800-333-0510 or go to http://www.tc.gc.ca/securiteroutiere/.
290
MOPAR® ACCESSORIES
AUTHENTIC ACCESSORIES BY MOPAR

• In choosing Authentic Accessories you gain far more than expressive style, premium
protection, or extreme entertainment, you also benefit from enhancing your vehicle
with accessories that have been thoroughly tested and factory-approved.
• The following highlights just some of the many Authentic Ram Accessories by
Mopar featuring a fit, finish, and functionality specifically for your Ram.
• For the full line of Authentic Ram Accessories by Mopar, visit your local dealership
or online at mopar.com for U.S. residents and mopar.ca for Canadian residents.
NOTE:
All parts are subject to availability.
CHROME:
• Exhaust Tip • Tubular Side Steps • Fuel Filler Door
• Cast Aluminum Wheels • Front Air Deflector • Grille
• Body Side Molding
EXTERIOR:
• Bedliners • Running Boards • Bed Mat & Bed Rug
• Fiberglass Tonneau Cover • Bed Extender • Tool Box
• Roll-up Tonneau Cover • Bed Step • Sport Performance Hood
• Folding Tonneau Cover • Hitch Receiver • Hitches
• Molded Splash Guards
INTERIOR:
• Premium Carpet Mats • Door Sill Guards • Slush Mats
• Leather Seats • Bright Pedal Kit
ELECTRONICS:
• Kicker Sound Systems • Remote Start • Mopar Connect
• Electronic Vehicle Tracking
CARRIERS:
• Bed Mounted Bike Carrier • Cargo Bed Divider • Cargo Ramps
• Bed Mounted Ski and • Bed Mounted Cargo
Snowboard Carrier Basket With Cargo Net
Kicker is a registered trademark of Stillwater Designs and Audio, Inc.
291
FAQ’s
FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS

GETTING STARTED
How do I install my LATCH Equipped Child Seat? pg. 23
How do I program my Front Seat Memory? pg. 33
How does the Electronic Range Select (ERS) operate? pg. 50
ELECTRONICS
Which radio is in my vehicle?
• Uconnect 3.0 pg. 92
• Uconnect 8.4A/8.4AN pg. 111
How do I activate the Audio Jack?
How do I set the clock on my radio?
How do I use the Navigation feature? pg. 121
How do I pair my cell phone via Bluetooth with the Uconnect Hands-Free Voice
Activation System? pg. 146
How do I use my USB port to listen to audio through my touch-screen radio? pg. 118
292
FAQ’s
How do I shift into different four-wheel drive selections? pg. 166
UTILITY
How do I know how much I can tow with my Ram Truck? pg. 176
How do I adjust the gain on the Integrated Trailer Brake Module? pg. 177
How do I change a flat tire? pg. 217
How do I Jump-Start my vehicle? pg. 230
Where is my Fuse Block located? pg. 281
What type of oil do I use? pg. 254
How often should I change my engine’s oil?
• Gasoline Engine pg. 262
• Cummins Diesel Engine pg. 273
• 1500 Diesel Engine pg. 267
293
INDEX
Access Automatic Transmission
Uconnect . . . . . . . . .77, 79, 83 Fluid Type . . . . . .256, 259, 261
Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze).262 Axle Fluid . . . . . . . . .256, 259, 261
Adding Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . .262
Adjust Background Themes
Down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31 Uconnect 8.4A . . . . . . . . . .111
Forward . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31 Uconnect 8.4N . . . . . . .111, 127
Rearward . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31 Back-Up Camera . . . . . . . . . . . .67
Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31 Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .262
Adjustable Pedals . . . . . . . . . . .41 Charging System Light . . . . .212
Aftermarket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 Body Mechanism Lubrication . . . .262
Air Bag Brake Fluid . . . . . . . . . . .256, 259
Advanced Front Air Bag . . . . . .18 Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .262
Advance Front Air Bag . . . . . .17 Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . .262
Air Bags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17 Master Cylinder . . . . . . . . .262
Air Bag Warning Light .17, 20, 213 Warning Light . . . . . . . . . .211
Enhanced Accident Break-In Recommendations, New
Response . . . . . . . . . . .20, 240 Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43
Event Data Recorder (EDR) .21, 240 Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . .288
Front Air Bag . . . . . . . . . . . .17 Bulbs, Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . .288
Rollover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
Side Air Bags . . . . . . . . . . . .19 Calibration, Compass . . . . . . . . .156
Side Impacts . . . . . . . . . . . .17 Camera, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67
Air Bag Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20 Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4, 290
Air Cleaner, Engine Capacities, Antifreeze (Engine
(Engine Air Cleaner Filter) . . . .262 Coolant) . . . . . . . . . . .257, 259
Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . .262 Capacities, Fluid . . . . .254, 257, 259
Air Conditioning . . . . .61, 62, 64, 65 Capacity
Air Conditioning Refrigerant . . . . .262 Cargo Weight . . . . . . . . . . .176
Air Conditioning System . . . . . . .262 Payload . . . . . . . . . . . . . .176
Air Suspension . . . . . . . .51, 54, 56 Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .176
Alarm Caps, Filler
Arm The System . . . . . . . . . .15 Oil (Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . .262
Disarm The System . . . . . . . .16 Cargo Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46
Vehicle Security Alarm . . . . . .15 Car Washes . . . . . . . . . . . . . .262
Alarm (Security Alarm) . . . . .15, 215 CD (Compact Disc) Player . . .102, 118
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . .254, 262 Change Oil Indicator . . . . . . . . .214
Capacities . . . . . . . . .257, 259 Charging System Light . . . . . . . .212
Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . .262 Check Engine Light (Malfunction
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . .213 Indicator Light) . . . . . . . . . .212
APP Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
Uconnect Access . . . . . . . . . .80 Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . .21
Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . .262 Lower Anchors And Tethers For
Assistance Towing . . . . . . . . . .209 Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
Audio Jack . . . . . . . . . . .103, 118 Child Seat Installation . . . . . . . . .21
Automatic Headlights . . . . . .45, 216 Cleaning
Automatic High Beams . . . . . . . .45 Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . .262
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC).64 Windshield Wiper Blades . . . .262
294
INDEX
Climate Control . . . . .61, 62, 64, 135 Your Vehicle's Sound System . . .72
Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100 Electronic Speed Control
Cluster Warning/Indicator Lights (Cruise Control) . . . . . . . . . . .46
Air Bag Warning Light . . . . . .213 Electronic Stability Control (ESC). .209
Brake Warning Light . . . . . . .211 Electronic Throttle Control Warning
Front Fog Light Indicator . . . .215 Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .213
Fuel Cap/Loose Gas Cap . . . . .216 Electronic Vehicle Information Center
High Beam Indicator . . . . . .215 (EVIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . .67, 155
Park/Headlight ON Indicator . .215 Emergency, In Case Of
Turn Signal Indicator . . . . . .215 Freeing Vehicle When Stuck . .238
Vehicle Security Light . . . . . .215 Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . .230
Clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .262 Tow Hooks . . . . . . . . . . . .233
Clutch Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . .262 Towing . . . . . . . . . . .209, 238
Compact Spare Tire. . . . . . . . . .286 Engine
Compass Calibration . . . . . . . . .156 Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . .262
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . .262 Block Heater . . . . . . . . . . .195
Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) . .262 Break-In
Coolant Capacity . .254, 257, 259 Recommendations . .43, 185, 195
Coolant Level . . . . . . . . . . .262 Checking Oil Level . . . . . . . .262
Disposal Of Used Coolant . . . .262 Coolant (Antifreeze) .255, 257, 260
Drain, Flush, And Refill . . . . .262 Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .262
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . .262 Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . .254
Points To Remember . . . . . .262 Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . .230
Pressure Cap . . . . . . . . . . .262 Malfunction Indicator (Check
Selection Of Coolant Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .212
(Antifreeze) . .254, 255, 257, 260, Oil . . . .254, 255, 257, 260, 262
262 Oil Filler Cap . . . . . . . . . . .262
Corrosion Protection . . . . . . . . .262 Oil Selection . . . . . . . .254, 262
Customer Assistance . . . . . .289, 290 Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . .216
Customer Programmable Features .157 Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14
Stopping . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14
DEF (Diesel Exhaust Fluid) . .191, 204 Enhanced Accident Response
Defects, Reporting . . . . . . . . . .290 Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240
Defroster, Rear Window . . . . . .61, 62 Ethanol. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .256
Defroster, Windshield . . . . . . .61, 62 Exhaust Brake. . . . . . . . . . . . .197
Diesel Engine Maintenance . .187, 199 Exhaust Regeneration . . . . . . . .188
Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) . .191, 204 Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . .262
Diesel Fuel Water Separator. .187, 199
Dimmer Control. . . . . . . . . . . . .45 Filters
Disabled Vehicle Towing . . . . . . .209 Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . .262
Disarming, Security System . . . . . .16 Engine Fuel . . . . . . . .187, 199
Disposal Engine Oil . . .255, 257, 260, 262
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . .262 Engine Oil Disposal . . . . . . .262
Disturb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .150 Flashers
Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . .215
E-85 Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .256 Flat Tire Stowage . . . . . . . . . . .228
Electronic Range Select (ERS). .50, 51 Flexible Fuel Vehicles . . . . . . . .256
Electronics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 Fluid, Brake. . . . . . . . . . .256, 259
295
INDEX
Fluid Capacities . . . . .254, 257, 259 Integrated Trailer Brake Controls . .177
Fluids, Lubricants And Genuine Interior And Instrument Lights . .7, 72
Parts . . . . . . . . . .255, 257, 260 Interior Appearance Care. . . . . . .262
Fog Lights . . . . . . . . . . . .45, 215 Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers) . .44
Four Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . .166 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3
Four Wheel Drive Operation . . . . .166 Aftermarket Electronics . . . . . . .5
Freeing A Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . .238 Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4
Fuel In Vehicle Features
Diesel . . . . . . . . . . . .257, 260 Uconnect Access . . . . . . . . . .84
Ethanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . .256 Inverter Outlet (115V) . . . . . . . .162
Filler Cap (Gas Cap) . . . . . . .216 Inverter, Power . . . . . . . . . . . .162
Octane Rating . . . . . . . . . .255 iPod/USB/MP3 Control
Requirements . . . . . . . . . .254 Bluetooth Streaming Audio . . .144
Tank Capacity . . . .254, 257, 259
Fuel, Flexible . . . . . . . . . . . . .256 Jack Location . . . . . . . . . . . . .217
Fuses. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .281 Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . .230
Garage Door Opener (HomeLink) . .159 Key Fob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10

Gear Select Lever Override. . . . . .234 Arm The Alarm . . . . . . . . . . .15
General Maintenance. . . . . . . . .262 Disarm The Alarm . . . . . . . . .16
Glass Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . .262 Keyless Enter-N-Go. . . . . . . . . . .13
Automatic Trans . . . . . . . . . .14
Hands-Free Phone (Uconnect) . . .144 Engine Stopping . . . . . . . . . .14
Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45 Lock/Unlock . . . . . . . . . . . .13
Headlights Starting/Stopping . . . . . . . . .14
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . .45
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . .262 Lane Change And Turn Signals . . . .44
Dimmer Switch . . . . . . . . . .45 Lane Change Assist . . . . . . . . . .44
High Beam . . . . . . . . . . . . .44 Lap/Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . .16
Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45 Left Switch
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . .29 Steering Wheel Audio Controls .155
Heated Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37 Light Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . .288
Heater, Engine Block . . . . . . . . .195 Lights
High Beam Indicator . . . . . . . . .215 Air Bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
High Beam/Low Beam Select (Dimmer) Cargo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46
Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44 Engine Temperature Warning . .210
HomeLink (Garage Door Opener) . .159 Fog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .215
Hood Release . . . . . . . . . . . . .241 High Beam Indicator . . . . . .215
Hub Caps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .226 Security Alarm . . . . . . . . . .215
Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . .288
Idle Up Feature . . . . . . . . . . . .198 Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . .44
Installing A Child Restraint With Lower Anchors And Tether For CHildren
ALR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24 (LATCH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
Installing Child Restraints Using The Lubrication, Body . . . . . . . . . . .262
LATCH Lower Anchorages . . . . .23
Instrument Cluster Indicator Lights .215 Maintenance Free Battery . . . . . .262
Instrument Panel Cover . . . . . . .262 Maintenance, General . . . . . . . .262
Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning . .262 Maintenance Procedures. . . . . . .262
296
INDEX
Maintenance Record . .266, 272, 279 Phone (Uconnect) . . . .109, 130, 144
Maintenance Pickup Box . . . . . . . . . . .169, 170
Schedule . . . .262, 267, 273, 275 Placard, Tire And Loading
Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Information. . . . . . . . . . . . .285
Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .212 Power
Manual Transmission Distribution Center (Fuses) . . .281
Lubricant Selection . . . . . . .256 Glass Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . .69
Master Cylinder (Brakes) . . . . . . .262 Inverter . . . . . . . . . . . . . .162
Media Center Radio . . . . . . . . .108 Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical
Media Hub. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .129 Outlet) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .163
Memory Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33 Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
Message Center Sliding Rear Window . . . . . . .69
Water In Fuel . . . . . . .186, 196 Power Seats
Mirrors Down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33 Forward . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
MOPAR Accessories . . . . . . . . .291 Rearward . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
Recline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
Navigation . . . . . . . .121, 124, 136 Tilt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
Navigation System (Uconnect GPS) .67 Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
New Vehicle Break-In Power Steering Fluid . . . . . . . . .256
Period . . . . . . . . . .43, 185, 195 Preparation For Jacking . . . . . . .219
Programmable Electronic Features .156
Oil Change Indicator . . . . . .214, 274 Purchase Apps
Oil Change Indicator, Reset . . . . .214 Uconnect Access . . . . . .81, 139
Oil, Engine . . . . .255, 257, 260, 262
Capacity . . . . . . .254, 257, 259 Radio . . . . . . . . . . . .99, 107, 128
Change Interval . . . . . . . . .262 Balance and Fade . . . . . . . .100
Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . .262 Equalizer . . . . . . . . . . . . .100
Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . .262 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . .101
Filter . . . . . .255, 257, 260, 262 Presets . . . . . . . . . .91, 93, 114
Filter Disposal . . . . . . . . . .262 Setting the Clock . . . . . . . . .100
Materials Added To . . . . . . .262 Radio 3.0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90
Recommendation . . . . .254, 262 Radio Screens. . . . . . . . . . . . .111
Viscosity . . . . . . . . . .254, 262 Radio (Sound Systems) . . . . .99, 107
Oil Filter, Selection . . . . . . . . . .262 Rain Sensitive Wiper System . . . . .44
Outlet Rear Heated Seats . . . . . . . . . . .38
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .163 Rear ParkSense System . . . . . . . .66
Overheating, Engine . . . . . . . . .216 Recreational Towing . . . . . . . . .179
Shifting Into Transfer Case
Paint Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .262 Neutral (N) . . . . . . . . . . . .182
Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11 Shifting Out Of Transfer Case
ParkSense System, Rear. . . . . . . .66 Neutral (N) . . . . . . . . . . . .183
Payload Capacity . . . . . . . . . . .176 Refrigerant. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .262
Pedals, Adjustable . . . . . . . . . . .41 Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
Perform Service Indicator, Reset . .274 Arm The Alarm . . . . . . . . . . .15
Personalized Menu Bar. . . . . . . .113 Disarm The Alarm . . . . . . . . .16
Phone, Hands-Free (Uconnect) . . .144 Remote Starting System . . . . . . . .15
Phone (Pairing) . . . . . . . . .126, 146 Replacement Bulbs. . . . . . . . . .288
297
INDEX
Reporting Safety Defects. . . . . . .290 Steering
Resetting Perform Service Indicator.274 Wheel, Heated . . . . . . . . . . .39
Restraint, Head . . . . . . . . . . . . .29 Wheel, Tilt . . . . . . . . . . . . .40
Steering Wheel Mounted Sound
Schedule, Maintenance . . . .262, 267 System Controls . . . . . . . . . .155
SD Card Port . . . . . . . . . .103, 118 Sunroof
Seat Belt Closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70
Seat Belt Pretensioner . . . . . .16 Opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69
Seat Belt Maintenance . . . . . . . .262 Venting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70
Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16 Sun Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69
Adjustable Shoulder Belt . . . . .16 Supplemental Restraint System - Air
Pretensioners . . . . . . . . . . .16 Bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
Seats. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . .31 Tailgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .169
Easy Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . .35 Temperature Control, Automatic
Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37 (ATC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64
Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33 Tether Anchor, Child Restraint . . . .24
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31 Text Messaging . .110, 134, 140, 151,
Security Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . .215 152
Arm The System . . . . . . . . . .15 Tilt
Disarm The System . . . . . . . .16 Down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
Security Alarm . . . . . . . . . . .15 Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
Selection Of Coolant Tilt Steering Column . . . . . . . . . .40
(Antifreeze) . . . . . .255, 257, 260 Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .285, 286
Shifting Air Pressure . . . . . . . . . . .285
Transfer Case, Shifting Into Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . .219
Transfer Case Neutral (N) . . . .182 Compact Spare . . . . . . . . . .286
Transfer Case, Shifting Out Of Flat Changing . . . . . . . . . .219
Transfer Case Neutral (N) . . . .183 General Information . . . .285, 286
Shift Lever Override . . . . . . . . .234 Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . .219
Signals, Turn . . . . . . . . . . .44, 215 Pressure Warning Light . . . . .209
Siri . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131, 132 Spare Tire . . . . . . . . .286, 287
Sirius Satellite Radio . . . . .102, 115 Tow/Haul . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .176
Traffic & Weather . . . . . . . . .124 Tow Hooks, Emergency . . . . . . . .233
SIRIUS Travel Link . . . . . . . . . .124 Towing
Sound Systems (Radio) . .99, 118, 121 Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . .176
Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . .286, 287 Disabled Vehicle . . . . . . . . .238
Spark Plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . .255 Recreational . . . . . . . . . . .179
Speed Control Towing Vehicle Behind A
Accel/Decel . . . . . . . . . . . .48 Motorhome . . . . . . . . . . . . .179
Cancel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47 Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . .212
Resume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47 Trailer Towing
Speed Control (Cruise Control) . . . .46 Trailer And Tongue Weight . . .176
Starting Transfer Case
Cold Weather . . . . . . . .186, 196 Fluid . . . . . . . . .256, 259, 261
Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15 Transmission
Starting Procedures (Diesel Fluid . . . . . .256, 259, 261, 262
Engines) . . . . . . . . . . .185, 195 Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . .262
298
INDEX
Warning Light . . . . . . . . . .214 Uconnect Phone. .126, 144, 149, 151
Turbo Cool Down . . . . . . . .189, 203 Uconnect Voice
Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . .44, 215 Command .95, 104, 105, 106, 107,
108, 109, 110, 125, 149
Uconnect USB Port . . . . . . . . . . . .103, 118
Access . . . . . . . . . . .77, 79, 83 Using Access
Account . . . . . . . . . .79, 83, 87 Uconnect . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82
Maintaining Your Account . . . . .83 Using The Top Tether Anchorage . . .25
Registration . . . . . . . . .79, 138
Remote Features . . . . . . . . . .87 Vehicle Security Alarm Disarming . .16
Using Access . . . . . . . . . . . .82 Via Mobile Apps
Via Mobile Apps . . . . . . . . . .81 Uconnect . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81
Uconnect 3.0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92 Voice Command . .95, 104, 105, 106,
Uconnect 5.0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99 107, 108, 109, 110, 125, 127, 149
Uconnect 8.4A . . . . . . . . .111, 137 Voice Recognition System
Helpful Tips For Bluetooth . . . .154 (VR) .95, 104, 105, 106, 107, 108,
Mute . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .149 109, 110, 125, 149, 150
Phonebook . . . . . . . . . . . . .149
Transfer Ongoing Call Between Washer
Handset And Vehicle . . . . . .149 Adding Fluid . . . . . . . . . . .262
Voice Recognition Tips . . . . . .150 Washers, Windshield . . . . . . . . . .44
Uconnect 8.4A/8.4AN Voice Washing Vehicle. . . . . . . . . . . .262
Recognition Water in Fuel . . .186, 187, 196, 199
SiriusXM Travel Link . . . . . . .142 Water Separator, Diesel Fuel .187, 199
Voice Texting . . . . . . . . . . .150 Water Separator Draining . . .187, 199
Uconnect 8.4AN . . . . . . . .111, 137 Wheel And Wheel Trim . . . . . . . .262
Uconnect Access. . . . . . . . .77, 137 Wheel And Wheel Trim Care. .262, 287
APP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .80 Wheel Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . .226
In Vehicle Features . . . . . . . . .84 Wheel Nut Torque. . . . . . . . . . .227
Purchase Apps . . . . . . . .81, 139 Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . .71
Yelp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .141 Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . . .44
Uconnect (Hands-Free Phone) Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . .262
Making A Phone Call . . .144, 150 Windshield Wipers . . . . . . . . . . .44
Receiving A Call . . . . . . . . .144 Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . . .262
299
NOTES
300
NOTES
301
NOTES
302
NOTES
303
NOTES
304
If you are the first registered retail owner of your vehicle, you This guide has been prepared to help you get quickly
may obtain a complimentary printed copy of the Owner’s acquainted with your new Ram brand vehicle and to
Manual, Navigation/Uconnect Manuals or Warranty Booklet by provide a convenient reference source for common
calling 1-866-726-4636 (U.S.) or 1-800-387-1143 (Canada) or by questions. However, it is not a substitute for your
contacting your dealer. Owner’s Manual.
For complete operational instructions, maintenance

IMPORTANT procedures and important safety messages, please consult
This User Guide is intended to familiarize you with the your Owner’s Manual, Navigation/Uconnect Manuals and
important features of your vehicle. The DVD enclosed contains other Warning Labels in your vehicle.
your Owner’s Manual, Navigation/Uconnect Manuals,
Not all features shown in this guide may apply to your
Warranty Booklets, Tire Warranty and Roadside Assistance
vehicle. For additional information on accessories to help
(new vehicles purchased in the U.S.) or Roadside Assistance
personalize your vehicle, visit www.mopar.com (U.S.),
(new vehicles purchased in Canada) in electronic format. We
www.mopar.ca (Canada) or your local Ram brand dealer.
hope you find it useful. U.S. residents can purchase
replacement DVD kits by visiting www.techauthority.com and
Canadian residents can purchase replacement DVD kits by Driving and Alcohol
calling 1-800-387-1143. Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes
of collisions. Your driving ability can be seriously
The driver’s primary responsibility is the safe operation of the vehicle. Driving
impaired with blood alcohol levels far below the legal
while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control, resulting in a collision and
minimum. If you are drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a
personal injury. FCA US LLC strongly recommends that the driver use extreme
caution when using any device or feature that may take their attention designated non-drinking driver, call a cab, a friend, or
off the road. Use of any electrical devices, such as cellular telephones, use public transportation.
computers, portable radios, vehicle navigation or other devices, by the driver
while the vehicle is moving is dangerous and could lead to a serious collision.
WARNING
Texting while driving is also dangerous and should never be done while the
Driving after drinking can lead to a collision. Your
vehicle is moving. If you find yourself unable to devote your full attention to
vehicle operation, pull off the road to a safe location and stop your vehicle.
perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are slower, and
Some states or provinces prohibit the use of cellular telephones or texting while your judgment is impaired when you have been drinking.
driving. It is always the driver’s responsibility to comply with all local laws. Never drink and then drive.

Download a FREE electronic copy of the Owner’s Manual
and Warranty Booklet by visiting:
WWW.RAMTRUCKS.COM/EN/OWNERS/MANUALS OR
WWW.RAMTRUCKS.COM/EN/WARRANTY (U.S.);
WWW.OWNERS.MOPAR.CA/EN (CANADA).
© 2015 FCA US LLC. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED. RAM IS A REGISTERED TRADEMARK OF FCA US LLC.
16D241-926-AA
RAM TRUCKS 1500/2500/3500
SECOND EDITION Rev. 1
USER GUIDE

2016E-RAM 15 25 35-UG-2nd R1 PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

2016E-RAM 15 25 35-UG-2nd R1 PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

2016E-RAM 15 25 35-UG-2nd R1 PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Download a FREE electronic copy of the Owner’s Manual

and Warranty Booklet by visiting:

2185884_16b_RAM_1500_2500_3500_UG_Rev1_091615.indd 1 9/16/15 8:48 AM

For complete operational instructions, maintenance

2185884_16b_RAM_1500_2500_3500_UG_Rev1_091615.indd 2 9/16/15 8:48 AM

WELCOME FROM FCA US LLC

VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA

USE OF AFTERMARKET PRODUCTS (ELECTRONICS)

1. Headlight Switch pg. 45

11. Switch Panel

4. Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) Or Driver Information Display (DID)

Locking And Unlocking The

RKE Air Suspension (Remote Lowering Of Vehicle) — If

To Unlock From The Driver Or Passenger Side:

Grab The Door Handle To Unlock

VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM

To Arm The System:

To Disarm The System:

SEAT BELT SYSTEMS

First Row Center Lap Belt Operating Instructions — If Equipped

Seat Belt Pretensioner

SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) — AIR BAGS

Advanced Front Air Bags

Supplemental Side Air Bags

Enhanced Accident Response System

Enhanced Accident Response System Reset Procedure

Air Bag Warning Light

Event Data Recorder (EDR)

LATCH — Lower Anchors And Tethers For CHildren

LATCH – Lower Anchors And Tethers For CHildren

LATCH System Weight Limit

Locating LATCH Anchorages

Locating Tether Anchorages

Center Seat LATCH (Regular/Quad/Crew Cab Full And Standard

Center Seat LATCH (Mega/Quad/Crew Cab Split Bench)

Installing The Child Restraint Using The LATCH Lower Anchors

Installing The Child Restraint Using The Vehicle Seat Belts

Installing The Child Restraint Using The Vehicle Seat Belts

Tether Anchorage Weight Limit

To Install A Child Seat Using An ALR:

To Install A Child Seat Using A Cinching Latch Plate:

Installing The Top Tether Strap (With Either Lower Anchors Or

Tether Strap Installation

Tether Strap Through Outboard Tether Strap

Tether Strap Through Outboard Tether Strap

Tether Strap Loop With Head Restraint In

Tether Strap Through Center Tether Strap

Tether Strap Through Center Tether Strap

Installing Three Child Restraints:

Front Head Restraints

Rear Head Restraints

Adjusting The Seat Forward Or Rearward

Passenger’s Power Seat — If Equipped

Power Lumbar — If Equipped

Driver Memory Seat — If Equipped

Manual Seat Adjuster — If Equipped

Manual Seat Adjusting Bar/Recline Lever

Dump Feature (Manual Recline Seat Only) — Standard Cab

Rear Heated Seats